Compounds that modulate intracellular calcium

ABSTRACT

Described herein are compounds and pharmaceutical compositions containing such compounds, which modulate the activity of store-operated calcium (SOC) channels. Also described herein are methods of using such SOC channel modulators, alone and in combination with other compounds, for treating diseases or conditions that would benefit from inhibition of SOC channel activity.

CROSS-REFERENCE

This application is a continuation of U.S. application Ser. No.14/267,759, filed May 1, 2014; which is a continuation of U.S.application Ser. No. 13/643,537, filed Apr. 17, 2013, now U.S. Pat. No.8,754,219, issued Jun. 17, 2014; which is a National Phase applicationof International Application No. PCT/US2011/034134, filed Apr. 27, 2011;which claims the benefit of U.S. Provisional Application Nos.61/407,792, filed Oct. 28, 2010; 61/377,823, filed Aug. 27, 2010; and61/328,549, filed Apr. 27, 2010, all of which are incorporated byreference in their entirety.

FIELD OF THE INVENTION

Described herein are compounds, pharmaceutical compositions andmedicaments that include such compounds, and methods of using suchcompounds to modulate store operated calcium (SOC) channel activity.

BACKGROUND OF THE INVENTION

Calcium plays a vital role in cell function and survival. For example,calcium is a key element in the transduction of signals into and withincells. Cellular responses to growth factors, neurotransmitters, hormonesand a variety of other signal molecules are initiated throughcalcium-dependent processes.

Virtually all cell types depend in some manner upon the generation ofcytoplasmic Ca²⁺ signals to regulate cell function, or to triggerspecific responses. Cytosolic Ca²⁺ signals control a wide array ofcellular functions ranging from short-term responses such as contractionand secretion to longer-term regulation of cell growth andproliferation. Usually, these signals involve some combination ofrelease of Ca²⁺ from intracellular stores, such as the endoplasmicreticulum (ER), and influx of Ca²⁺ across the plasma membrane. In oneexample, cell activation begins with an agonist binding to a surfacemembrane receptor, which is coupled to phospholipase C (PLC) through aG-protein mechanism. PLC activation leads to the production of inositol1,4,5-triphosphate (IP₃), which in turn activates the IP₃ receptorcausing release of Ca²⁺ from the ER. The fall in ER Ca²⁺ then signals toactivate plasma membrane store-operated calcium (SOC) channels.

Store-operated calcium (SOC) influx is a process in cellular physiologythat controls such diverse functions such as, but not limited to,refilling of intracellular Ca²⁺ stores (Putney et al. Cell, 75, 199-201,1993), activation of enzymatic activity (Fagan et al., J. Biol. Chem.275:26530-26537, 2000), gene transcription (Lewis, Annu. Rev. Immunol.19:497-521, 2001), cell proliferation (Nunez et al., J. Physiol. 571.1,57-73, 2006), and release of cytokines (Winslow et al., Curr. Opin.Immunol. 15:299-307, 2003). In some nonexcitable cells, e.g., bloodcells, immune cells, hematopoietic cells, T lymphocytes and mast cells,SOC influx occurs through calcium release-activated calcium (CRAC)channels, a type of SOC channel.

The calcium influx mechanism has been referred to as store-operatedcalcium entry (SOCE). Stromal interaction molecule (STIM) proteins arean essential component of SOC channel function, serving as the sensorsfor detecting the depletion of calcium from intracellular stores and foractivating SOC channels.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION

Described herein are compounds of Formula (I), (IA), (II), (IIA), (III),(IIIA), (IV), (IVA), (V), (VA), (VI), (VIA), (VII), or (VIIA)compositions that include such compounds, and methods of use thereof,for modulating intracellular calcium. In one aspect, compounds ofFormula (I), (IA), (II), (IIA), (III), (IIIA), (IV), (IVA), (V), (VA),(VI), (VIA), (VII), or (VIIA) modulate intracellular calcium byinhibition of store operated calcium channel activity. In one aspect,compounds of Formula (I), (IA), (II), (IIA), (III), (IIIA), (IV), (IVA),(V), (VA), (VI), (VIA), (VII), or (VIIA) modulate intracellular calciumby preventing the activity of activated store operated calcium channelcomplexes. In one aspect, compounds of Formula (I), (IA), (II), (IIA),(III), (IIIA), (IV), (IVA), (V), (VA), (VI), (VIA), (VII), or (VIIA)inhibit activation of store operated channels. In one aspect, compoundsof Formula (I), (IA), (II), (IIA), (III), (IIIA), (IV), (IVA), (V),(VA), (VI), (VIA), (VII), or (VIIA) inhibit activation ofcalcium-release activated calcium channels. In one aspect, compounds ofFormula (I), (IA), (II), (IIA), (III), (IIIA), (IV), (IVA), (V), (VA),(VI), (VIA), (VII), or (VIIA) modulate an activity of, modulate aninteraction of, or modulate the level of, or distribution of, or bindto, or interact with at least one protein of the SOC channel complex. Inone aspect, compounds of Formula (I), (IA), (II), (IIA), (III), (IIIA),(IV), (IVA), (V), (VA), (VI), (VIA), (VII), or (VIIA) modulate anactivity of, modulate an interaction of, or modulate the level of, ordistribution of, or bind to, or interact with at least one protein ofthe CRAC channel complex.

In one aspect, described herein is a compound having the structure ofFormula (I):

wherein:L₁ is O, S, or NR₁₁ wherein R₁₁ is H, C₁-C₆alkyl, or C₂-C₆alkenyl;L₂ is —NH—C(═O)—, or —C(═O)NH—;

R₁ is aryl or heteroaryl; wherein aryl or heteroaryl is optionallysubstituted with at least one R₃ or forms a bicyclic system;

R₂ is aryl or heteroaryl; wherein aryl or heteroaryl is optionallysubstituted with at least one R₃;

R₃ is independently selected from H, F, Cl, Br, I, —CN, —NO₂, —OH, —CF₃,—OCF₃, —OR₅, C₁-C₆alkyl, C₃-C₈cycloalkyl, C₁-C₆heteroalkyl,C₁-C₆haloalkyl, C₂-C₈heterocycloalkyl, optionally substituted aryl,optionally substituted O-aryl, optionally substituted heteroaryl,—NHS(═O)₂R₄, —S(═O)₂N(R₅)₂, —N(R₅)S(═O)₂N(R₅)₂, —C(═O)CF₃,—C(═O)NHS(═O)₂R₄, —S(═O)₂NHC(═O)R₄, —N(R₅)₂, —N(R₅)C(═O)R₅,—N(R₅)C(═O)N(R₅)₂, —N(R₅)C(═O)OR₄, —CO₂R₅, —C(═O)R₅, —OC(═O)R₄,—OC(═O)N(R₅)₂, —CON(R₅)₂, —SR₅, —S(═O)R₄, and —S(═O)₂R₄;

n is an integer selected from 0 to 4;

each R₄ is independently selected from C₁-C₆alkyl, C₁-C₆haloalkyl,C₃-C₈cycloalkyl, phenyl, and benzyl;

each R₅ is independently selected from H, C₁-C₆alkyl, C₁-C₆haloalkyl,C₃-C₈cycloalkyl, phenyl, and benzyl;

or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, pharmaceutically acceptablesolvate, or pharmaceutically acceptable prodrug thereof.

In another aspect is a compound having the structure of Formula (II):

wherein:R′₁ is

L₂ is —NH—C(═O)—, or —C(═O)NH—;

X is S, O, or NR₅;

Y is CR₁₀, N;

R₂ is aryl or heteroaryl; wherein aryl or heteroaryl is optionallysubstituted with at least one R₃;

R₃ is independently selected from H, F, Cl, Br, I, —CN, —NO₂, —OH, —CF₃,—OCF₃, —OR₅, C₁-C₆alkyl, C₃-C₈cycloalkyl, C₁-C₆heteroalkyl,C₁-C₆haloalkyl, C₂-C₈heterocycloalkyl, optionally substituted aryl,optionally substituted O-aryl, optionally substituted heteroaryl;

n is an integer selected from 0-4;

R₅ is selected from H, C₁-C₆alkyl, C₁-C₆haloalkyl, C₃-C₈cycloalkyl,phenyl, and benzyl;

R₉ and R₁₀ are each independently selected from H, D, C₁-C₆alkyl,halogen, C₁-C₆ carbonylalkyl, or CF₃;

or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, pharmaceutically acceptablesolvate, or pharmaceutically acceptable prodrug thereof.

In one aspect is a compound of Formula (III) having the structure:

wherein:

R″₁ is

L₂ is —NH—C(═O)—, or —C(═O)NH—;

R₂ is aryl, heteroaryl, fused aryl or fused heteroaryl; wherein aryl,heteroaryl, fused aryl or fused heteroaryl is optionally substitutedwith at least one R₃;

R₃ is independently selected from F, Cl, Br, I, —CN, —NO₂, —OH, —OCF₃,—OR₅, optionally substituted aryl, optionally substituted O-aryl,optionally substituted heteroaryl, —NHS(═O)₂R₄, —S(═O)₂N(R₅)₂,—N(R₅)S(═O)₂N(R₅)₂, —C(═O)CF₃, —C(═O)NHS(═O)₂R₄, —S(═O)₂NHC(═O)R₄,—N(R₅)₂, —N(R₅)C(═O)R₅, —N(R₅)C(═O)N(R₅)₂, —N(R₅)C(═O)OR₄, —CO₂R₅,—C(═O)R₅, —OC(═O)R₄, —OC(═O)N(R₅)₂, —CON(R₅)₂, —SR₅, —S(═O)R₄, and—S(═O)₂R₄;

n is an integer selected from 0-4;

each R₄ is independently selected from C₁-C₆alkyl, C₁-C₆haloalkyl,C₃-C₈cycloalkyl, phenyl, and benzyl;

R₅ and R₇ are each independently selected from H, C₁-C₆alkyl,C₁-C₆haloalkyl, C₃-C₈cycloalkyl, phenyl, and benzyl;

R₆ is selected from H, F, Cl, Br, I, —CN, —NO₂, —OH, —CF₃, —OCF₃, —OR₅,C₁-C₆alkyl, C₃-C₈cycloalkyl, C₁-C₆heteroalkyl, C₁-C₆haloalkyl,C₂-C₄heterocycloalkyl, optionally substituted aryl, optionallysubstituted O-aryl, optionally substituted heteroaryl, —NHS(═O)₂R₄,—S(═O)₂N(R₅)₂, —N(R₅)S(═O)₂N(R₅)₂, —C(═O)CF₃, —C(═O)NHS(═O)₂R₄,—S(═O)₂NHC(═O)R₄, —N(R₅)₂, —N(R₅)C(═O)R₄, —N(R₅)C(═O)N(R₅)₂,—N(R₅)C(═O)OR₄, —CO₂R₅, —C(═O)R₅, —OC(═O)R₄, —OC(═O)N(R₅)₂, —CON(R₅)₂,—SR₅, —S(═O)R₄, and —S(═O)₂R₄;

or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, pharmaceutically acceptablesolvate, or pharmaceutically acceptable prodrug thereof.

In another aspect is a compound of Formula (IV) having the structure:

wherein:

R″₁ is

L₂ is —NH—C(═O)—, or —C(═O)NH—;

R₂ is aryl, heteroaryl, fused aryl or fused heteroaryl; wherein aryl,heteroaryl, fused aryl, or fused heteroaryl is optionally substitutedwith at least one R₃;

R₃ is independently selected from H, D, F, Cl, Br, I, —CN, —NO₂, —OH,—CF₃, —OCF₃, —OR₅, —NR₅R₅, C₁-C₆alkyl, C₃-C₈cycloalkyl,C₁-C₆heteroalkyl, C₁-C₆haloalkyl, C₂-C₈heterocycloalkyl, optionallysubstituted aryl, optionally substituted O-aryl, optionally substitutedheteroaryl, —NHS(═O)₂R₄, —S(═O)₂N(R₅)₂, —N(R₅)S(═O)₂N(R₅)₂, —C(═O)CF₃,—C(═O)NHS(═O)₂R₄, —S(═O)₂NHC(═O)R₄, —N(R₅)₂, —N(R₅)C(═O)R₅,—N(R₅)C(═O)N(R₅)₂, —N(R₅)C(═O)OR₄, —CO₂R₅, —C(═O)R₅, —OC(═O)R₄,—OC(═O)N(R₅)₂, —CON(R₅)₂, —SR₅, —S(═O)R₄, and —S(═O)₂R₄;

n is an integer selected from 0-3;

each R₄ is independently selected from C₁-C₆alkyl, C₁-C₆haloalkyl,C₃-C₈cycloalkyl, phenyl, and benzyl;

R₅ and R₇ are each independently selected from H, C₁-C₆alkyl,C₁-C₆haloalkyl, C₃-C₈cycloalkyl, phenyl, and benzyl;

R₆ is selected from CN or optionally substituted aryl, optionallysubstituted O-aryl, optionally substituted heteroaryl;

or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, pharmaceutically acceptablesolvate, or pharmaceutically acceptable prodrug thereof.

In another aspect is a compound of Formula (V) having the structure:

wherein:R′₁ is

L₂ is —NH—C(═O)—, or —C(═O)NH—;

Y is independently selected from CR₉ or N;

R₂ is aryl, heteroaryl, fused aryl or fused heteroaryl; wherein aryl,heteroaryl, fused aryl or fused heteroaryl is optionally substitutedwith at least one R₃;

R₃ is independently selected from H, F, D, Cl, Br, I, —CN, —NO₂, —OH,—CF₃, —OCF₃, —OR₅, C₁-C₆alkyl, C₃-C₈cycloalkyl, C₁-C₆heteroalkyl,C₁-C₆haloalkyl, C₂-C₈heterocycloalkyl, optionally substituted aryl,optionally substituted O-aryl, optionally substituted heteroaryl,

n is an integer selected from 0-3;

R₉ and R₁₀ are each independently selected from H, D, C₁-C₆alkyl,halogen, C₁-C₆haloalkyl, —OR₅, —OCF₃, C₁-C₆ carbonylalkyl, or —CF₃;

R₅ is independently selected from H, C₁-C₆alkyl, C₁-C₆haloalkyl,C₃-C₈cycloalkyl, phenyl, and benzyl;

or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, pharmaceutically acceptablesolvate, or pharmaceutically acceptable prodrug thereof.

In another aspect is a compound of Formula (VI) having the structure:

wherein:R′₁ is,

L₂ is —NH—C(═O)—, or —C(═O)NH—;

Y is independently selected from CR₉ or N;

R₂ is aryl, heteroaryl, fused aryl or fused heteroaryl; wherein aryl,heteroaryl, fused aryl or fused heteroaryl is optionally substitutedwith at least one R₃;

R₃ is independently selected from H, F, D, Cl, Br, I, —CN, —NO₂, —OH,—CF₃, —OCF₃, —OR₅, C₁-C₆alkyl, C₃-C₈cycloalkyl, C₁-C₆heteroalkyl,C₁-C₆haloalkyl, C₂-C₈heterocycloalkyl, optionally substituted aryl,optionally substituted O-aryl, optionally substituted heteroaryl,

n is an integer selected from 0-3;

R₉ is independently selected from H, D, halogen, C₁-C₆alkyl,C₁-C₆haloalkyl, —OR₅, —OCF₃, C₁-C₆ carbonylalkyl, or —CF₃;

R₁₀ is selected from halogen, C₁-C₆alkyl, C₁-C₆haloalkyl, —OR₅, —OCF₃,C₁-C₆ carbonylalkyl, or —CF₃;

R₅ is independently selected from H, C₁-C₆alkyl, C₁-C₆haloalkyl,C₃-C₈cycloalkyl, phenyl, and benzyl;

or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, pharmaceutically acceptablesolvate, or pharmaceutically acceptable prodrug thereof.

In one embodiment is a compound of Formula (II) wherein R₁₀ is selectedfrom CF₃, C₁-C₆alkyl. In another embodiment, R₁₀ is C₂H₅. In a furtherembodiment, R₁₀ is C₁-C₆alkyl. In yet a further embodiment, R₁₀ is CH₃.

In yet another embodiment, R₂ is aryl. In a further embodiment, aryl isphenyl. In yet a further embodiment, the phenyl group is substitutedwith at least one substituent selected from D, F, Cl, Br, I, —CN, —NO₂,—OH, —CF₃, —OCF₃, —OR₅, C₁-C₆alkyl, C₃-C₈cycloalkyl, C₁-C₆heteroalkyl,C₁-C₆haloalkyl, C₂-C₈heterocycloalkyl, optionally substituted aryl,optionally substituted O-aryl, and optionally substituted heteroaryl. Inone embodiment, the substituent is fluorine. In one embodiment, phenylis substituted with at least 2 substituents. In another embodiment,phenyl is substituted with at least 3 substituents.

In a further aspect is a compound of Formula (VII) having the structure:

wherein:R′₁ is

L₂ is —NH—C(═O)—, or —C(═O)NH—;

Y is CR₃, O, NR₅, or S;

R₂ is aryl, heteroaryl, fused aryl or fused heteroaryl; wherein aryl,heteroaryl, fused aryl or fused heteroaryl is optionally substitutedwith at least one R₃;

R₃ is independently selected from H, F, D, Cl, Br, I, —CN, —NO₂, —OH,—CF₃, —OCF₃, —OR₅, C₁-C₆alkyl, C₃-C₈cycloalkyl, C₁-C₆heteroalkyl,C₁-C₆haloalkyl, C₂-C₈heterocycloalkyl, optionally substituted aryl,optionally substituted O-aryl, optionally substituted heteroaryl,

n is an integer selected from 0-3;

R₉ is independently selected from H, D, halogen, C₁-C₆alkyl,C₁-C₆haloalkyl, —OR₅, —OCF₃, C₁-C₆ carbonylalkyl, or —CF₃;

R₁₀ is selected from halogen, C₁-C₆alkyl, C₁-C₆haloalkyl, —OR₅, —OCF₃,C₁-C₆ carbonylalkyl, or CF₃;

R₅ is independently selected from H, C₁-C₆alkyl, C₁-C₆haloalkyl,C₃-C₈cycloalkyl, phenyl, and benzyl;

or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, pharmaceutically acceptablesolvate, or pharmaceutically acceptable prodrug thereof.

In another aspect is a pharmaceutical composition comprising apharmaceutically acceptable diluent, excipient or binder, and a compoundhaving the structure of Formula (I), (IA), (II), (IIA), (III), (IIIA),(IV), (IVA), (V), (VA), (VI), (VIA), (VII), or (VIIA) orpharmaceutically acceptable salt, pharmaceutically acceptable prodrug,or pharmaceutically acceptable solvate thereof.

In another aspect is a method of treating a disease, disorder orcondition in a mammal that would benefit from inhibition of storeoperated calcium channel activity comprising administering to the mammala compound having the structure of Formula (I), (IA), (II), (IIA),(III), (IIIA), (IV), (IVA), (V), (VA), (VI), (VIA), (VII), or (VIIA) orpharmaceutically acceptable salt, pharmaceutically acceptable solvate,or pharmaceutically acceptable prodrug thereof, or a pharmaceuticalcomposition comprising same with a pharmaceutically acceptable diluent,excipient or binder.

In another aspect is a method of modulating store-operated calcium (SOC)channel activity comprising contacting the SOC channel complex, orportion thereof, with a compound of Formula (I), (IA), (II), (IIA),(III), (IIIA), (IV), (IVA), (V), (VA), (VI), (VIA), (VII), or (VIIA) orpharmaceutically acceptable salt, pharmaceutically acceptable solvate,or pharmaceutically acceptable prodrug thereof, or a pharmaceuticalcomposition comprising same with a pharmaceutically acceptable diluent,excipient or binder.

In another aspect is a method of modulating calcium release activatedcalcium channel (CRAC) activity in a mammal comprising administering tothe mammal a compound of Formula (I), (IA), (II), (IIA), (III), (IIIA),(IV), (IVA), (V), (VA), (VI), (VIA), (VII), or (VIIA) wherein thecompound of Formula (I), (IA), (II), (IIA), (III), (IIIA), (IV), (IVA),(V), (VA), (VI), (VIA), (VII), or (VIIA) modulates CRAC activity in themammal.

In another aspect is a method of inhibiting store-operated calcium entry(SOCE) activation of nuclear factor of activated T cells (NFAT) in amammal comprising administering to the mammal a compound of Formula (I),(IA), (II), (IIA), (III), (IIIA), (IV), (IVA), (V), (VA), (VI), (VIA),(VII), or (VIIA) wherein the compound of Formula (I), (IA), (II), (IIA),(III), (IIIA), (IV), (IVA), (V), (VA), (VI), (VIA), (VII), or (VIIA)inhibits SOCE activation of NFAT in the mammal.

In yet another aspect is a method of decreasing cytokine release byinhibiting the SOCE activation of NFAT in a mammal comprisingadministering to the mammal a compound of Formula (I), (IA), (II),(IIA), (III), (IIIA), (IV), (IVA), (V), (VA), (VI), (VIA), (VII), or(VIIA) wherein the compound of Formula (I), (IA), (II), (IIA), (III),(IIIA), (IV), (IVA), (V), (VA), (VI), (VIA), (VII), or (VIIA) decreasescytokine release in the mammal.

In a further aspect is a method of treating a disease, disorder orcondition in a mammal that would benefit from inhibition of storeoperated calcium channel activity comprising administering to the mammala compound of Formula (I), (IA), (II), (IIA), (III), (IIIA), (IV),(IVA), (V), (VA), (VI), (VIA), (VII), or (VIIA).

In one aspect is a method for treating an autoimmune disease,heteroimmune disease or condition, or inflammatory disease in a mammalcomprising administering to the mammal a compound of Formula (I), (IA),(II), (IIA), (III), (IIIA), (IV), (IVA), (V), (VA), (VI), (VIA), (VII),or (VIIA) or pharmaceutically acceptable salt or prodrug thereof.

In one embodiment, the autoimmune disease is inflammatory bowel disease,rheumatoid arthritis, myasthenia gravis, multiple sclerosis, Sjogren'ssyndrome, type I diabetes, lupus erythematosus, psoriasis,osteoarthritis, scleroderma, and autoimmune hemolytic anemia.

In another embodiment, the heteroimmune disease or condition isgraft-versus-host disease, graft rejection, atopic dermatitis, allergicconjunctivitis, organ transplant rejection, allogeneic or xenogenictransplantation, and allergic rhinitis.

In a further embodiment, the inflammatory disease is uveitis,vasculitis, vaginitis, asthma, inflammatory muscle disease, dermatitis,interstitial cystitis, colitis, Crohn's disease, dermatomyositis,hepatitis, and chronic relapsing hepatitis.

In another aspect is a method of treating a disease, disorder orcondition in a mammal that would benefit from inhibition of storeoperated calcium channel activity comprising administering to the mammala compound of Formula (I), (IA), (II), (IIA), (III), (IIIA), (IV),(IVA), (V), (VA), (VI), (VIA), (VII), or (VIIA) or a pharmaceuticallyacceptable salt, N-oxide or prodrug thereof.

In one embodiment, the disease, disorder or condition in the mammal isselected from glomerulonephritis, hepatic diseases or disorders, renaldiseases or disorders, chronic obstructive pulmonary disease,osteoporosis, eczema, pulmonary fibrosis, thyroiditis, cystic fibrosis,and primary biliary cirrhosis.

Compounds provided herein are used for modulating intracellular calcium.In one aspect, compounds provided herein modulate SOC channel activity.In one aspect, compounds provided herein modulate CRAC channel activity.In another aspect, compounds provided herein modulate STIM proteinactivity. In another aspect, compounds provided herein modulate Oraiprotein activity. In another aspect, compounds provided herein modulatethe functional interactions of STIM proteins with Orai proteins. Inanother aspect, compounds provided herein reduce the number offunctional SOC channels. In another aspect, compounds provided hereinreduce the number of functional CRAC channels. In one aspect, compoundsdescribed herein are SOC channel blockers. In one aspect, compoundsdescribed herein are CRAC channel blockers or CRAC channel modulators.

In one aspect, compounds of Formula (I), (IA), (II), (IIA), (III),(IIIA), (IV), (IVA), (V), (VA), (VI), (VIA), (VII), or (VIIA) areselective inhibitors of CRAC channel activity.

Other objects, features and advantages of the compounds, compositions,methods, and uses described herein will become apparent from thefollowing detailed description. It should be understood, however, thatthe detailed description and the specific examples, while indicatingspecific embodiments, are given by way of illustration only, sincevarious changes and modifications within the spirit and scope of thedisclosure will become apparent from this detailed description.

BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE FIGURES

FIG. 1 outlines the I_(CRAC) channel pathway.

FIG. 2 shows the typical I_(CRAC) traces in cells stably overexpressinghuman Orai1 and STIM1 in response to the voltage stimulus immediatelyafter break-in, before I_(CRAC) is activated, and at 5 min afterI_(CRAC) is fully activated by depletion of intracellular calciumstores.

DETAILED DESCRIPTION

Cellular calcium homeostasis is a result of the summation of regulatorysystems involved in the control of intracellular calcium levels andmovements. Cellular calcium homeostasis is achieved, at least in part,by calcium binding and by movement of calcium into and out of the cellacross the plasma membrane and within the cell by movement of calciumacross membranes of intracellular organelles including, for example, theendoplasmic reticulum, sarcoplasmic reticulum, mitochondria andendocytic organelles including endosomes and lysosomes.

Movement of calcium across cellular membranes is carried out byspecialized proteins. For example, calcium from the extracellular spacecan enter the cell through various calcium channels and a sodium/calciumexchanger and is actively extruded from the cell by calcium pumps andsodium/calcium exchangers. Calcium can also be released from internalstores through inositol trisphosphate or ryanodine receptors and can betaken up by these organelles by means of calcium pumps.

Calcium can enter cells by any of several general classes of channels,including but not limited to, voltage-operated calcium (VOC) channels,store-operated calcium (SOC) channels, and sodium/calcium exchangersoperating in reverse mode. VOC channels are activated by membranedepolarization and are found in excitable cells like nerve and muscleand are for the most part not found in nonexcitable cells. Under someconditions, Ca²⁺ can enter cells via Na⁺-Ca²⁺ exchangers operating inreverse mode.

Endocytosis provides another process by which cells can take up calciumfrom the extracellular medium through endosomes. In addition, somecells, e.g., exocrine cells, can release calcium via exocytosis.

Cytosolic calcium concentration is tightly regulated with resting levelsusually estimated at approximately 0.1 μM in mammalian cells, whereasthe extracellular calcium concentration is typically about 2 mM. Thistight regulation facilitates transduction of signals into and withincells through transient calcium flux across the plasma membrane andmembranes of intracellular organelles. There is a multiplicity ofintracellular calcium transport and buffer systems in cells that serveto shape intracellular calcium signals and maintain the low restingcytoplasmic calcium concentration. In cells at rest, the principalcomponents involved in maintaining basal calcium levels are calciumpumps and leak pathways in both the endoplasmic reticulum and plasmamembrane. Disturbance of resting cytosolic calcium levels can affecttransmission of calcium-dependent signals and give rise to defects in anumber of cellular processes. For example, cell proliferation involves aprolonged calcium signaling sequence. Other cellular processes thatinvolve calcium signaling include, but are not limited to, secretion,transcription factor signaling, and fertilization.

Cell-surface receptors that activate phospholipase C (PLC) createcytosolic Ca²⁺ signals from intra- and extra-cellular sources. Aninitial transient rise of [Ca²⁺]_(i) (intracellular calciumconcentration) results from the release of Ca²⁺ from the endoplasmicreticulum (ER), which is triggered by the PLC product,inositol-1,4,5-trisphosphate (IP₃), opening IP₃ receptors in the ER(Streb et al. Nature, 306, 67-69, 1983). A subsequent phase of sustainedCa²⁺ entry across the plasma membrane then ensues, through specializedstore operated calcium (SOC) channels (in the case of immune cells theSOC channels are calcium release-activated calcium (CRAC) channels) inthe plasma membrane. Store-operated Ca²⁺ entry (SOCE) is the process inwhich the emptying of Ca²⁺ stores itself activates Ca²⁺ channels in theplasma membrane to help refill the stores (Putney, Cell Calcium, 7,1-12, 1986; Parekh et al., Physiol. Rev. 757-810; 2005). SOCE does morethan simply provide Ca²⁺ for refilling stores, but can itself generatesustained Ca²⁺ signals that control such essential functions as geneexpression, cell metabolism and exocytosis (Parekh and Putney, Physiol.Rev. 85, 757-810 (2005).

In lymphocytes and mast cells, activation of antigen or Fc receptors,respectively causes the release of Ca²⁺ from intracellular stores, whichin turn leads to Ca²⁺ influx through CRAC channels in the plasmamembrane. The subsequent rise in intracellular Ca²⁺ activatescalcineurin, a phosphatase that regulates the transcription factor NFAT.In resting cells, NFAT is phosphorylated and resides in the cytoplasm,but when dephosphorylated by calcineurin, NFAT translocates to thenucleus and activates different genetic programmes depending onstimulation conditions and cell type. In response to infections andduring transplant rejection, NFAT partners with the transcription factorAP-1 (Fos-Jun) in the nucleus of “effector” T cells, therebytransactivating cytokine genes, genes that regulate T cell proliferationand other genes that orchestrate an active immune response (Rao et al.,Annu Rev Immunol., 1997; 15:707-47). In contrast, in T cells recognizingself antigens, NFAT is activated in the absence of AP-1, and activates atranscriptional programme known as “anergy” that suppresses autoimmuneresponses (Macian et al., Transcriptional mechanisms underlyinglymphocyte tolerance. Cell. 2002 Jun. 14; 109(6):719-31). In a subclassof T cells known as regulatory T cells which suppress autoimmunitymediated by self-reactive effector T cells, NFAT partners with thetranscription factor FOXP3 to activate genes responsible for suppressorfunction (Wu et al., Cell, 2006 Jul. 28; 126(2):375-87; Rudensky A Y,Gavin M, Zheng Y. Cell. 2006 Jul. 28; 126(2):253-256).

The endoplasmic reticulum (ER) carries out a variety processes. The ERhas a role as both a Ca²⁺ sink and an agonist-sensitive Ca²⁺ store and,protein folding/processing takes place within its lumen. In the lattercase, numerous Ca²⁺-dependent chaperone proteins ensure that newlysynthesized proteins are folded correctly and sent off to theirappropriate destination. The ER is also involved in vesicle trafficking,release of stress signals, regulation of cholesterol metabolism, andapoptosis. Many of these processes require intraluminal Ca²⁺, andprotein misfolding, ER stress responses, and apoptosis can all beinduced by depleting the ER of Ca²⁺ for prolonged periods of time.Because it contains a finite amount of Ca²⁺, it is clear that ER Ca²⁺content must fall after release of that Ca²⁺ during stimulation.However, to preserve the functional integrity of the ER, it is vitalthat the Ca²⁺ content does not fall too low or is maintained at least ata low level. Replenishment of the ER with Ca²⁺ is therefore a centralprocess to all eukaryotic cells. Because a fall in ER Ca²⁺ contentactivates store-operated Ca²⁺ channels in the plasma membrane, a majorfunction of this Ca²⁺ entry pathway is believed to be maintenance of ERCa²⁺ levels that are necessary for proper protein synthesis and folding.However, store-operated Ca²⁺ channels have other important roles.

The understanding of store operated calcium entry was provided byelectrophysiological studies which established that the process ofemptying the stores activated a Ca²⁺ current in mast cells called Ca²⁺release-activated Ca²⁺ current or I_(CRAC). I_(CRAC) is non-voltageactivated, inwardly rectifying, and remarkably selective for Ca²⁺. It isfound in several cell types mainly of hemapoietic origin. I_(CRAC) isnot the only store-operated current, and it is now apparent thatstore-operated influx encompasses a family of Ca²⁺-permeable channels,with different properties in different cell types. I_(CRAC) was thefirst store-operated Ca²⁺ current to be described and remains a popularmodel for studying store-operated influx.

Store-operated calcium channels can be activated by any procedure thatempties ER Ca²⁺ stores; it does not seem to matter how the stores areemptied, the net effect is activation of store-operated Ca²⁺ entry.Physiologically, store emptying is evoked by an increase in the levelsof IP₃ or other Ca²⁺-releasing signals followed by Ca²⁺ release from thestores. But there are several other methods for emptying stores. Thesemethods include the following:

1) elevation of IP₃ in the cytosol (following receptor stimulation or,dialyzing the cytosol with IP₃ itself or related congeners like thenonmetabolizable analog Ins(2,4,5)P₃);

2) application of a Ca²⁺ ionophore (e.g., ionomycin) to permeabilize theER membrane;

3) dialyzing the cytoplasm with high concentrations of Ca²⁺ chelators(e.g., EGTA or BAPTA), which chelate Ca²⁺ that leaks from the stores andhence prevent store refilling;

4) exposure to the sarcoplasmic/endoplasmic reticulum Ca²⁺-ATPase(SERCA) inhibitors like thapsigargin, cyclopiazonic acid, anddi-tert-butylhydroquinone;

5) sensitizing the IP₃ receptors to resting levels of InsP₃ with agentslike thimerosal; and

6) loading membrane-permeable metal Ca²⁺ chelators likeN,N,N′,N′-tetrakis(2-pyridylmethyl)ethylene diamine (TPEN) directly intothe stores.

Through mass action, TPEN lowers free intraluminal Ca2+ concentrationwithout changing total store Ca²⁺ such that the storedepletion-dependent signal is generated.

These methods of emptying stores are not devoid of potential problems.The key feature of store-operated Ca²⁺ entry is that it is the fall inCa²⁺ content within the stores and not the subsequent rise incytoplasmic Ca²⁺ concentration that activates the channels. However,ionomycin and SERCA pump blockers generally cause a rise in cytoplasmicCa²⁺ concentration as a consequence of store depletion, and such a risein Ca²⁺ could open Ca²⁺-activated cation channels permeable to Ca²⁺. Oneway to avoid such problems is to use agents under conditions wherecytoplasmic Ca²⁺ has been strongly buffered with high concentrations ofCa²⁺ chelator such as EGTA or BAPTA.

Store-Operated Calcium Entry

Reduced calcium concentration in intracellular calcium stores such asthe endoplasmic reticulum resulting from release of calcium there fromprovides a signal for influx of calcium from the extracellular mediuminto the cell. This influx of calcium, which produces a sustained“plateau” elevation of cytosolic calcium concentration, generally doesnot rely on voltage-gated plasma membrane channels and does not involveactivation of calcium channels by calcium. This calcium influx mechanismis referred to as capacitative calcium entry (CCE), calciumrelease-activated, store-operated or depletion-operated calcium entry.Store-operated calcium entry can be recorded as an ionic current withdistinctive properties. This current is referred to as I_(SOC)(store-operated current) or I_(CRAC) (calcium release-activatedcurrent).

Electrophysiological analysis of store-operated or calciumrelease-activated currents reveal distinct biophysical properties (see,e.g., Parekh and Penner (1997) Physiol. Rev. 77:901-930) of thesecurrents. For example, the current can be activated by depletion ofintracellular calcium stores (e.g., by non-physiological activators suchas thapsigargin, CPA, ionomycin and BAPTA, and physiological activatorssuch as IP₃) and can be selective for divalent cations, such as calcium,over monovalent ions in physiological solutions or conditions, can beinfluenced by changes in cytosolic calcium levels, and can show alteredselectivity and conductivity in the presence of low extracellularconcentrations of divalent cations. The current may also be blocked orenhanced by 2-APB (depending on concentration) and blocked by SKF96365and Gd³⁺ and generally can be described as a calcium current that is notstrictly voltage-gated.

Patch-clamp studies in mast cells and Jurkat leukaemic T cells haveestablished the CRAC entry mechanism as an ion channel with distinctivebiophysical characteristics, including a high selectivity for Ca²⁺paired with an exceedingly low conductance. Furthermore, the CRACchannel was shown to fulfill the rigorous criteria for beingstore-operated, which is the activation solely by the reduction of Ca²⁺in the ER rather than by cytosolic Ca²⁺ or other messengers generated byPLC (Prakriya et al., In Molecular and Cellular Insights into IonChannel Biology (ed. Robert Maue) 121-140 (Elsevier Science, Amsterdam,2004)).

Regulation of Store-Operated Calcium Entry by Intracellular CalciumStores

Store-operated calcium entry is regulated by the level of calcium withinan intracellular calcium store. Intracellular calcium stores can becharacterized by sensitivity to agents, which can be physiological orpharmacological, which activate release of calcium from the stores orinhibit uptake of calcium into the stores. Different cells have beenstudied in characterization of intracellular calcium stores, and storeshave been characterized as sensitive to various agents, including, butnot limited to, IP₃ and compounds that effect the IP₃ receptor,thapsigargin, ionomycin and/or cyclic ADP-ribose (cADPR) (see, e.g.,Berridge (1993) Nature 361:315-325; Churchill and Louis (1999) Am. J.Physiol. 276:C426-C434; Dargie et al. (1990) Cell Regul. 1:279-290;Gerasimenko et al. (1996) Cell 84:473-480; Gromoda et al. (1995) FEBSLett. 360:303-306; Guse et al. (1999) Nature 398:70-73).

Accumulation of calcium within endoplasmic reticulum and sarcoplasmicreticulum (SR; a specialized version of the endoplasmic reticulum instriated muscle) storage organelles is achieved throughsarcoplasmic-endoplasmic reticulum calcium ATPases (SERCAs), commonlyreferred to as calcium pumps. During signaling (i.e., when endoplasmicreticulum channels are activated to provide for calcium release from theendoplasmic reticulum into the cytoplasm), endoplasmic reticulum calciumis replenished by the SERCA pump with cytoplasmic calcium that hasentered the cell from the extracellular medium (Yu and Hinkle (2000) J.Biol. Chem. 275:23648-23653; Hofer et al. (1998) EMBO J. 17:1986-1995).

Calcium release channels associated with IP₃ and ryanodine receptorsprovide for controlled release of calcium from endoplasmic andsarcoplasmic reticulum into the cytoplasm resulting in transientincreases in cytoplasmic calcium concentration. IP₃ receptor-mediatedcalcium release is triggered by IP₃ formed by the break down of plasmamembrane phosphoinositides through the action of phospholipase C, whichis activated by binding of an agonist to a plasma membrane Gprotein-coupled receptor or tyrosine kinase. Ryanodine receptor-mediatedcalcium release is triggered by an increase in cytoplasmic calcium andis referred to as calcium-induced calcium release (CICR). The activityof ryanodine receptors (which have affinity for ryanodine and caffeine)may also be regulated by cyclic ADP-ribose.

Thus, the calcium levels in the stores, and in the cytoplasm, fluctuate.For example, ER free calcium concentration can decrease from a range ofabout 60-400 μM to about 1-50 μM when HeLa cells are treated withhistamine, an agonist of PLC-linked histamine receptors (Miyawaki et al.(1997) Nature 388:882-887). Store-operated calcium entry is activated asthe free calcium concentration of the intracellular stores is reduced.Depletion of store calcium, as well as a concomitant increase incytosolic calcium concentration, can thus regulate store-operatedcalcium entry into cells.

Cytoplasmic Calcium Buffering

Agonist activation of signaling processes in cells can involve dramaticincreases in the calcium permeability of the endoplasmic reticulum, forexample, through opening of IP₃ receptor channels, and the plasmamembrane through store-operated calcium entry. These increases incalcium permeability are associated with an increase in cytosoliccalcium concentration that can be separated into two components: a“spike” of calcium release from the endoplasmic reticulum duringactivation of the IP₃ receptor and a plateau phase which is a sustainedelevation of calcium levels resulting from entry of calcium into thecytoplasm from the extracellular medium. Upon stimulation, the restingintracellular free calcium concentration of about 100 nM can riseglobally to greater than 1 μM and higher in microdomains of the cell.The cell modulates these calcium signals with endogenous calciumbuffers, including physiological buffering by organelles such asmitochondria, endoplasmic reticulum and Golgi. Mitochondrial uptake ofcalcium through a uniporter in the inner membrane is driven by the largenegative mitochondrial membrane potential, and the accumulated calciumis released slowly through sodium-dependent and -independent exchangers,and, under some circumstances, the permeability transition pore (PTP).Thus, mitochondria can act as calcium buffers by taking up calciumduring periods of cellular activation and can slowly release it later.Uptake of calcium into the endoplasmic reticulum is regulated by thesarcoplasmic and endoplasmic reticulum calcium ATPase (SERCA). Uptake ofcalcium into the Golgi is mediated by a P-type calcium transport ATPase(PMR1/ATP2C1). Additionally, there is evidence that a significant amountof the calcium released upon IP₃ receptor activation is extruded fromthe cell through the action of the plasma membrane calcium ATPase. Forexample, plasma membrane calcium ATPases provide the dominant mechanismfor calcium clearance in human T cells and Jurkat cells, althoughsodium/calcium exchange also contributes to calcium clearance in human Tcells. Within calcium-storing organelles, calcium ions can be bound tospecialized calcium-buffering proteins, such as, for example,calsequestrins, calreticulins and calnexins. Additionally, there arecalcium-buffering proteins in the cytosol that modulate calcium spikesand assist in redistribution of calcium ions. Thus, proteins and othermolecules that participate in any of these and other mechanisms throughwhich cytosolic calcium levels can be reduced are proteins that areinvolved in, participate in and/or provide for cytoplasmic calciumbuffering. Thus, cytoplasmic calcium buffering helps regulatecytoplasmic Ca²⁺ levels during periods of sustained calcium influxthrough SOC channels or bursts of Ca²⁺ release. Large increases incytoplasmic Ca2+ levels or store refilling deactivate SOCE.

Downstream Calcium Entry-Mediated Events

In addition to intracellular changes in calcium stores, store-operatedcalcium entry affects a multitude of events that are consequent to or inaddition to the store-operated changes. For example Ca²⁺ influx resultsin the activation of a large number of calmodulin-dependent enzymesincluding the serine phosphatase calcineurin. Activation of calcineurinby an increase in intracellular calcium results in acute secretoryprocesses such as mast cell degranulation. Activated mast cells releasepreformed granules containing histamine, heparin, TNFα and enzymes suchas β-hexosaminidase Some cellular events, such as B and T cellproliferation, require sustained calcineurin signaling, which requires asustained increase in intracellular calcium. A number of transcriptionfactors are regulated by calcineurin, including NFAT (nuclear factor ofactivated T cells), MEF2 and NFκB. NFAT transcription factors playimportant roles in many cell types, including immune cells. In immunecells NFAT mediates transcription of a large number of molecules,including cytokines, chemokines and cell surface receptors.Transcriptional elements for NFAT have been found within the promotersof cytokines such as IL-2, IL-3, IL-4, IL-5, IL-8, IL-13, as well astumor necrosis factor alpha (TNFα), granulocyte colony-stimulatingfactor (G-CSF), and gamma-interferon (γ-IFN).

The activity of NFAT proteins is regulated by their phosphorylationlevel, which in turn is regulated by both calcineurin and NFAT kinases.Activation of calcineurin by an increase in intracellular calcium levelsresults in dephosphorylation of NFAT and entry into the nucleus.Rephosphorylation of NFAT masks the nuclear localization sequence ofNFAT and prevents its entry into the nucleus. Because of its strongdependence on calcineurin-mediated dephosphorylation for localizationand activity, NFAT is a sensitive indicator of intracellular freecalcium levels.

Diseases, Disorders or Conditions

Clinical studies demonstrate that the CRAC channel is absolutelyrequired for the activation of genes underlying the T cell response toantigen. Sustained calcium entry is needed for lymphocyte activation andadaptive immune response. Calcium entry into lymphocytes occursprimarily through the CRAC channels. Increased calcium leads to NFATactivation and expression of cytokines required for immune responseInhibiting the store operated calcium entry is an efficient way toprevent T cell activation.

Inhibition of CRAC channel activity with the compounds described herein,such as compounds of Formula (I), (IA), (II), (IIA), (III), (IIIA),(IV), (IVA), (V), (VA), (VI), (VIA), (VII), or (VIIA) provide a meansfor providing immunosuppresive therapy as demonstrated by theelimination of store-operated calcium entry noted in patients withsevere-combined immunodeficiency (SCID). T cells, fibroblasts, and insome cases B cells, from patients with T cell immunodeficiency or SCIDhaving a principal defect in T cell activation show a strong defect instore-operated calcium entry (Feske et al. (2001) Nature Immunol.2:316-324; Paratiseti et al. (1994) J. Biol. Chem. 269:32327-32335; andLe Deist et al. (1995) Blood 85:1053-1062). SCID patients lack adaptiveimmune response, but without any impairment or toxicity in major organs.The SCID patient phenotype indicates that inhibition of CRAC channels isan effective strategy for immunosuppression.

Diseases/Disorders Involving Inflammation and Diseases/Disorders Relatedto the Immune System

Diseases or disorders that can be treated or prevented using thecompounds, compositions, and methods provided herein include diseasesand disorders involving inflammation and/or that are related to theimmune system. These diseases include but are not limited to asthma,chronic obstructive pulmonary disease, rheumatoid arthritis,inflammatory bowel disease, glomerulonephritis, neuroinflammatorydiseases such as multiple sclerosis, and disorders of the immune system.

The activation of neutrophils (PMN) by inflammatory mediators is partlyachieved by increasing cytosolic calcium concentration. Store-operatedcalcium influx in particular is thought to play an important role in PMNactivation. It has been shown that trauma increases PMN store-operatedcalcium influx (Hauser et al. (2000) J. Trauma Injury Infection andCritical Care 48 (4):592-598) and that prolonged elevations of cytosoliccalcium concentration due to enhanced store-operated calcium influx mayalter stimulus-response coupling to chemotaxins and contribute to PMNdysfunction after injury. Modulation of PMN cytosolic calciumconcentration through store-operated calcium channels might therefore beuseful in regulating PMN-mediated inflammation and spare cardiovascularfunction after injury, shock or sepsis (Hauser et al. (2001) J.Leukocyte Biology 69 (1):63-68).

Calcium plays a critical role in lymphocyte activation. Activation oflymphocytes, e.g., by antigen stimulation, results in rapid increases inintracellular free calcium concentration and activation of transcriptionfactors, including nuclear factor of activated T cells (NFAT), NF-κB,JNK1, MEF2 and CREB. NFAT is a key transcriptional regulator of the IL-2(and other cytokine) genes (see, e.g. Lewis (2001) Annu. Rev. Immunol19:497-521). A sustained elevation of intracellular calcium level isrequired to keep NFAT in a transcriptionally active state, and isdependent on store-operated calcium entry. Reduction or blocking ofstore-operated calcium entry in lymphocytes blocks calcium-dependentlymphocyte activation. Thus, modulation of intracellular calcium, andparticularly store-operated calcium entry (e.g., reduction in,elimination of store-operated calcium entry), in lymphocytes can be amethod for treating immune and immune-related disorders, including, forexample, chronic immune diseases/disorders, acute immunediseases/disorders, autoimmune and immunodeficiency diseases/disorders,diseases/disorders involving inflammation, organ transplant graftrejections and graft-versus-host disease and altered (e.g., hyperactive)immune responses. For example treatment of an autoimmunedisease/disorder might involve reducing, blocking or eliminatingstore-operated calcium entry in lymphocytes.

Examples of immune disorders include psoriasis, rheumatoid arthritis,vasculitis, inflammatory bowel disease, dermatitis, osteoarthritis,asthma, inflammatory muscle disease, allergic rhinitis, vaginitis,interstitial cystitis, scleroderma, osteoporosis, eczema, allogeneic orxenogeneic transplantation (organ, bone marrow, stem cells and othercells and tissues) graft rejection, graft-versus-host disease, lupuserythematosus, inflammatory disease, type I diabetes, pulmonaryfibrosis, dermatomyositis, Sjogren's syndrome, thyroiditis (e.g.,Hashimoto's and autoimmune thyroiditis), myasthenia gravis, autoimmunehemolytic anemia, multiple sclerosis, cystic fibrosis, chronic relapsinghepatitis, primary biliary cirrhosis, allergic conjunctivitis and atopicdermatitis.

Cancer and Other Proliferative Diseases

Compounds of Formula (I), (IA), (II), (IIA), (III), (IIIA), (IV), (IVA),(V), (VA), (VI), (VIA), (VII), or (VIIA), compositions thereof, andmethods provided herein may be used in connection with treatment ofmalignancies, including, but not limited to, malignancies oflymphoreticular origin, bladder cancer, breast cancer, colon cancer,endometrial cancer, head and neck cancer, lung cancer, melanoma, ovariancancer, prostate cancer and rectal cancer. Store-operated calcium entrymay play an important role in cell proliferation in cancer cells (Weisset al. (2001) International Journal of Cancer 92 (6):877-882).

Inhibition of SOCE is sufficient to prevent tumor cell proliferation.The pyrazole derivative BTP-2, a direct I_(CRAC) blocker inhibits SOCEand proliferation in Jurkat cells (Zitt et al., J. Biol. Chem., 279,12427-12437, 2004) and in colon cancer cells. It has been suggested thatsustained SOCE requires mitochonrial Ca²⁺ uptake (Nunez et al., J.Physiol. 571.1, 57-73, 2006) and that prevention of mitochondrial Ca²⁺uptake leads to SOCE inhibition (Hoth et al., P.N.A.S., 97, 10607-10612,2000; Hoth et al., J. Cell. Biol. 137, 633-648, 1997; Glitsch et al.,EMBO J., 21, 6744-6754, 2002). Stimulation of Jurkat cells inducessustained SOCE and activation of the Ca²⁺-dependent phosphatasecalcineurin that dephosphorylates NFAT, promoting expression ofinterleukin-2 and proliferation. Compounds of Formula (I), (IA), (II),(IIA), (III), (IIIA), (IV), (IVA), (V), (VA), (VI), (VIA), (VII), or(VIIA) inhibit SOCE and may be used in the treatment of cancer or otherproliferative diseases or conditions.

Liver Diseases and Disorders

Diseases or disorders that can be treated or prevented using thecompounds of Formula (I), (IA), (II), (IIA), (III), (IIIA), (IV), (IVA),(V), (VA), (VI), (VIA), (VII), or (VIIA), compositions thereof, andmethods provided herein include hepatic or liver diseases and disorders.These diseases and disorders include but are not limited to liverinjury, for example, due to transplantation, hepatitis and cirrhosis.

Store-operated calcium entry has been implicated in chronic liverdisease (Tao et al. (1999) J. Biol. Chem., 274(34):23761-23769) as wellas transplantation injury after cold preservation-warm reoxygenation(Elimadi et al. (2001) Am J. Physiology, 281(3 Part 1):G809-G815).

Kidney Diseases and Disorders

Diseases or disorders that can be treated or prevented using the methodsprovided herein include kidney or renal diseases and disorders.Mesangial cell hyperplasia is often a key feature of such diseases anddisorders. Such diseases and disorders may be caused by immunological orother mechanisms of injury, including IgAN, membranoproliferativeglomerulonephritis or lupus nephritis. Imbalances in the control ofmesangial cell replication also appear to play a key role in thepathogenesis of progressive renal failure.

The turnover of mesangial cells in normal adult kidney is very low witha renewal rate of less than 1%. A prominent feature of glomerular/kidneydiseases is mesangial hyperplasia due to elevated proliferation rate orreduced cell loss of mesangial cells. When mesangial cell proliferationis induced without cell loss, for example due to mitogenic stimulation,mesangioproliferative glomerulonephritis can result. Data have indicatedthat regulators of mesangial cell growth, particularly growth factors,may act by regulating store-operated calcium channels (Ma et al. (2001)J Am. Soc. Of Nephrology, 12:(1) 47-53). Modulators of store-operatedcalcium influx may aid in the treatment of glomerular diseases byinhibiting mesangial cell proliferation.

Store Operated Calcium Channels

Clinical studies demonstrate that the CRAC channel, a type of SOCchannel, is absolutely required for the activation of genes underlyingthe T cell response to antigen (Partiseti et al., J Biol. Chem., 269,32327-32335, 1994; Feske et al., Curr. Biol. 15, 1235-1241, 2005). SOCEcan contribute directly to the elevation of cytosolic Ca²⁺ levels ([Ca²⁺]_(i)), as in T lymphocytes where CRAC channels generate the sustainedCa²⁺ signals needed to drive gene expression underlying T cellactivation by antigen. Sustained calcium entry is needed for lymphocyteactivation and adaptive immune response. Calcium entry into lymphocytesoccurs primarily through the CRAC channels. Increased calcium levelslead to NFAT activation and expression of cytokines required for immuneresponse.

The CRAC channel has a distinctive biophysical fingerprint, quantifiablestore-dependence, and essential function in T cells. Studies have shownthat CRAC channels are formed from two component proteins, whichinteract to form CRAC channels. The CRAC channel is assembled by twofunctional components, STIM1 and Orai1. STIM1 (stromal interactionmolecule 1) was identified as the mammalian ER Ca²⁺ sensor (Liou, J. etal. Curr. Biol. 15, 1235-1241 (2005); Roos, J. et al. J. Cell Biol. 169,435-445 (2005); WO 20041078995; US 2007/0031814). Orai1/CRACM1 wasidentified as a component of the mammalian CRAC channel (Feske, S. etal. Nature 441, 179-185 (2006); Vig, M. et al. Science 312, 1220-1223(2006); Zhang, S. L. et al. Proc. Natl Acad. Sci. USA 103, 9357-9362(2006)).

STIM1 is the sensor of Ca²⁺ within ER Ca²⁺ stores, moving in response tostore depletion into ER puncta close to the plasma membrane. Orai1 is apore forming CRAC channel subunit in the plasma membrane. The twomembrane proteins STIM1 and Orai1 have each been shown to be essentialfor the activation of CRAC channels.

Expression of both STIM1 and Orai1 in human embryonic kidney 293 cells(HEK293 cells) reconstitute functional CRAC channels. Expression ofOrai1 alone strongly reduces store-operated Ca²⁺ entry in HEK293 cellsand the Ca²⁺ release-activated Ca²⁺ current (I_(CRAC)) in rat basophilicleukemia cells. However, expressed along with the store-sensing STIM1protein, Orai1 causes a massive increase in SOCE, enhancing the rate ofCa²⁺ entry by up to 103-fold. This Ca²⁺ entry is entirely storedependent since the same co-expression causes no measurablestore-independent Ca²⁺ entry. The entry is completely blocked by thestore operated channel blocker, 2-aminoethoxydiphenylborate. STIMproteins are mediate Ca²⁺ store-sensing and endoplasmic reticulum-plasmamembrane coupling with no intrinsic channel properties. Orai1contributes the plasma membrane channel component responsible for Ca²⁺entry. The suppression of CRAC channel function by Orai1 overexpressionreflects a required stoichiometry between STIM1 and Orai1 (Soboloff etal., J. Biol. Chem. Vol. 281, no. 30, 20661-20665, 2006).

Stromal Interacting Molecule (STIM) Proteins

In an RNAi screen in Drosophila S2 cells using thapsigargin-activatedCa²⁺ entry as a marker for store-operated channels one gene gave asubstantially reduced Ca²⁺ entry, and that gene coded for the proteinstromal interaction molecule (Stim) (Roos, J. et al. J. Cell Biol. 169,435-445, 2005). There are two homologues of Stim in mammalian cells,STIM1 and STIM2, both of which appear to be distributed ubiquitously(Williams et al., Biochem J. 2001 Aug. 1; 357(Pt 3):673-85). STIM1 isthe ER Ca²⁺ sensor for store-operated Ca²⁺ entry. STIM1 is a 77 kDa typeI membrane protein with multiple predicted protein interaction orsignaling domains and is located predominantly in the ER, but also to alimited extent in the plasma membrane.

Knockdown of STIM1 by RNAi substantially reduced I_(CRAC) in Jurkat Tcells, and store-operated Ca²⁺ entry in HEK293 epithelial cells andSH-SY5Y neuroblastoma cells. However, knockdown of the closely relatedSTIM2 had no effect. These results indicate an essential role of STIM(Drosophila) and STIM1 (mammals) in the mechanism of activation ofstore-operated channels. It is unlikely that STIM1 is the store-operatedchannel itself. It has no channel-like sequence, and overexpression ofthe protein only modestly enhances Ca²⁺ entry. STIM1 is located both onthe plasma membrane and intracellular membranes like the ER (Manji etal., Biochim Biophys Acta. 2000 Aug. 31; 1481(1):147-55. 2000). Theprotein sequence suggests that it spans the membrane once, with its NH₂terminus oriented toward the lumen of the ER or the extracellular space.The NH₂ terminus contains an EF-hand domain, and functions as the Ca²⁺sensor in the ER. The protein also contains protein-protein interactiondomains, notably coiled-coiled domains in the cytoplasm and a sterilemotif (SAM) in the ER (or extracellular space), both near the predictedtransmembrane domain. STIM1 can oligomerize and thus the protein in theER and plasma membrane could interact bridging the two (Roos, J. et al.J. Cell Biol. 169, 435-445 (2005)).

Total internal reflection fluorescence (TIRF) and confocal microscopyreveal that STIM1 is distributed throughout the ER when Ca²⁺ stores arefull, but redistributes into discrete puncta near the plasma membrane onstore depletion. Although the redistribution of STIM1 into junctional ERregions is slow (Liou, J. et al. Curr. Biol. 15, 1235-1241 (2005);Zhang, S. L. et al. Nature 437, 902-905 (2005), it does precede theopening of CRAC channels by several seconds (Wu et al., J. Cell Biol.174, 803-813 (2006)) and is therefore rapid enough to be an essentialstep in the activation of CRAC channels.

It has been suggested that store depletion causes the insertion of STIM1into the plasma membrane where it may control store operated calciumentry through the CRAC channels (Zhang, S. L. et al. Nature 437, 902-905(2005); Spassova, M. A. et al. Proc. Natl Acad. Sci. USA 103, 4040-4045(2006)).

The critical evidence for STIM1 as the Ca²⁺ sensor for SOCE is thatmutation of predicted Ca²⁺-binding residues of the EF hand structuralmotif, expected to reduce its affinity for Ca²⁺ and hence mimic thestore-depleted state, causes STIM1 to redistribute spontaneously intopuncta and trigger constitutive Ca²⁺ influx through SOCs even whenstores are full (Spassova, M. A. et al. Proc. Natl Acad. Sci. USA 103,4040-4045 (2006); Liou, J. et al. Curr. Biol. 15, 1235-1241 (2005)).

Orai Proteins

Orai1 (also known as CRACM1) is a widely expressed, 33 kDa plasmamembrane protein with 4 transmembrane domains and a lack of significantsequence homology to other ion channels (Vig, M. et al. Science 312,1220-1223 (2006); Zhang, S. L. et al. Proc. Natl Acad. Sci. USA 103,9357-9362 (2006)).

Studies of T cells from human patients with a severe combinedimmunodeficiency (SCID) syndrome, in which T cell receptor engagement orstore depletion failed to activate Ca²⁺ entry, was shown to be due to asingle point mutation in Orai1 (Feske, S. et al. Nature 441, 179-185(2006)).

Other mammalian Orai homologues exist, e.g. Orai2 and Orai3, howevertheir function is not clearly defined. Orai2 and Orai3 can exhibit SOCchannel activity when overexpressed with STIM1 in HEK cells (Mercer, J.C. et al. J. Biol. Chem. 281, 24979-24990 (2006)).

Evidence that Orai1 contributes to the CRAC channel pore was obtained byOrai1 mutagenesis studies. Selectivity of the CRAC channel for Ca²⁺ ionswas shown by mutations at either Glu 106 or Glu 190, which weaken theability of Ca²⁺ binding in order block permeation of monovalent cations(similar to mechanisms described for voltage-gated Ca²⁺ channels)(Yeromin, A. V. et al. Nature 443, 226-229 (2006); Vig, M. et al. Curr.Biol. 16, 2073-2079 (2006); Prakriya, M. et al. Nature 443, 230-233(2006)).

Neutralizing the charge on a pair of aspartates in the I-II loop (Asp110 and Asp 112) reduces block by Gd³⁺ and block of outward current byextracellular Ca²⁺, indicating that these negatively charged sites maypromote accumulation of polyvalent cations near the mouth of the pore.

Currents observed through overexpression of Orai1 closely resembleI_(CRAC), and the fact that Orai1 can form multimers (Yeromin, A. V. etal. Nature 443, 226-229 (2006); Vig, M. et al. Curr. Biol. 16, 2073-2079(2006); Prakriya, M. et al. Nature 443, 230-233 (2006)), makes it likelythat the native CRAC channel is either a multimer of Orai1 alone or incombination with the closely related subunits Orai2 and/or Orai3.

Functional Store Operated Calcium Channels

The characterization of SOC channels has been largely obtained by onetype of SOC channel, the CRAC channel. CRAC channel activity istriggered by the loss of Ca²⁺ from the ER lumen, which is coupled to theopening of CRAC channels in the plasma membrane through the actions ofSTIM1 and Orai1. Depletion of Ca²⁺ is sensed by STIM1, causing it toaccumulate in junctional ER adjacent to the plasma membrane. In aTIRF-based Ca²⁺-imaging study to map the locations of open CRACchannels, [Ca²⁺ ]_(i) elevations were seen to co-localize with STIM1puncta, showing directly that CRAC channels open only in extremeproximity to these sites (Luik, et al., J. Cell Biol. 174, 815-825(2006)).

In cells co-expressing both STIM1 and Orai1, store depletion causesOrai1 itself to move from a dispersed distribution to accumulate in theplasma membrane directly opposite STIM1, enabling STIM1 to activate thechannel (Luik, et al., J. Cell Biol. 174, 815-825 (2006); Xu, P. et al.Biochem. Biophys. Res. Commun. 350, 969-976 (2006)). Thus, CRAC channelsare formed by apposed clusters of STIM1 in the ER and Orai1 in theplasma membrane. The junctional gap between the ER and plasma membranewhere Orai1/STIM1 clusters from (about 10-25 nm) may be small enough topermit protein-protein interactions between STIM1 and Orai1. This issupported by the fact that overexpressed STIM1 and Orai1 can beco-immunoprecipitated (Yeromin, A. V. et al. Nature 443, 226-229 (2006);Vig, M. et al. Curr. Biol. 16, 2073-2079 (2006)).

Thus, STIM1 and Orai1 interact either directly or as members of amultiprotein complex. Support for this was observed when the expressionof the cytosolic portion of STIM1 by itself was sufficient to activateCRAC channels in one study (Huang, G. N. et al. Nature Cell Biol. 8,1003-1010 (2006)), and the effects of deleting the ERM/coiled-coil andother C-terminal domains suggest roles in STIM1 clustering and SOCchannel activation (Baba, Y. et al. Proc. Natl Acad. Sci. USA 103,16704-16709 (2006)). On the luminal side of STIM1, the isolated EF-SAMregion forms dimers and higher-order multimers on removal of Ca²⁺ invitro, indicating that STIM1 oligomerization may be an early step instore operated calcium activation (Stathopulos, et al., J. Biol. Chem.281, 35855-35862 (2006)).

In some embodiments, compounds of Formula (I), (IA), (II), (IIA), (III),(IIIA), (IV), (IVA), (V), (VA), (VI), (VIA), (VII), or (VIIA) describedherein modulate intracellular calcium, such as, inhibition or reductionof SOCE and/or I_(CRAC). In other embodiments, the modulation bycompounds of Formula (I), (IA), (II), (IIA), (III), (IIIA), (IV), (IVA),(V), (VA), (VI), (VIA), (VII), or (VIIA) result from a variety ofeffects, such as, but not limited to, binding to a protein, interactionwith a protein, or modulation of interactions, activities, levels or anyphysical, structural or other property of a protein involved inmodulating intracellular calcium (e.g. a STIM protein and/or Oraiprotein).

For example, methods for assessing binding or interaction of a testagent with a protein involved in modulating intracellular calciuminclude NMR, mass spectroscopy, fluorescence spectroscopy, scintillationproximity assays, surface plasmon resonance assays and others. Examplesof methods for assessing modulation of interactions, activities, levelsor any physical, structural or other property of a protein involved inmodulating intracellular calcium include, but are not limited to, FRETassays to assess effects on protein interactions, NMR, X-raycrystallography and circular dichroism to assess effects on proteininteractions and on physical and structural properties of a protein, andactivity assays suitable for assessing a particular activity of aprotein.

Monitoring or Assessing Effects on Intracellular Calcium

In some embodiments, monitoring or assessing the effect of a compound ofFormula (I), (IA), (II), (IIA), (III), (IIIA), (IV), (IVA), (V), (VA),(VI), (VIA), (VII), or (VIIA) on intracellular calcium in any of thescreening/identification methods described herein, a direct or indirectevaluation or measurement of cellular (including cytosolic andintracellular organelle or compartment) calcium and/or movement of ionsinto, within or out of a cell, organelle, calcium store or portionsthereof (e.g., a membrane) are conducted. A variety of methods aredescribed herein for evaluating calcium levels and ion movements orflux. The particular method used and the conditions employed depend onwhether a particular aspect of intracellular calcium is being monitoredor assessed. For example, in some embodiments described herein, reagentsand conditions are known, and are used, for specifically evaluatingstore-operated calcium entry, resting cytosolic calcium levels, calciumbuffering and calcium levels and uptake by or release from intracellularorganelles and calcium stores. In other embodiments, the effect of acompound of Formula (I), (IA), (II), (IIA), (III), (IIIA), (IV), (IVA),(V), (VA), (VI), (VIA), (VII), or (VIIA) on intracellular calcium ismonitored or assessed using, for example, a cell, an intracellularorganelle or calcium storage compartment, a membrane (including, e.g., adetached membrane patch or a lipid bilayer) or a cell-free assay system(e.g., outside-out membrane vesicle). Generally, some aspect ofintracellular calcium is monitored or assessed in the presence of testagent and compared to a control, e.g., intracellular calcium in theabsence of test agent.

Methods of Modulating Intracellular Calcium

In some embodiments, modulation of intracellular calcium is anyalteration or adjustment in intracellular calcium including but notlimited to alteration of calcium concentration or level in the cytoplasmand/or intracellular calcium storage organelles, e.g., endoplasmicreticulum, alteration in the movement of calcium into, out of and withina cell or intracellular calcium store or organelle, alteration in thelocation of calcium within a cell, and alteration of the kinetics, orother properties, of calcium fluxes into, out of and within cells. Insome embodiments, intracellular calcium modulation involves alterationor adjustment, e.g. reduction or inhibition, of store-operated calciumentry, cytosolic calcium buffering, calcium levels in or movement ofcalcium into, out of or within an intracellular calcium store ororganelle, and/or basal or resting cytosolic calcium levels. In someembodiments, modulation of intracellular calcium involves an alterationor adjustment in receptor-mediated ion (e.g., calcium) movement, secondmessenger-operated ion (e.g., calcium) movement, calcium influx into orefflux out of a cell, and/or ion (e.g., calcium) uptake into or releasefrom intracellular compartments, including, for example, endosomes andlysosomes.

In one aspect, compounds described herein modulate intracellularcalcium, such as but not limited to, modulation (e.g. reduction orinhibition) of SOC channel activity, such as inhibition of CRAC channelactivity (e g inhibition of I_(CRAC), inhibition of SOCE), in an immunesystem cell (e.g., a lymphocyte, white blood cell, T cell, B cell), afibroblast (or a cell derived from a fibroblast), or an epidermal,dermal or skin cell (e.g., a keratinocyte). In some embodiments, thestep of modulating one or more proteins involved in modulatingintracellular calcium (e.g. a STIM protein and/or Orai protein)involves, for example, reducing the level, expression of, an activityof, function of and/or molecular interactions of a protein. Forinstance, if a cell exhibits an increase in calcium levels or lack ofregulation of an aspect of intracellular calcium modulation, e.g.,store-operated calcium entry, then in other embodiments, modulatinginvolves reducing the level of, expression of, an activity or functionof, or a molecular interaction of a protein, e.g. a STIM protein and/orOrai protein.

Compounds

Compounds described herein modulate intracellular calcium and may beused in the treatment of diseases or conditions where modulation ofintracellular calcium has a beneficial effect. In one embodiment,compounds described herein inhibit store operated calcium entry. In oneembodiment, compounds of Formula (I), (IA), (II), (IIA), (III), (IIIA),(IV), (IVA), (V), (VA), (VI), (VIA), (VII), or (VIIA) interrupt theassembly of SOCE units. In another embodiment, compounds of Formula (I),(IA), (II), (IIA), (III), (IIIA), (IV), (IVA), (V), (VA), (VI), (VIA),(VII), or (VIIA) alter the functional interactions of proteins that formstore operated calcium channel complexes. In one embodiment, compoundsof Formula (I), (IA), (II), (IIA), (III), (IIIA), (IV), (IVA), (V),(VA), (VI), (VIA), (VII), or (VIIA) alter the functional interactions ofSTIM1 with Orai1. In other embodiments, compounds of Formula (I), (IA),(II), (IIA), (III), (IIIA), (IV), (IVA), (V), (VA), (VI), (VIA), (VII),or (VIIA) are SOC channel pore blockers. In other embodiments, compoundsof Formula (I), (IA), (II), (IIA), (III), (IIIA), (IV), (IVA), (V),(VA), (VI), (VIA), (VII), or (VIIA) are CRAC channel pore blockers.

In one aspect, compounds described herein inhibit theelectrophysiological current (I_(SOC)) directly associated withactivated SOC channels. In another aspect, compounds described hereininhibit the electrophysiological current (I_(CRAC)) directly associatedwith activated CRAC channels.

The diseases or disorders that may benefit from modulation ofintracellular calcium include, but are not limited to, an immunesystem-related disease (e.g., an autoimmune disease), a disease ordisorder involving inflammation (e.g., asthma, chronic obstructivepulmonary disease, rheumatoid arthritis, inflammatory bowel disease,glomerulonephritis, neuroinflammatory diseases, multiple sclerosis, anddisorders of the immune system), cancer or other proliferative disease,kidney disease and liver disease. In one aspect, compounds describedherein may be used as immunosuppresants to prevent transplant graftrejections, allogeneic or xenogeneic transplantation rejection (organ,bone marrow, stem cells, other cells and tissues), graft-versus-hostdisease. Transplant graft rejections can result from tissue or organtransplants. Graft-versus-host disease can result from bone marrow orstem cell transplantation.

Compounds described herein modulate an activity of, modulate aninteraction of, or binds to, or interacts with at least one portion of aprotein in the store operated calcium channel complex. In oneembodiment, compounds described herein modulate an activity of, modulatean interaction of, or binds to, or interacts with at least one portionof a protein in the calcium release activated calcium channel complex.In one aspect, compounds described herein reduce the level of functionalstore operated calcium channel complexes. In one aspect, compoundsdescribed herein reduce the level of activated store operated calciumchannel complexes. In one aspect, store operated calcium channelcomplexes are calcium release activated calcium channel complexes.

Compounds described herein for treatment of a disease or disorder, whenadministered to a subject having a disease or disorder effectivelyreduces, ameliorates or eliminates a symptom or manifestation of thedisease or disorder. Compounds described herein can also be administeredto a subject predisposed to a disease or disorder who does not yetmanifest a symptom of the disease or disorder, prevents or delaysdevelopment of the symptoms. The agent can have such effects alone or incombination with other agents, or may function to enhance a therapeuticeffect of another agent.

Compounds described herein, pharmaceutically acceptable salts,pharmaceutically acceptable prodrugs, or pharmaceutically acceptablesolvates thereof, modulate intracellular calcium, and may be used totreat patients where modulation of intracellular calcium providesbenefit.

In one aspect, the compounds described herein are selective inhibitorsof CRAC channel activity.

In another aspect, described herein is a compound having the structureof Formula (I):

wherein:

L₁ is O, S, or NR₁₁ wherein R₁₁ is H, C₁-C₆alkyl, or C₂-C₆alkenyl;

L₂ is —NH—C(═O)—, or —C(═O)NH—;

R₁ is aryl or heteroaryl; wherein aryl or heteroaryl is optionallysubstituted with at least one R₃ or forms a bicyclic system;

R₂ is aryl or heteroaryl; wherein aryl or heteroaryl is optionallysubstituted with at least one R₃;

R₃ is independently selected from H, F, Cl, Br, I, —CN, —NO₂, —OH, —CF₃,—OR₅, C₁-C₆alkyl, C₃-C₈cycloalkyl, C₁-C₆heteroalkyl, C₁-C₆haloalkyl,C₂-C₈heterocycloalkyl, optionally substituted aryl, optionallysubstituted O-aryl, optionally substituted heteroaryl, —NHS(═O)₂R₄,—S(═O)₂N(R₅)₂, —N(R₅)S(═O)₂N(R₅)₂, —C(═O)CF₃, —C(═O)NHS(═O)₂R₄,—S(═O)₂NHC(═O)R₄, —N(R₅)₂, —N(R₅)C(═O)R₅, —N(R₅)C(═O)N(R₅)₂,—N(R₅)C(═O)OR₄, —CO₂R₅, —C(═O)R₅, —OC(═O)R₄, —OC(═O)N(R₅)₂, —CON(R₅)₂,—SR₅, —S(═O)R₄, and —S(═O)₂R₄;

n is an integer selected from 0 to 4;

each R₄ is independently selected from C₁-C₆alkyl, C₁-C₆haloalkyl,C₃-C₈cycloalkyl, phenyl, and benzyl;

each R₅ is independently selected from H, C₁-C₆alkyl, C₁-C₆haloalkyl,C₃-C₈cycloalkyl, phenyl, and benzyl;

or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, pharmaceutically acceptablesolvate, or pharmaceutically acceptable prodrug thereof.

For any and all of the embodiments, substituents are selected from amongfrom a subset of the listed alternatives. For example, in someembodiments, R₁ is heteroaryl. In other embodiments, heteroaryl isselected from thienyl, thianthrenyl, furyl, pyranyl, thiadiazolyl,benzothiadiazolyl, isobenzofuranyl, chromenyl, xanthenyl,phenoxathiinyl, pyrrolyl, imidazolyl, pyrazolyl, isothiazolyl,isoxazolyl, pyridyl, pyrazinyl, pyrimidinyl, pyridazinyl, indolizinyl,isoindolyl, 3H-indolyl, indolyl, indazolyl, purinyl, 4H-quinolizinyl,isoquinolyl, quinolyl, phthalazinyl, naphthyridinyl, quinoxalinyl,quinazolinyl, oxazolyl, cinnolinyl, pteridinyl, 4aH-carbazolyl,carbazolyl, carbolinyl, phenanthridinyl, acridinyl, perimidinyl,phenanthrolinyl, phenazinyl, phenarsazinyl, phenothiazinyl, furazanyl,and phenoxazinyl. In one embodiment, R₁ is thiophenyl. In yet anotherembodiment, R₁ is isothiazolyl. In a further embodiment, R₁ isthiazolyl. In one embodiment, R₁ is pyrazolyl. In some embodiments, R₁is substituted with at least 2 substituents or at least 3 substituents.In yet another embodiment, R₁ is substituted with at least one R₃selected from F, Cl, Br, I, —CN, —NO₂, —OH, —CF₃, —OCF₃, —OR₅,C₁-C₆alkyl, and C₃-C₈cycloalkyl.

In some embodiments, heteroaryl or bicyclic system is selected from

wherein R₉ and R₁₀ are independently H, C₁-C₆alkyl, halogen,C₁-C₆carbonylalkyl, or CF₃.

In other embodiments, the heteroaryl or bicyclic system is selected froman optionally substituted benzoimidazolyl, an optionally substituted5,6,7,8-tetrahydroindolizinyl, an optionally substitutedimidazo[4,5-a]pyridyl, an optionally substituted imidazo[1,2-a]pyridyl,an optionally substituted imidazo[4,5-b]pyridyl, and an optionallysubstituted imidazo[4,5-c]pyridyl.

In one embodiment, R₁ is a heteroaryl selected from

wherein R₁₀ is selected from H, D, C₁-C₆alkyl. In one embodiment, R₁₀ isCF₃. In a further embodiment, R₁₀ is C₁-C₆alkyl. In one embodiment R₁₀is C₂H₅. In yet a further embodiment, R₁₀ is CH₃.

In another embodiment, R₃ is selected from F, Cl, Br, and I. In yet afurther embodiment, R₃ is F. In another embodiment, R₃ is Br. In afurther embodiment, R₃ is Cl. In another embodiment, R₃ isC₂-C₈heterocycloalkyl, optionally substituted aryl, optionallysubstituted O-aryl, or optionally substituted heteroaryl. In oneembodiment, R₃ is optionally substituted heteroaryl selected fromthienyl, thianthrenyl, furyl, pyranyl, thiadiazolyl, benzothiadiazolyl,isobenzofuranyl, chromenyl, xanthenyl, phenoxathiinyl, pyrrolyl,imidazolyl, pyrazolyl, isothiazolyl, isoxazolyl, pyridyl, pyrazinyl,pyrimidinyl, pyridazinyl, indolizinyl, isoindolyl, 3H-indolyl, indolyl,indazolyl, purinyl, 4H-quinolizinyl, isoquinolyl, quinolyl,phthalazinyl, naphthyridinyl, quinoxalinyl, quinazolinyl, oxazolyl,cinnolinyl, pteridinyl, 4aH-carbazolyl, carbazolyl, carbolinyl,phenanthridinyl, acridinyl, perimidinyl, phenanthrolinyl, phenazinyl,phenarsazinyl, phenothiazinyl, furazanyl, and phenoxazinyl. In a furtherembodiment, R₃ is oxadiazolyl.

In certain embodiments, R₂ is aryl. In other embodiments, R₂ is phenyl.In certain embodiments, the phenyl group is substituted with at leastone R₃ selected from F, Cl, Br, I, —CN, —NO₂, —OH, —CF₃, —OCF₃, —OR₅,C₁-C₆alkyl, C₃-C₈cycloalkyl, C₁-C₆heteroalkyl, C₁-C₆haloalkyl,C₂-C₈heterocycloalkyl, optionally substituted aryl, optionallysubstituted O-aryl, and optionally substituted heteroaryl. In someembodiments, phenyl is substituted with at least 2 substituents or atleast 3 substituents. In certain embodiments, R₃ is fluorine. In otherembodiment, R₃ is chlorine.

In another embodiment is a compound of Formula (I) wherein R₃ isselected from CF₃, C₁-C₆alkyl, and C₃-C₈cycloalkyl. In certainembodiments, R₃ is CF₃. In certain embodiments, R₃ is cyclopropyl. Inother embodiments, R₃ is C₁-C₆alkyl. In certain embodiments, R₃ is CH₃.In certain embodiments, R₃ is C₂H₅. In certain embodiments, R₃ isisopropyl.

In one embodiment, L₁ is O. In one embodiment, L₁ is S. In oneembodiment, L₁ is NR₁₁ wherein R₁₁ is H. In another embodiment, L₁ isNR₁₁ wherein R₁₁ is methyl, ethyl, n-propyl, iso-propyl, n-butyl,iso-butyl, or tert-butyl. In yet another embodiment, R₁₁ is methyl. Inanother embodiment, R₁₁ is iso-propyl. In a further embodiment, R₁₁ isC₂-C₆alkenyl. In another embodiment, C₂-C₆alkenyl is ethylene orpropylene.

In yet another embodiment, R₁ is aryl. In a further embodiment, R₁ isphenyl or napthyl. In yet another embodiment, the phenyl group issubstituted with at least one R₃ selected from F, Cl, Br, I, —CN, —NO₂,—OH, —CF₃, —OCF₃, —OR₅, C₁-C₆alkyl, C₃-C₈cycloalkyl, C₁-C₆heteroalkyl,C₁-C₆haloalkyl, C₂-C₈heterocycloalkyl, optionally substituted aryl,optionally substituted O-aryl, and optionally substituted heteroaryl. Inother embodiment, R₃ is chlorine. In certain embodiments, R₃ isfluorine. In some embodiments, phenyl is substituted with at least 2substituents or at least 3 substituents. In another embodiment, R₂ isheteroaryl selected from thienyl, thianthrenyl, furyl, pyranyl,thiadiazolyl, benzothiadiazolyl, isobenzofuranyl, chromenyl, xanthenyl,phenoxathiinyl, pyrrolyl, imidazolyl, pyrazolyl, isothiazolyl,isoxazolyl, pyridyl, pyrazinyl, pyrimidinyl, pyridazinyl, indolizinyl,isoindolyl, 3H-indolyl, indolyl, indazolyl, purinyl, 4H-quinolizinyl,isoquinolyl, quinolyl, phthalazinyl, naphthyridinyl, quinoxalinyl,quinazolinyl, oxazolyl, cinnolinyl, pteridinyl, 4aH-carbazolyl,carbazolyl, carbolinyl, phenanthridinyl, acridinyl, perimidinyl,phenanthrolinyl, phenazinyl, phenarsazinyl, phenothiazinyl, furazanyl,and phenoxazinyl.

In yet a further aspect is a compound selected from:

or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, pharmaceutically acceptablesolvate, or pharmaceutically acceptable prodrug thereof.

In another aspect is a compound having the structure of Formula (II):

wherein:

R′₁ is

L₂ is —NH—C(═O)—, or —C(═O)NH—;

X is S, O, or NR₅;

Y is CR₁₀, N;

R₂ is aryl or heteroaryl; wherein aryl or heteroaryl is optionallysubstituted with at least one R₃;

R₃ is independently selected from H, F, Cl, Br, I, —CN, —NO₂, —OH, —CF₃,—OCF₃, —OR₅, C₁-C₆alkyl, C₃-C₈cycloalkyl, C₁-C₆heteroalkyl,C₁-C₆haloalkyl, C₂-C₈heterocycloalkyl, optionally substituted aryl,optionally substituted O-aryl, optionally substituted heteroaryl;

n is an integer selected from 0-4;

R₅ is selected from H, C₁-C₆alkyl, C₁-C₆haloalkyl, C₃-C₈cycloalkyl,phenyl, and benzyl;

R₉ and R₁₀ are each independently selected from H, D, C₁-C₆alkyl,halogen, C₁-C₆carbonylalkyl, or CF₃;

or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, pharmaceutically acceptablesolvate, or pharmaceutically acceptable prodrug thereof.

In one embodiment, L₂ is —NH—C(═O)—. In yet a further embodiment, L₂ is—C(═O)NH—. In one embodiment is a compound of Formula (II) wherein R′₁is selected from,

wherein Y is CR₉; R₉ is H, C₁-C₆alkyl, halogen, C₁-C₆ carbonylalkyl, orCF₃. In one embodiment, R₉ is H. In one embodiment, X is O. In anotherembodiment, X is S. In a further embodiment, X is NR₅ wherein R₅ is H orC₁-C₆alkyl. In another embodiment R₉ is C₁-C₆alkyl. In a furtherembodiment, R₉ is methyl, ethyl, n-propyl, iso-propyl, n-butyl,iso-butyl, and tert-butyl. In one embodiment, R₁₀ is methyl, ethyl,n-propyl, iso-propyl. In a further embodiment R₁₀ is halogen selectedfrom F, Cl, Br, and I. In another embodiment, R₁₀ is F. In oneembodiment R₁₀ is Cl. In another embodiment, R₁₀ is Br. In anotherembodiment, R₁₀ is CF₃.

In another embodiment is a compound of Formula (II) wherein R₂ is aryloptionally substituted with at least one R₃. In another embodiment, arylis phenyl. In a further embodiment, phenyl is substituted with at leastone R₃ selected from F, Cl, Br, and I. In another embodiment, phenyl issubstituted with —OH, —CN, CF₃, or C₁-C₆alkyl. In another embodiment,C₁-C₆alkyl is selected from methyl, ethyl, n-propyl, iso-propyl,n-butyl, iso-butyl, or tert-butyl. In one embodiment, C₁-C₆alkyl ismethyl. In another embodiment, C1-C6alkyl is ethyl. In anotherembodiment, R₃ is C₃-C₈cycloalkyl. In a further embodiment, R₃ iscyclopropyl, cyclobutyl, cyclopentyl, or cyclohexyl. In yet anotherembodiment, R₂ is phenyl substituted with at least 2 substituents. In afurther embodiment, at least 3 substituents.

In yet another embodiment is a compound of Formula (II) wherein R₂ isheteroaryl selected from thienyl, thianthrenyl, furyl, pyranyl,thiadiazolyl, benzothiadiazolyl, isobenzofuranyl, chromenyl, xanthenyl,phenoxathiinyl, pyrrolyl, imidazolyl, pyrazolyl, isothiazolyl,isoxazolyl, pyridyl, pyrazinyl, pyrimidinyl, pyridazinyl, indolizinyl,isoindolyl, 3H-indolyl, indolyl, indazolyl, purinyl, 4H-quinolizinyl,isoquinolyl, quinolyl, phthalazinyl, naphthyridinyl, quinoxalinyl,quinazolinyl, oxazolyl, cinnolinyl, pteridinyl, 4aH-carbazolyl,carbazolyl, carbolinyl, phenanthridinyl, acridinyl, perimidinyl,phenanthrolinyl, phenazinyl, phenarsazinyl, phenothiazinyl, furazanyl,and phenoxazinyl. In another embodiment, heteroaryl is furan. In yetanother embodiment, heteroaryl is pyrazole. In another embodiment,heteroaryl is thiophene. In yet another embodiment, heteroaryl issubstituted with at least one R₃ selected from F, Cl, Br, I, —OH, —CN,NO₂, and C₁-C₆alkyl. In one embodiment, heteroaryl is substituted withat least one F. In another embodiment, with at least one Cl. In afurther embodiment, at least one Br. In yet a further embodiment, atleast one C₁-C₆alkyl selected from methyl, ethyl, n-propyl, iso-propyl,n-butyl, iso-butyl, or tert-butyl. In yet another embodiment, heteroarylis substituted with at least one methyl. In yet another embodiment,heteroaryl is substituted with at least two R₃ groups. In anotherembodiment, at least three R₃ groups.

In one aspect is a compound of Formula (III) having the structure:

wherein:

R″₁ is

L₂ is —NH—C(═O)—, or —C(═O)NH—;

R₂ is aryl, heteroaryl, fused aryl or fused heteroaryl; wherein aryl,heteroaryl, fused aryl or fused heteroaryl is optionally substitutedwith at least one R₃;

R₃ is independently selected from F, Cl, Br, I, —CN, —NO₂, —OH, —OCF₃,—OR₅, optionally substituted aryl, optionally substituted O-aryl,optionally substituted heteroaryl, —NHS(═O)₂R₄, —S(═O)₂N(R₅)₂,—N(R₅)S(═O)₂N(R₅)₂, —C(═O)CF₃, —C(═O)NHS(═O)₂R₄, —S(═O)₂NHC(═O)R₄,—N(R₅)₂, —N(R₅)C(═O)R₅, —N(R₅)C(═O)N(R₅)₂, —N(R₅)C(═O)OR₄, —CO₂R₅,—C(═O)R₅, —OC(═O)R₄, —OC(═O)N(R₅)₂, —CON(R₅)₂, —SR₅, —S(═O)R₄, and—S(═O)₂R₄;

n is an integer selected from 0-4;

each R₄ is independently selected from C₁-C₆alkyl, C₁-C₆haloalkyl,C₃-C₈cycloalkyl, phenyl, and benzyl;

R₅ and R₇ are each independently selected from H, C₁-C₆alkyl,C₁-C₆haloalkyl, C₃-C₈cycloalkyl, phenyl, and benzyl;

R₆ is selected from H, F, Cl, Br, I, —CN, —NO₂, —OH, —CF₃, —OCF₃, —OR₅,C₁-C₆alkyl, C₃-C₈cycloalkyl, C₁-C₆heteroalkyl, C₁-C₆haloalkyl,C₂-C₄heterocycloalkyl, optionally substituted aryl, optionallysubstituted O-aryl, optionally substituted heteroaryl, —NHS(═O)₂R₄,—S(═O)₂N(R₅)₂, —N(R₅)S(═O)₂N(R₅)₂, —C(═O)CF₃, —C(═O)NHS(═O)₂R₄,—S(═O)₂NHC(═O)R₄, —N(R₅)₂—N(R₅)C(═O)R₄, —N(R₅)C(═O)N(R₅)₂,—N(R₅)C(═O)OR₄, —CO₂R₅, —C(═O)R₅, —OC(═O)R₄, —OC(═O)N(R₅)₂, —CON(R₅)₂,—SR₅, —S(═O)R₄, and —S(═O)₂R₄;

or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, pharmaceutically acceptablesolvate, or pharmaceutically acceptable prodrug thereof.

In one embodiment is a compound of Formula (III) wherein L₂ is—NH—C(═O)—. In another embodiment is a compound of Formula (III) whereinL₂ is —C(═O)NH—. In a further embodiment R₂ is aryl optionallysubstituted with at least one R₃ selected from F, Cl, Br, and I. Inanother embodiment R₃ is selected from —CN, —NO₂, —OH, —OCF₃, and —OR₅,wherein R₅ is C₁-C₆alkyl. In another embodiment R₃ is —OH. In a furtherembodiment, R₃ is —CN. In another embodiment is a compound of Formula(III) wherein R₆ is selected from H, F, Cl, Br, and I. In anotherembodiment, R₆ is C₁-C₆alkyl. In a further embodiment, C₁-C₆alkyl ismethyl, ethyl, n-propyl, iso-propyl, n-butyl, iso-butyl or tert-butyl.In another embodiment R₇ is H or C₁-C₆alkyl. In another embodiment, R₇is methyl, ethyl, n-propyl, iso-propyl, n-butyl, iso-butyl ortert-butyl. In a further embodiment, R₇ is H. In yet a furtherembodiment, R₇ is methyl. In another embodiment is a compound of Formula(III) wherein R₂ is heteroaryl selected from thienyl, thianthrenyl,furyl, pyranyl, thiadiazolyl, benzothiadiazolyl, isobenzofuranyl,chromenyl, xanthenyl, phenoxathiinyl, pyrrolyl, imidazolyl, pyrazolyl,isothiazolyl, isoxazolyl, pyridyl, pyrazinyl, pyrimidinyl, pyridazinyl,indolizinyl, isoindolyl, 3H-indolyl, indolyl, indazolyl, purinyl,4H-quinolizinyl, isoquinolyl, quinolyl, phthalazinyl, naphthyridinyl,quinoxalinyl, quinazolinyl, oxazolyl, cinnolinyl, pteridinyl,4aH-carbazolyl, carbazolyl, carbolinyl, phenanthridinyl, acridinyl,perimidinyl, phenanthrolinyl, phenazinyl, phenarsazinyl, phenothiazinyl,furazanyl, and phenoxazinyl. In a further embodiment, R₂ is pyridine. Inanother embodiment, R₂ is furyl. In a further embodiment, R₂ is pyranyl.In one embodiment is a compound of Formula (III) wherein R₂ isheteroaryl substituted with at least one R₃ selected from F, Cl, Br, andI. In another embodiment, R₂ is heteroaryl substituted with at least twoR₃ or at least three R₃ selected from H, F, Cl, Br, I, —CN, —NO₂, —OH,—CF₃, —OCF₃, —OR₅, C₁-C₆alkyl, and C₃-C₈cycloalkyl.

Also described herein is a compound of Formula (III) wherein R″₁ is

wherein R₆ is selected from H, D, F, Cl, Br, I, —CN, NO₂, OH, CF₃, OCF₃,OR₅, C₁-C₆alkyl, and C₃-C₈cycloalkyl. In one embodiment, R₆ is —CN. Inanother embodiment, R₆ is OH. In yet another embodiment, R₆ isC₁-C₆alkyl. In a further embodiment, R₆ is selected from methyl, ethyl,n-propyl, iso-propyl, n-butyl, iso-butyl, and tert-butyl. In oneembodiment, R₆ is methyl. In another embodiment R₆ is ethyl.

In another embodiment is a compound of Formula (III) wherein R₆ isselected from CF₃, C₁-C₆alkyl, and C₃-C₈cycloalkyl. In certainembodiments, R₆ is CF₃. In other embodiments, R₆ is cyclopropyl. Inother embodiments, R₇ is C₁-C₆alkyl. In certain embodiments, R₇ is CH₃.In certain embodiments, R₇ is C₂H₅. In certain embodiments, R₇ isisopropyl.

In one embodiment is a compound of Formula (III) wherein L₂ is—NH—C(═O)—. In one embodiment, L₂ is —C(═O)NH—. In one embodiment, R₂ isaryl. In another embodiment, R₂ is phenyl. In a further embodiment,phenyl is substituted with at least one halogen selected from F, Cl, Br,or I. In another embodiment, phenyl is substituted with Cl. In yetanother embodiment, phenyl is substituted with F. In a furtherembodiment, phenyl is substituted with Br. In yet a further embodiment,phenyl is substituted with OH, —CN, OR₅, C₁-C₆alkyl or N(R₅)₂. In yetanother embodiment, phenyl is substituted with C₁-C₆alkyl selected frommethyl, ethyl, n-propyl, iso-propyl, n-butyl, iso-butyl, or tert-butyl.In yet another embodiment R₂ is heteroaryl. In one embodiment, is acompound of Formula (III) wherein heteroaryl is selected from thienyl,thianthrenyl, furyl, pyranyl, thiadiazolyl, benzothiadiazolyl,isobenzofuranyl, chromenyl, xanthenyl, phenoxathiinyl, pyrrolyl,imidazolyl, pyrazolyl, isothiazolyl, isoxazolyl, pyridyl, pyrazinyl,pyrimidinyl, pyridazinyl, indolizinyl, isoindolyl, 3H-indolyl, indolyl,indazolyl, purinyl, 4H-quinolizinyl, isoquinolyl, quinolyl,phthalazinyl, naphthyridinyl, quinoxalinyl, quinazolinyl, oxazolyl,cinnolinyl, pteridinyl, 4aH-carbazolyl, carbazolyl, carbolinyl,phenanthridinyl, acridinyl, perimidinyl, phenanthrolinyl, phenazinyl,phenarsazinyl, phenothiazinyl, furazanyl, and phenoxazinyl. In anotherembodiment, heteroaryl is pyridine. In a further embodiment, heteroarylis substituted with at least one R₃ selected from halogen, OH, —CN,—NO₂, CF₃, OCF₃, OR₅, —N(R₅)₂, C₁-C₆alkyl or C₃-C₈cycloalkyl. Alsodescribed herein is a compound of Formula (III) wherein the thiophenemoiety attached to the pyridine ring of Formula (III) is substitutedwith at least one R₃ selected from F, Cl, Br, I, —CN, —NO₂, —OH, —CF₃,—OR₅, —NR₅R₅, C₁-C₆alkyl, C₃-C₈cycloalkyl, C₁-C₆heteroalkyl. In oneembodiment, R₃ is F, Cl, Br, or I. In one embodiment, R₃ is substitutedwith C₁-C₆alkyl selected from methyl, ethyl, n-propyl, iso-propyl,n-butyl, iso-butyl, or tert-butyl. In another embodiment R₃ is methyl.In yet another embodiment, R₃ is ethyl. In a further embodiment, R₃ isisopropyl. In another embodiment, the thiophene moiety attached to thepyridine ring of the compound of Formula (III) is substituted with atleast two R₃. In another embodiment is a compound of Formula (III)wherein n is 1. In a further embodiment, n is 2. In yet a furtherembodiment, n is 3.

In another aspect is a compound of Formula (IV) having the structure:

wherein:

R″₁ is

L₂ is —NH—C(═O)—, or —C(═O)NH—;

R₂ is aryl, heteroaryl, fused aryl or fused heteroaryl; wherein aryl,heteroaryl, fused aryl, or fused heteroaryl is optionally substitutedwith at least one R₃;

R₃ is independently selected from H, D, F, Cl, Br, I, —CN, —NO₂, —OH,—CF₃, —OR₅, —NR₅R₅, C₁-C₆alkyl, C₃-C₈cycloalkyl, C₁-C₆heteroalkyl,C₁-C₆haloalkyl, C₂-C₈heterocycloalkyl, optionally substituted aryl,optionally substituted O-aryl, optionally substituted heteroaryl,—NHS(═O)₂R₄, —S(═O)₂N(R₅)₂, —N(R₅)S(═O)₂N(R₅)₂, —C(═O)CF₃,—C(═O)NHS(═O)₂R₄, —S(═O)₂NHC(═O)R₄, —N(R₅)₂, —N(R₅)C(═O)R₅,—N(R₅)C(═O)N(R₅)₂, —N(R₅)C(═O)OR₄, —CO₂R₅, —C(═O)R₅, —OC(═O)R₄,—OC(═O)N(R₅)₂, —CON(R₅)₂, —SR₅, —S(═O)R₄, and —S(═O)₂R₄;

n is an integer selected from 0-3;

each R₄ is independently selected from C₁-C₆alkyl, C₁-C₆haloalkyl,C₃-C₈cycloalkyl, phenyl, and benzyl;

R₅ and R₇ are each independently selected from H, C₁-C₆alkyl,C₁-C₆haloalkyl, C₃-C₈cycloalkyl, phenyl, and benzyl;

R₆ is selected from CN or optionally substituted aryl, optionallysubstituted O-aryl, optionally substituted heteroaryl;

or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, pharmaceutically acceptablesolvate, or pharmaceutically acceptable prodrug thereof.

In one embodiment is a compound of Formula (IV) wherein L₂ is—NH—C(═O)—. In another embodiment is a compound of Formula (IV) whereinL₂ is —C(═O)NH—. In a further embodiment R₂ is aryl optionallysubstituted with at least one R₃ selected from F, Cl, Br, and I. Inanother embodiment R₃ is selected from —CN, —NO₂, —OH, —OCF₃, and —OR₅,wherein R₅ is C₁-C₆alkyl. In a further embodiment R₃ is —OH. In afurther embodiment, R₃ is —CN. In another embodiment is a compound ofFormula (IV) wherein R₆ is CN or optionally substituted aryl, optionallysubstituted O-aryl. In another embodiment, R₆ is optionally substitutedheteroaryl. In another embodiment R₇ is H or C₁-C₆alkyl. In anotherembodiment, R₇ is methyl, ethyl, n-propyl, iso-propyl, n-butyl,iso-butyl or tert-butyl. In a further embodiment, R₇ is H. In yet afurther embodiment, R₇ is methyl. In another embodiment is a compound ofFormula (IV) wherein R₂ is heteroaryl selected from thienyl,thianthrenyl, furyl, pyranyl, thiadiazolyl, benzothiadiazolyl,isobenzofuranyl, chromenyl, xanthenyl, phenoxathiinyl, pyrrolyl,imidazolyl, pyrazolyl, isothiazolyl, isoxazolyl, pyridyl, pyrazinyl,pyrimidinyl, pyridazinyl, indolizinyl, isoindolyl, 3H-indolyl, indolyl,indazolyl, purinyl, 4H-quinolizinyl, isoquinolyl, quinolyl,phthalazinyl, naphthyridinyl, quinoxalinyl, quinazolinyl, oxazolyl,cinnolinyl, pteridinyl, 4aH-carbazolyl, carbazolyl, carbolinyl,phenanthridinyl, acridinyl, perimidinyl, phenanthrolinyl, phenazinyl,phenarsazinyl, phenothiazinyl, furazanyl, and phenoxazinyl. In a furtherembodiment, R₂ is pyridine. In another embodiment, R₂ is furyl. In afurther embodiment, R₂ is pyranyl. In one embodiment is a compound ofFormula (IV) wherein R₂ is heteroaryl substituted with at least one R₃selected from F, Cl, Br, and I. In another embodiment, R₂ is heteroarylsubstituted with at least two R₃ or at least three R₃ selected from H,F, Cl, Br, I, —CN, —NO₂, —OH, —CF₃, —OCF₃, —OR₅, C₁-C₆alkyl, andC₃-C₈cycloalkyl.

In one embodiment is a compound of Formula (IV) wherein R′₁ is

wherein R₆ is an optionally substituted aryl or optionally substitutedheteroaryl. In one embodiment, R₆ is an optionally substituted aryl. Inanother embodiment, aryl is a phenyl group. In another embodiment, thephenyl group is substituted with at least one halogen. In anotherembodiment, the at least one halogen is selected from F, Cl, Br, and I.In another embodiment, halogen is F. In another embodiment, halogen isCl. In a further embodiment, halogen is Br. In one embodiment is acompound of Formula (IV) wherein R₆ is CN. In yet another embodiment isa compound of Formula (IV) wherein R₆ is an optionally substitutedheteroaryl. In one embodiment, heteroaryl is selected from thienyl,thianthrenyl, furyl, pyranyl, thiadiazolyl, benzothiadiazolyl,isobenzofuranyl, chromenyl, xanthenyl, phenoxathiinyl, pyrrolyl,imidazolyl, pyrazolyl, isothiazolyl, isoxazolyl, pyridyl, pyrazinyl,pyrimidinyl, pyridazinyl, indolizinyl, isoindolyl, 3H-indolyl, indolyl,indazolyl, purinyl, 4H-quinolizinyl, isoquinolyl, quinolyl,phthalazinyl, naphthyridinyl, quinoxalinyl, quinazolinyl, oxazolyl,cinnolinyl, pteridinyl, 4aH-carbazolyl, carbazolyl, carbolinyl,phenanthridinyl, acridinyl, perimidinyl, phenanthrolinyl, phenazinyl,phenarsazinyl, phenothiazinyl, furazanyl, and phenoxazinyl. In anotherembodiment, heteroaryl is furan. In yet another embodiment, heteroarylis pyrazole. In another embodiment, heteroaryl is thiophene. In afurther embodiment, heteroaryl is oxadiazole. In other embodiments, R₇is C₁-C₆alkyl. In certain embodiments, R₇ is CH₃. In certainembodiments, R₇ is C₂H₅. In certain embodiments, R₇ is isopropyl.

In one embodiment is a compound of Formula (IV) wherein L₂ is—NH—C(═O)—. In one embodiment, L₂ is —C(═O)NH—. In one embodiment, R₂ isaryl. In another embodiment, R₂ is phenyl. In a further embodiment,phenyl is substituted with at least one halogen selected from F, Cl, Br,or I. In another embodiment, phenyl is substituted with Cl. In yetanother embodiment, phenyl is substituted with F. In a furtherembodiment, phenyl is substituted with Br. In yet a further embodiment,phenyl is substituted with OH, —CN, OR₅, C₁-C₆alkyl or N(R₅)₂. In yetanother embodiment, phenyl is substituted with C₁-C₆alkyl selected frommethyl, ethyl, n-propyl, iso-propyl, n-butyl, iso-butyl, or tert-butyl.In yet another embodiment R₂ is heteroaryl. In one embodiment, is acompound of Formula (IV) wherein heteroaryl is selected from thienyl,thianthrenyl, furyl, pyranyl, thiadiazolyl, benzothiadiazolyl,isobenzofuranyl, chromenyl, xanthenyl, phenoxathiinyl, pyrrolyl,imidazolyl, pyrazolyl, isothiazolyl, isoxazolyl, pyridyl, pyrazinyl,pyrimidinyl, pyridazinyl, indolizinyl, isoindolyl, 3H-indolyl, indolyl,indazolyl, purinyl, 4H-quinolizinyl, isoquinolyl, quinolyl,phthalazinyl, naphthyridinyl, quinoxalinyl, quinazolinyl, oxazolyl,cinnolinyl, pteridinyl, 4aH-carbazolyl, carbazolyl, carbolinyl,phenanthridinyl, acridinyl, perimidinyl, phenanthrolinyl, phenazinyl,phenarsazinyl, phenothiazinyl, furazanyl, and phenoxazinyl. In anotherembodiment, heteroaryl is pyridine. In a further embodiment, heteroarylis substituted with at least one R₃ selected from halogen, OH, —CN,—NO₂, CF₃, OCF₃, OR₅, —N(R₅)₂, C₁-C₆alkyl or C₃-C₈cycloalkyl. Alsodescribed herein is a compound of Formula (IV) wherein the thiophenemoiety attached to the pyridine ring of Formula (IV) is substituted withat least one R₃ selected from F, Cl, Br, I, —CN, —NO₂, —OH, —CF₃, —OCF₃,—OR₅, —NR₅R₅, C₁-C₆alkyl, C₃-C₈cycloalkyl, C₁-C₆heteroalkyl. In oneembodiment, R₃ is F, Cl, Br, or I. In one embodiment, R₃ is substitutedwith C₁-C₆alkyl selected from methyl, ethyl, n-propyl, iso-propyl,n-butyl, iso-butyl, or tert-butyl. In another embodiment R₃ is methyl.In yet another embodiment, R₃ is ethyl. In a further embodiment, R₃ isisopropyl. In another embodiment, the thiophene moiety attached to thepyridine ring of the compound of Formula (IV) is substituted with atleast two R₃. In another embodiment is a compound of Formula (IV)wherein n is 1. In other embodiments, n is 2. In other embodiments, n is3.

In another aspect is a compound of Formula (V) having the structure:

wherein:

R′₁ is

L₂ is —NH—C(═O)—, or —C(═O)NH—;

Y is independently selected from CR₉ or N;

R₂ is aryl, heteroaryl, fused aryl or fused heteroaryl; wherein aryl,heteroaryl, fused aryl or fused heteroaryl is optionally substitutedwith at least one R₃;

R₃ is independently selected from H, F, D, Cl, Br, I, —CN, —NO₂, —OH,—CF₃, —OCF₃, —OR₅, C₁-C₆alkyl, C₃-C₈cycloalkyl, C₁-C₆heteroalkyl,C₁-C₆haloalkyl, C₂-C₈heterocycloalkyl, optionally substituted aryl,optionally substituted O-aryl, optionally substituted heteroaryl,

n is an integer selected from 0-3;

R₉ and R₁₀ are each independently selected from H, D, C₁-C₆alkyl,halogen, C₁-C₆haloalkyl, —OR₅, —OCF₃, C₁-C₆ carbonylalkyl, or —CF₃;

R₅ is independently selected from H, C₁-C₆alkyl, C₁-C₆haloalkyl,C₃-C₈cycloalkyl, phenyl, and benzyl;

or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, pharmaceutically acceptablesolvate, or pharmaceutically acceptable prodrug thereof.

In one embodiment, L₂ is —NH—C(═O)—. In yet a further embodiment, L₂ is—C(═O)NH—. In one embodiment is a compound of Formula (V) wherein R′₁ isselected from

R₉ is H, C₁-C₆alkyl, halogen, C₁-C₆ carbonylalkyl, or CF₃. In oneembodiment, R₉ is H. In another embodiment R₉ is C₁-C₆alkyl. In afurther embodiment, R₉ is methyl, ethyl, n-propyl, iso-propyl, n-butyl,iso-butyl, and tert-butyl. In one embodiment, R₁₀ is methyl, ethyl,n-propyl, iso-propyl. In a further embodiment R₁₀ is halogen selectedfrom F, Cl, Br, and I. In one embodiment R₁₀ is Cl. In anotherembodiment, R₁₀ is Br. In another embodiment, R₁₀ is CF₃.

In another embodiment is a compound of Formula (V) wherein R₂ is aryloptionally substituted with at least one R₃. In another embodiment, arylis phenyl. In a further embodiment, phenyl is substituted with at leastone R₃ selected from F, Cl, Br, and I. In another embodiment, phenyl issubstituted with —OH, —CN, CF₃, or C₁-C₆alkyl. In another embodiment,C₁-C₆alkyl is selected from methyl, ethyl, n-propyl, iso-propyl,n-butyl, iso-butyl, or tert-butyl. In one embodiment, C₁-C₆alkyl ismethyl. In another embodiment, C1-C6alkyl is ethyl. In anotherembodiment, R₃ is C₃-C₈cycloalkyl. In a further embodiment, R₃ iscyclopropyl, cyclobutyl, cyclopentyl, or cyclohexyl. In yet anotherembodiment, R₂ is phenyl substituted with at least 2 substituents. In afurther embodiment, at least 3 substituents.

In yet another embodiment is a compound of Formula (V) wherein R₂ isheteroaryl selected from thienyl, thianthrenyl, furyl, pyranyl,thiadiazolyl, benzothiadiazolyl, isobenzofuranyl, chromenyl, xanthenyl,phenoxathiinyl, pyrrolyl, imidazolyl, pyrazolyl, isothiazolyl,isoxazolyl, pyridyl, pyrazinyl, pyrimidinyl, pyridazinyl, indolizinyl,isoindolyl, 3H-indolyl, indolyl, indazolyl, purinyl, 4H-quinolizinyl,isoquinolyl, quinolyl, phthalazinyl, naphthyridinyl, quinoxalinyl,quinazolinyl, oxazolyl, cinnolinyl, pteridinyl, 4aH-carbazolyl,carbazolyl, carbolinyl, phenanthridinyl, acridinyl, perimidinyl,phenanthrolinyl, phenazinyl, phenarsazinyl, phenothiazinyl, furazanyl,and phenoxazinyl. In another embodiment, heteroaryl is furan. In yetanother embodiment, heteroaryl is pyrazole. In another embodiment,heteroaryl is thiophene. In yet another embodiment, heteroaryl issubstituted with at least one R₃ selected from F, Cl, Br, I, —OH, —CN,NO₂, and C₁-C₆alkyl. In one embodiment, heteroaryl is substituted withat least one F. In another embodiment, with at least one Cl. In afurther embodiment, at least one Br. In yet a further embodiment, atleast one C₁-C₆alkyl selected from methyl, ethyl, n-propyl, iso-propyl,n-butyl, iso-butyl, or tert-butyl. In yet another embodiment, heteroarylis substituted with at least one methyl. In yet another embodiment,heteroaryl is substituted with at least two R₃ groups. In anotherembodiment, at least three R₃ groups.

In another aspect is a compound of Formula (VI) having the structure:

wherein:

R′₁ is,

L₂ is —NH—C(═O)—, or —C(═O)NH—;

Y is independently selected from CR₉ or N;

R₂ is aryl, heteroaryl, fused aryl or fused heteroaryl; wherein aryl,heteroaryl, fused aryl or fused heteroaryl is optionally substitutedwith at least one R₃;

R₃ is independently selected from H, F, D, Cl, Br, I, —CN, —NO₂, —OH,—CF₃, —OCF₃, —OR₅, C₁-C₆alkyl, C₃-C₈cycloalkyl, C₁-C₆heteroalkyl,C₁-C₆haloalkyl, C₂-C₈heterocycloalkyl, optionally substituted aryl,optionally substituted O-aryl, optionally substituted heteroaryl,

n is an integer selected from 0-3;

R₉ is independently selected from H, D, halogen, C₁-C₆alkyl,C₁-C₆haloalkyl, —OR₅, —OCF₃, C₁-C₆ carbonylalkyl, or —CF₃;

R₁₀ is selected from halogen, C₁-C₆alkyl, C₁-C₆haloalkyl, —OR₅, —OCF₃,C₁-C₆ carbonylalkyl, or —CF₃;

R₅ is independently selected from H, C₁-C₆alkyl, C₁-C₆haloalkyl,C₃-C₈cycloalkyl, phenyl, and benzyl;

or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, pharmaceutically acceptablesolvate, or pharmaceutically acceptable prodrug thereof.

In one embodiment, L₂ is —NH—C(═O)—. In yet a further embodiment, L₂ is—C(═O)NH—. In one embodiment is a compound of Formula (VI) wherein R′₁is selected from

R₉ is H, D, C₁-C₆alkyl, halogen, C₁-C₆ carbonylalkyl, or CF₃. In oneembodiment, R₉ is H. In another embodiment R₉ is C₁-C₆alkyl. In anotherembodiment R₉ is F. In a further embodiment, R₉ is methyl, ethyl,n-propyl, iso-propyl, n-butyl, iso-butyl, and tert-butyl. In oneembodiment, R₁₀ is methyl, ethyl, n-propyl, iso-propyl. In a furtherembodiment R₁₀ is halogen selected from F, Cl, Br, and I. In oneembodiment R₁₀ is Cl. In another embodiment, R₁₀ is Br. In anotherembodiment, R₁₀ is CF₃.

In one embodiment is a compound of Formula (VI) wherein each R₉ is D. Inanother embodiment is a compound of Formula (VI) wherein each R₉ is ahalogen. In a further embodiment is a compound of Formula (VI) whereineach R₉ is F. In yet a further embodiment, each R₉ is Br. In yet afurther embodiment each R₉ is Cl.

In another embodiment is a compound of Formula (VI) wherein R₂ is aryloptionally substituted with at least one R₃. In another embodiment, arylis phenyl. In a further embodiment, phenyl is substituted with at leastone R₃ selected from F, Cl, Br, and I. In another embodiment, phenyl issubstituted with —OH, —CN, CF₃, or C₁-C₆alkyl. In another embodiment,C₁-C₆alkyl is selected from methyl, ethyl, n-propyl, iso-propyl,n-butyl, iso-butyl, or tert-butyl. In one embodiment, C₁-C₆alkyl ismethyl. In another embodiment, C1-C6alkyl is ethyl. In anotherembodiment, R₃ is C₃-C₈cycloalkyl. In a further embodiment, R₃ iscyclopropyl, cyclobutyl, cyclopentyl, or cyclohexyl. In yet anotherembodiment, R₂ is phenyl substituted with at least 2 substituents. In afurther embodiment, at least 3 substituents.

In yet another embodiment is a compound of Formula (VI) wherein R₂ isheteroaryl selected from thienyl, thianthrenyl, furyl, pyranyl,thiadiazolyl, benzothiadiazolyl, isobenzofuranyl, chromenyl, xanthenyl,phenoxathiinyl, pyrrolyl, imidazolyl, pyrazolyl, isothiazolyl,isoxazolyl, pyridyl, pyrazinyl, pyrimidinyl, pyridazinyl, indolizinyl,isoindolyl, 3H-indolyl, indolyl, indazolyl, purinyl, 4H-quinolizinyl,isoquinolyl, quinolyl, phthalazinyl, naphthyridinyl, quinoxalinyl,quinazolinyl, oxazolyl, cinnolinyl, pteridinyl, 4aH-carbazolyl,carbazolyl, carbolinyl, phenanthridinyl, acridinyl, perimidinyl,phenanthrolinyl, phenazinyl, phenarsazinyl, phenothiazinyl, furazanyl,and phenoxazinyl. In another embodiment, heteroaryl is furan. In oneembodiment, heteroaryl is benzothiadiazole. In yet another embodiment,heteroaryl is pyrazole. In another embodiment, heteroaryl is thiophene.In yet another embodiment, heteroaryl is substituted with at least oneR₃ selected from F, Cl, Br, I, —OH, —CN, NO₂, and C₁-C₆alkyl. In oneembodiment, heteroaryl is substituted with at least one F. In anotherembodiment, with at least one Cl. In a further embodiment, at least oneBr. In yet a further embodiment, at least one C₁-C₆alkyl selected frommethyl, ethyl, n-propyl, iso-propyl, n-butyl, iso-butyl, or tert-butyl.In yet another embodiment, heteroaryl is substituted with at least onemethyl. In another embodiment heteroaryl is substituted with at leastone R₃ selected from optionally substituted aryl or optionallysubstituted heteroaryl. In one embodiment, R₃ is phenyl. In anotherembodiment, phenyl is substituted with at least one halogen orC₁-C₆alkyl. In another embodiment, phenyl is substituted with methyl. Inyet another embodiment, R₃ is heteroaryl is thienyl, thianthrenyl,furyl, pyranyl, thiadiazolyl, benzothiadiazolyl, isobenzofuranyl,chromenyl, xanthenyl, phenoxathiinyl, pyrrolyl, imidazolyl, pyrazolyl,isothiazolyl, isoxazolyl, pyridyl, pyrazinyl, pyrimidinyl, pyridazinyl,indolizinyl, isoindolyl, 3H-indolyl, indolyl, indazolyl, purinyl,4H-quinolizinyl, isoquinolyl, quinolyl, phthalazinyl, naphthyridinyl,quinoxalinyl, quinazolinyl, oxazolyl, cinnolinyl, pteridinyl,4aH-carbazolyl, carbazolyl, carbolinyl, phenanthridinyl, acridinyl,perimidinyl, phenanthrolinyl, phenazinyl, phenarsazinyl, phenothiazinyl,furazanyl, and phenoxazinyl. In another embodiment, R₃ is thiophene. Inyet another embodiment, R₃ is furan. In yet a further embodiment, R₃ isthiazole. In yet another embodiment, heteroaryl is substituted with atleast two R₃ groups. In another embodiment, at least three R₃ groups.

Also described herein, in one aspect is a compound of Formula (VII)having the structure:

wherein:

R′₁ is

L₂ is —NH—C(═O)—, or —C(═O)NH—;

Y is CR₃, O, NR₅, or S;

R₂ is aryl, heteroaryl, fused aryl or fused heteroaryl; wherein aryl,heteroaryl, fused aryl or fused heteroaryl is optionally substitutedwith at least one R₃;

R₃ is independently selected from H, F, D, Cl, Br, I, —CN, —NO₂, —OH,—CF₃, —OCF₃, —OR₅, C₁-C₆alkyl, C₃-C₈cycloalkyl, C₁-C₆heteroalkyl,C₁-C₆haloalkyl, C₂-C₈heterocycloalkyl, optionally substituted aryl,optionally substituted O-aryl, optionally substituted heteroaryl,

n is an integer selected from 0-3;

R₉ is independently selected from H, D, halogen, C₁-C₆alkyl,C₁-C₆haloalkyl, —OR₅, —OCF₃, C₁-C₆ carbonylalkyl, or —CF₃;

R₁₀ is selected from halogen, C₁-C₆alkyl, C₁-C₆haloalkyl, —OR₅, —OCF₃,C₁-C₆ carbonylalkyl, or —CF₃;

R₅ is independently selected from H, C₁-C₆alkyl, C₁-C₆haloalkyl,C₃-C₈cycloalkyl, phenyl, and benzyl;

or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, pharmaceutically acceptablesolvate, or pharmaceutically acceptable prodrug thereof.

In one embodiment is a compound of Formula (VII) wherein R′₁ is

In another embodiment is a compound of Formula (VII) wherein R′₁ is

In yet another embodiment is a compound of Formula (VII) wherein R′₁ is

In a further embodiment is a compound of Formula (VII) wherein R′₁ is

In yet a further embodiment is a compound of Formula (VII) having thestructure of Formula (VIIA):

In one embodiment is a compound of Formula (VII) or (VIIA) wherein eachR₃ is H. In one embodiment is a compound of Formula (VII) or (VIIA)wherein R₁₀ is halogen. In another embodiment is a compound of Formula(VII) or (VIIA) wherein halogen is Br. In yet another embodiment is acompound of Formula (VII) or (VIIA) wherein halogen is Cl. In a furtherembodiment is a compound of Formula (VII) or (VIIA) wherein R₁₀ isC₁-C₆alkyl. In one embodiment is a compound of Formula (VII) or (VIIA)wherein C₁-C₆alkyl is methyl, ethyl, n-propyl, iso-propyl, n-butyl,iso-butyl or tert-butyl. In one embodiment is a compound of Formula(VII) or (VIIA) wherein C₁-C₆alkyl is methyl. In yet a furtherembodiment is a compound of Formula (VII) or (VIIA) wherein L₂ is—NH—C(C═O). In one embodiment is a compound of Formula (VII) or (VIIA)wherein L₂ is —C(═O)NH—. In one embodiment is a compound of Formula(VII) or (VIIA) wherein R₂ is aryl. In another embodiment is a compoundof Formula (VII) or (VIIA) wherein aryl is phenyl. In yet anotherembodiment is a compound of Formula (VII) or (VIIA) wherein phenyl issubstituted with at least one R₃. In a further embodiment is a compoundof Formula (VII) or (VIIA) wherein phenyl is substituted with at leasttwo R₃.

In yet a further embodiment is a compound of Formula (VII) or (VIIA)wherein R₂ is heteroaryl.

In one embodiment is a compound of Formula (VII) or (VIIA) whereinheteroaryl is selected from pyridyl, pyrimidyl, pyridazinyl, pyrazinyl,thienyl, furyl, pyranyl, thiadiazolyl, pyrazolyl, imidazolyl, thiazolyl,isothiazolyl, oxazolyl, isoxazolyl, indolyl, indazolyl, benzoxazolyl,benzoisoxazolyl, benzothiazolyl, benzoisothiazolyl, benzimidazolyl,quinolyl, pteridinyl, pyrazolopyridinyl, pyrazolopyrimidinyl,imidazolothiazolyl, quinoxazinyl, and indolizinyl. In yet anotherembodiment heteroaryl is pyridine. In a further embodiment heteroaryl isoxazole.

In one embodiment is a compound of Formula (VII) or (VIIA) whereinheteroaryl is substituted with at least one R₃. In another embodiment isa compound of Formula (VII) or (VIIA) wherein heteroaryl is substitutedwith at least two R₃. In yet another embodiment is a compound of Formula(VII) or (VIIA) wherein each R₃ is independently selected from F, D, Cl,Br, I, —CN, —NO₂, —OH, —CF₃, —OCF₃, or —OR₅. In a further embodiment isa compound of Formula (VII) or (VIIA) wherein each R₃ is independentlyselected from C₁-C₆alkyl, C₃-C₈cycloalkyl, C₁-C₆heteroalkyl,C₁-C₆haloalkyl, C₂-C₈heterocycloalkyl, optionally substituted aryl,optionally substituted O-aryl, or optionally substituted heteroaryl.

In yet a further embodiment is a compound of Formula (VII) or (VIIA)wherein each R₃ is independently selected from F, Cl, Br or I.

In one embodiment is a compound of Formula (VII) or (VIIA) wherein eachR₃ is independently C₁-C₆alkyl. In another embodiment is a compound ofFormula (VII) or (VIIA) wherein C₁-C₆alkyl is methyl, ethyl, n-propyl,iso-propyl, n-butyl, iso-butyl or tert-butyl.

In yet another embodiment is a compound of Formula (VII) or (VIIA)wherein C₁-C₆alkyl is methyl.

In a further embodiment is a compound of Formula (I) having thestructure of Formula (IA):

In yet a further embodiment is a compound of Formula (II) having thestructure of Formula (IIA):

In one embodiment is a compound of Formula (III) having the structure ofFormula (IIIA):

In another embodiment is a compound of Formula (IV) having the structureof Formula (IVA):

In yet another embodiment is a compound of Formula (V) having thestructure of Formula (VA):

In a further embodiment is a compound of Formula (VI) having thestructure of Formula (VIA):

In another aspect is a compound selected from:

or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, pharmaceutically acceptablesolvate or pharmaceutically acceptable prodrug thereof.

In a further embodiment is a compound having the structure:

or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, pharmaceutically acceptablesolvate or pharmaceutically acceptable prodrug thereof.

Also presented herein are compounds having the structure disclosed inTable A:

TABLE A

Compound R₁ R₂ R₃ X 1 H 2-chloro H C 2 H 4-chloro H C 3 H 2,6-difluro HC 4 H 6-fluoro H C 5 Me 2-chloro H C 6 Me 4-chloro H C 7 Me 2,6-difluroH C 8 Me 6-fluoro H C 9 CF₃ 2-chloro H C 10 CF₃ 4-chloro H C 11 CF₃2,6-difluro H C 12 CF₃ 6-fluoro H C 13 H 2-chloro NH₂ C 14 H 4-chloroNH₂ C 15 H 2,6-difluro NH₂ C 16 H 6-fluoro NH₂ C 17 Me 2-chloro NH₂ C 18Me 4-chloro NH₂ C 19 Me 2,6-difluro NH₂ C 20 Me 6-fluoro NH₂ C 21 CF₃2-chloro NH₂ C 22 CF₃ 4-chloro NH₂ C 23 CF₃ 2,6-difluro NH₂ C 24 CF₃6-fluoro NH₂ C 25 H 2-fluoro H N 26 Me 2-fluoro H N 27 CF₃ 2-fluoro H N28 H 2-fluoro NH₂ N 29 Me 2-fluoro NH₂ N 30 CF₃ 2-fluoro NH₂ N

Presented herein are compounds having the structure disclosed in TableB:

TABLE B

Compound R₁ R₂ R₃ X 31 H 2-chloro H C 32 H 4-chloro H C 33 H 2,6-difluroH C 34 H 6-fluoro H C 35 Me 2-chloro H C 36 Me 4-chloro H C 37 Me2,6-difluro H C 38 Me 6-fluoro H C 39 CF₃ 2-chloro H C 40 CF₃ 4-chloro HC 41 CF₃ 2,6-difluro H C 42 CF₃ 6-fluoro H C 43 H 2-chloro NH₂ C 44 H4-chloro NH₂ C 45 H 2,6-difluro NH₂ C 46 H 6-fluoro NH₂ C 47 Me 2-chloroNH₂ C 48 Me 4-chloro NH₂ C 49 Me 2,6-difluro NH₂ C 50 Me 6-fluoro NH₂ C51 CF₃ 2-chloro NH₂ C 52 CF₃ 4-chloro NH₂ C 53 CF₃ 2,6-difluro NH₂ C 54CF₃ 6-fluoro NH₂ C 55 H 2-fluoro H N 56 Me 2-fluoro H N 57 CF₃ 2-fluoroH N 58 H 2-fluoro NH₂ N 59 Me 2-fluoro NH₂ N 60 CF₃ 2-fluoro NH₂ N

Disclosed herein are compounds having the structure disclosed in TableC:

TABLE C

Compound R₁ R₂ R₃ X 61 H 2-chloro H C 62 H 4-chloro H C 63 H 2,6-difluroH C 64 H 6-fluoro H C 65 Me 2-chloro H C 66 Me 4-chloro H C 67 Me2,6-difluro H C 68 Me 6-fluoro H C 69 H 2-chloro NH₂ C 70 H 4-chloro NH₂C 71 H 2,6-difluro NH₂ C 72 H 6-fluoro NH₂ C 73 Me 2-chloro NH₂ C 74 Me4-chloro NH₂ C 75 Me 2,6-difluro NH₂ C 76 Me 6-fluoro NH₂ C 77 H2-fluoro H N 78 Me 2-fluoro H N 79 H 2-fluoro NH₂ N 80 Me 2-fluoro NH₂ N

Disclosed herein are compounds having the structure disclosed in TableD:

TABLE D

Compound R₁ R₂ R₃ X 81 — 2-chloro H C 82 — 4-chloro H C 83 — 2,6-difluroH C 84 — 6-fluoro H C 85 — 2-chloro H C 86 — 4-chloro H C 87 —2,6-difluro H C 88 — 6-fluoro H C 89 — 2-chloro NH₂ C 90 — 4-chloro NH₂C 91 — 2,6-difluro NH₂ C 92 — 6-fluoro NH₂ C 93 — 2-chloro NH₂ C 94 —4-chloro NH₂ C 95 — 2,6-difluro NH₂ C 96 — 6-fluoro NH₂ C 97 — 2-fluoroH N 98 — 2-fluoro H N 99 — 2-fluoro NH₂ N 100 — 2-fluoro NH₂ N

Also presented herein are compounds having the structure disclosed inTable E:

TABLE E

Compound R₁ R₂ R₃ X 101 — 2-chloro H C 102 — 4-chloro H C 103 —2,6-difluro H C 104 — 6-fluoro H C 105 — 2-chloro H C 106 — 4-chloro H C107 — 2,6-difluro H C 108 — 6-fluoro H C 109 — 2-chloro NH₂ C 110 —4-chloro NH₂ C 111 — 2,6-difluro NH₂ C 112 — 6-fluoro NH₂ C 113 —2-chloro NH₂ C 114 — 4-chloro NH₂ C 115 — 2,6-difluro NH₂ C 116 —6-fluoro NH₂ C 117 — 2-fluoro H N 118 — 2-fluoro H N 119 — 2-fluoro NH₂N 120 — 2-fluoro NH₂ N

Presented herein are compounds having the structure disclosed in TableF:

TABLE F

Compound R₁ R₂ R₃ X 121 CN 2-chloro H C 122 CN 4-chloro H C 123 CN2,6-difluro H C 124 CN 6-fluoro H C 125

2-chloro H C 126

4-chloro H C 127

2,6-difluro H C 128

6-fluoro H C 129

2-chloro H C 130

4-chloro H C 131

2,6-difluro H C 132

6-fluoro H C 133

2-chloro NH₂ C 134

4-chloro NH₂ C 135

2,6-difluro NH₂ C 136

6-fluoro NH₂ C 137

2-chloro NH₂ C 138

4-chloro NH₂ C 139

2,6-difluro NH₂ C 140

6-fluoro NH₂ C 141 CN 2-fluoro H N 142

2-fluoro H N 143

2-fluoro H N 144 CN 2-fluoro NH₂ N 145

2-fluoro NH₂ N 146

2-fluoro NH₂ N

Presented herein are compounds having the structure disclosed in TableG:

TABLE G

Compound R₃ R₂ R₁₀ R₉ R_(9a) X 147 H 2-chloro H F F C 148 H 4-chloro H FF C 149 H 2,6-difluro H F F C 150 H 6-fluoro H F F C 151 H 2-chloro H FF C 152 H 4-chloro H F F C 153 H 2,6-difluro H F F C 154 H 6-fluoro H FF C 155 H 2-chloro Br H H C 156 H 4-chloro Br H H C 157 H 2,6-difluro BrH H C 158 H 6-fluoro Br H H C 159 H 2-chloro Br H H C 160 H 4-chloro BrH H C 161 H 2,6-difluro Br H H C 162 H 6-fluoro Br H H C 163 H 2-chloroCl F F C 164 H 4-chloro Cl F F C 165 H 2,6-difluro Cl F F C 166 H6-fluoro Cl F F C 167 H 2-chloro Cl F F C 168 H 4-chloro Cl F F C 169 H2,6-difluro Cl F F C 170 H 6-fluoro Cl F F C 171 H 2-chloro H F F N 172H 4-chloro H F F N 173 H 2,6-difluro H F F N 174 H 6-fluoro H F F N 175H 2-chloro H F F N 176 H 4-chloro H F F N 177 H 2,6-difluro H F F N 178H 6-fluoro H F F N 179 H 2-chloro Br H H N 180 H 4-chloro Br H H N 181 H2,6-difluro Br H H N 182 H 6-fluoro Br H H N 183 H 2-chloro Br H H N 184H 4-chloro Br H H N 185 H 2,6-difluro Br H H N 186 H 6-fluoro Br H H N187 H 2-chloro Cl F F N 188 H 4-chloro Cl F F N 189 H 2,6-difluro Cl F FN 190 H 6-fluoro Cl F F N 191 H 2-chloro Cl F F N 192 H 4-chloro Cl F FN 193 H 2,6-difluro Cl F F N 194 H 6-fluoro Cl F F N

Presented herein are compounds having the structure disclosed in TableH:

TABLE H

Compound R₃ R₂ R₁₀ R₉ R_(9a) X 195 H 2-chloro H F F C 196 H 4-chloro H FF C 197 H 2,6-difluro H F F C 198 H 6-fluoro H F F C 199 H 2-chloro H FF C 200 H 4-chloro H F F C 201 H 2,6-difluro H F F C 202 H 6-fluoro H FF C 203 H 2-chloro Br H H C 204 H 4-chloro Br H H C 205 H 2,6-difluro BrH H C 206 H 6-fluoro Br H H C 207 H 2-chloro Br H H C 208 H 4-chloro BrH H C 209 H 2,6-difluro Br H H C 210 H 6-fluoro Br H H C 211 H 2-chloroCl F F C 212 H 4-chloro Cl F F C 213 H 2,6-difluro Cl F F C 214 H6-fluoro Cl F F C 215 H 2-chloro Cl F F C 216 H 4-chloro Cl F F C 217 H2,6-difluro Cl F F C 218 H 6-fluoro Cl F F C 219 H 2-chloro H F F N 220H 4-chloro H F F N 221 H 2,6-difluro H F F N 222 H 6-fluoro H F F N 223H 2-chloro H F F N 224 H 4-chloro H F F N 225 H 2,6-difluro H F F N 226H 6-fluoro H F F N 227 H 2-chloro Br H H N 228 H 4-chloro Br H H N 229 H2,6-difluro Br H H N 230 H 6-fluoro Br H H N 231 H 2-chloro Br H H N 232H 4-chloro Br H H N 233 H 2,6-difluro Br H H N 234 H 6-fluoro Br H H N235 H 2-chloro Cl F F N 236 H 4-chloro Cl F F N 237 H 2,6-difluro Cl F FN 238 H 6-fluoro Cl F F N 239 H 2-chloro Cl F F N 240 H 4-chloro Cl F FN 241 H 2,6-difluro Cl F F N 242 H 6-fluoro Cl F F N

In another aspect is a pharmaceutical composition comprising apharmaceutically acceptable diluent, excipient or binder, and a compoundhaving the structure of Formula (I), (IA), (II), (IIA), (III), (IIIA),(IV), (IVA), (V), (VA), (VI), (VIA), (VII), or (VIIA) orpharmaceutically acceptable salt, pharmaceutically acceptable prodrug,or pharmaceutically acceptable solvate thereof.

In another aspect is a method of treating a disease, disorder orcondition in a mammal that would benefit from inhibition of storeoperated calcium channel activity comprising administering to the mammala compound having the structure of Formula (I), (IA), (II), (IIA),(III), (IIIA), (IV), (IVA), (V), (VA), (VI), (VIA), (VII), or (VIIA) orpharmaceutically acceptable salt, pharmaceutically acceptable solvate,or pharmaceutically acceptable prodrug thereof, or a pharmaceuticalcomposition comprising same with a pharmaceutically acceptable diluent,excipient or binder.

In certain embodiments, the disease, disorder or condition in a mammalis selected from diseases/disorders involving inflammation,glomerulonephritis, uveitis, hepatic diseases or disorders, renaldiseases or disorders, chronic obstructive pulmonary disease, rheumatoidarthritis, inflammatory bowel disease, vasculitis, dermatitis,osteoarthritis, inflammatory muscle disease, allergic rhinitis,vaginitis, interstitial cystitis, scleroderma, osteoporosis, eczema,organ transplant rejection, allogeneic or xenogeneic transplantation,graft rejection, graft-versus-host disease, lupus erythematosus, type Idiabetes, pulmonary fibrosis, dermatomyositis, thyroiditis, myastheniagravis, autoimmune hemolytic anemia, cystic fibrosis, chronic relapsinghepatitis, primary biliary cirrhosis, allergic conjunctivitis, hepatitisand atopic dermatitis, asthma, psoriasis, multiple sclerosis, Sjogren'ssyndrome, and autoimmune diseases or disorders.

In another aspect is a method of modulating store-operated calcium (SOC)channel activity comprising contacting the SOC channel complex, orportion thereof, with a compound of Formula (I), (IA), (II), (IIA),(III), (IIIA), (IV), (IVA), (V), (VA), (VI), (VIA), (VII), or (VIIA) orpharmaceutically acceptable salt, pharmaceutically acceptable solvate,or pharmaceutically acceptable prodrug thereof, or a pharmaceuticalcomposition comprising same with a pharmaceutically acceptable diluent,excipient or binder.

Also presented herein is a method of modulating calcium releaseactivated calcium channel (CRAC) activity in a mammal comprisingadministering a compound of Formula (I), (IA), (II), (IIA), (III),(IIIA), (IV), (IVA), (V), (VA), (VI), (VIA), (VII), or (VIIA), orpharmaceutically acceptable salt, pharmaceutically acceptable solvate,or pharmaceutically acceptable prodrug thereof.

In one embodiment is a method of modulating calcium release activatedcalcium channel (CRAC) activity in a mammal comprising administering acompound of Formula (I), (IA), (II), (IIA), (III), (IIIA), (IV), (IVA),(V), (VA), (VI), (VIA), (VII), or (VIIA), or pharmaceutically acceptablesalt, pharmaceutically acceptable solvate, or pharmaceuticallyacceptable prodrug thereof wherein the compound of Formula (I), (IA),(II), (IIA), (III), (IIIA), (IV), (IVA), (V), (VA), (VI), (VIA), (VII),or (VIIA) modulates an activity of, modulates an interaction of, ormodulates the level of, or binds to, or interacts with at least onecomponent of the calcium release activated (CRAC) channel complexselected from stromal interaction molecules (STIM) family of proteins.

In another embodiment is a method of modulating calcium releaseactivated calcium channel (CRAC) activity in a mammal comprisingadministering a compound of Formula (I), (IA), (II), (IIA), (III),(IIIA), (IV), (IVA), (V), (VA), (VI), (VIA), (VII), or (VIIA), orpharmaceutically acceptable salt, pharmaceutically acceptable solvate,or pharmaceutically acceptable prodrug thereof wherein the compound ofFormula (I), (IA), (II), (IIA), (III), (IIIA), (IV), (IVA), (V), (VA),(VI), (VIA), (VII), or (VIIA) modulates an activity of, modulates aninteraction of, or modulates the level of, or binds to, or interactswith STIM1 or STIM2.

In yet another embodiment is a method of modulating calcium releaseactivated calcium channel (CRAC) activity in a mammal comprisingadministering a compound of Formula (I), (IA), (II), (IIA), (III),(IIIA), (IV), (IVA), (V), (VA), (VI), (VIA), (VII), or (VIIA), orpharmaceutically acceptable salt, pharmaceutically acceptable solvate,or pharmaceutically acceptable prodrug thereof wherein modulatingcalcium release activated calcium (CRAC) channel activity with acompound of Formula (I), (IA), (II), (IIA), (III), (IIIA), (IV), (IVA),(V), (VA), (VI), (VIA), (VII), or (VIIA) inhibits store-operated calciumentry (SOCE).

In a further embodiment is a method of modulating calcium releaseactivated calcium channel (CRAC) activity in a mammal comprisingadministering a compound of Formula (I), (IA), (II), (IIA), (III),(IIIA), (IV), (IVA), (V), (VA), (VI), (VIA), (VII), or (VIIA), orpharmaceutically acceptable salt, pharmaceutically acceptable solvate,or pharmaceutically acceptable prodrug thereof wherein modulatingcalcium release activated calcium (CRAC) channel activity with acompound of Formula (I), (IA), (II), (IIA), (III), (IIIA), (IV), (IVA),(V), (VA), (VI), (VIA), (VII), or (VIIA) inhibits theelectrophysiological current (I_(CRAC)) directly associated withactivated CRAC channels.

In yet a further embodiment is a method of modulating calcium releaseactivated calcium channel (CRAC) activity in a mammal comprisingadministering a compound of Formula (I), (IA), (II), (IIA), (III),(IIIA), (IV), (IVA), (V), (VA), (VI), (VIA), (VII), or (VIIA), orpharmaceutically acceptable salt, pharmaceutically acceptable solvate,or pharmaceutically acceptable prodrug thereof wherein the compound ofFormula (I), (IA), (II), (IIA), (III), (IIIA), (IV), (IVA), (V), (VA),(VI), (VIA), (VII), or (VIIA) inhibits SOCE with an IC₅₀ below 10 μM.

In another embodiment is a method of modulating calcium releaseactivated calcium channel (CRAC) activity in a mammal comprisingadministering a compound of Formula (I), (IA), (II), (IIA), (III),(IIIA), (IV), (IVA), (V), (VA), (VI), (VIA), (VII), or (VIIA), orpharmaceutically acceptable salt, pharmaceutically acceptable solvate,or pharmaceutically acceptable prodrug thereof wherein the compound ofFormula (I), (IA), (II), (IIA), (III), (IIIA), (IV), (IVA), (V), (VA),(VI), (VIA), (VII), or (VIIA) inhibits electrophysiological current(I_(CRAC)) directly associated with activated CRAC channels at aconcentration below 10 μM.

In one aspect is a method of treating a disease, disorder or conditionin a mammal that would benefit from inhibition of store operated calciumchannel activity comprising administering to the mammal a compound ofFormula (I), (IA), (II), (IIA), (III), (IIIA), (IV), (IVA), (V), (VA),(VI), (VIA), (VII), or (VIIA), or pharmaceutically acceptable salt,pharmaceutically acceptable solvate, or pharmaceutically acceptableprodrug thereof.

In one embodiment is a method of treating a disease, disorder orcondition in a mammal that would benefit from inhibition of storeoperated calcium channel activity comprising administering to the mammala compound of Formula (I), (IA), (II), (IIA), (III), (IIIA), (IV),(IVA), (V), (VA), (VI), (VIA), (VII), or (VIIA), or pharmaceuticallyacceptable salt, pharmaceutically acceptable solvate, orpharmaceutically acceptable prodrug thereof wherein the compound of vmodulates the activity of, modulates an interaction of, or binds to, orinteracts with a mammalian STIM1 protein, or a mammalian STIM2 protein.

In yet another embodiment is a method of treating a disease, disorder orcondition in a mammal that would benefit from inhibition of storeoperated calcium channel activity comprising administering to the mammala compound of Formula (I), (IA), (II), (IIA), (III), (IIIA), (IV),(IVA), (V), (VA), (VI), (VIA), (VII), or (VIIA), or pharmaceuticallyacceptable salt, pharmaceutically acceptable solvate, orpharmaceutically acceptable prodrug thereof wherein the disease,disorder or condition is rheumatoid arthritis.

In a further embodiment is a method of treating a disease, disorder orcondition in a mammal that would benefit from inhibition of storeoperated calcium channel activity comprising administering to the mammala compound of Formula (I), (IA), (II), (IIA), (III), (IIIA), (IV),(IVA), (V), (VA), (VI), (VIA), (VII), or (VIIA), or pharmaceuticallyacceptable salt, pharmaceutically acceptable solvate, orpharmaceutically acceptable prodrug thereof wherein the disease,disorder or condition is psoriasis.

In one embodiment is a method of treating a disease, disorder orcondition in a mammal that would benefit from inhibition of storeoperated calcium channel activity comprising administering to the mammala compound of Formula (I), (IA), (II), (IIA), (III), (IIIA), (IV),(IVA), (V), (VA), (VI), (VIA), (VII), or (VIIA), or pharmaceuticallyacceptable salt, pharmaceutically acceptable solvate, orpharmaceutically acceptable prodrug thereof wherein the disease,disorder or condition is inflammatory bowel disease.

In a further embodiment the inflammatory bowel disease is ulcerativecolitis.

In a further embodiment is a method of treating a disease, disorder orcondition in a mammal that would benefit from inhibition of storeoperated calcium channel activity comprising administering to the mammala compound of Formula (I), (IA), (II), (IIA), (III), (IIIA), (IV),(IVA), (V), (VA), (VI), (VIA), (VII), or (VIIA), or pharmaceuticallyacceptable salt, pharmaceutically acceptable solvate, orpharmaceutically acceptable prodrug thereof wherein the disease,disorder or condition is organ transplant rejection.

In a further embodiment is a method of treating a disease, disorder orcondition in a mammal that would benefit from inhibition of storeoperated calcium channel activity comprising administering to the mammala compound of Formula (I), (IA), (II), (IIA), (III), (IIIA), (IV),(IVA), (V), (VA), (VI), (VIA), (VII), or (VIIA), or pharmaceuticallyacceptable salt, pharmaceutically acceptable solvate, orpharmaceutically acceptable prodrug thereof wherein the disease,disorder or condition is multiple sclerosis.

In yet a further embodiment is a method of treating a disease, disorderor condition in a mammal that would benefit from inhibition of storeoperated calcium channel activity comprising administering to the mammala compound of Formula (I), (IA), (II), (IIA), (III), (IIIA), (IV),(IVA), (V), (VA), (VI), (VIA), (VII), or (VIIA), or pharmaceuticallyacceptable salt, pharmaceutically acceptable solvate, orpharmaceutically acceptable prodrug thereof further comprisingadministering to the mammal a second therapeutic agent.

In another embodiment is a method of treating a disease, disorder orcondition in a mammal that would benefit from inhibition of storeoperated calcium channel activity comprising administering to the mammala compound of Formula (I), (IA), (II), (IIA), (III), (IIIA), (IV),(IVA), (V), (VA), (VI), (VIA), (VII), or (VIIA), or pharmaceuticallyacceptable salt, pharmaceutically acceptable solvate, orpharmaceutically acceptable prodrug thereof, wherein the secondtherapeutic agent is selected from immunosuppressants, glucocorticoids,non-steroidal anti-inflammatory drugs, Cox-2-specific inhibitors,leflunomide, gold thioglucose, gold thiomalate, aurofin, sulfasalazine,hydroxychloroquinine, minocycline, anti-TNF-α agents, abatacept,anakinra, interferon-β, interferon-γ, interleukin-2, allergy vaccines,antihistamines, antileukotrienes, beta-agonists, theophylline, andanticholinergics.

In yet another embodiment is a method of treating a disease, disorder orcondition in a mammal that would benefit from inhibition of storeoperated calcium channel activity comprising administering to the mammala compound of Formula (I), (IA), (II), (IIA), (III), (IIIA), (IV),(IVA), (V), (VA), (VI), (VIA), (VII), or (VIIA), or pharmaceuticallyacceptable salt, pharmaceutically acceptable solvate, orpharmaceutically acceptable prodrug thereof, wherein the secondtherapeutic agent is selected from tacrolimus, cyclosporin, rapamicin,methotrexate, cyclophosphamide, azathioprine, mercaptopurine,mycophenolate, or FTY720, prednisone, cortisone acetate, prednisolone,methylprednisolone, dexamethasone, betamethasone, triamcinolone,beclometasone, fludrocortisone acetate, deoxycorticosterone acetate,aldosterone, aspirin, salicylic acid, gentisic acid, choline magnesiumsalicylate, choline salicylate, choline magnesium salicylate, cholinesalicylate, magnesium salicylate, sodium salicylate, diflunisal,carprofen, fenoprofen, fenoprofen calcium, fluorobiprofen, ibuprofen,ketoprofen, nabutone, ketolorac, ketorolac tromethamine, naproxen,oxaprozin, diclofenac, etodolac, indomethacin, sulindac, tolmetin,meclofenamate, meclofenamate sodium, mefenamic acid, piroxicam,meloxicam, celecoxib, rofecoxib, valdecoxib, parecoxib, etoricoxib,lumiracoxib, CS-502, JTE-522, L-745,337 and NS398, leflunomide, goldthioglucose, gold thiomalate, aurofin, sulfasalazine,hydroxychloroquinine, minocycline, infliximab, etanercept, adalimumab,abatacept, anakinra, interferon-β, interferon-γ, interleukin-2, allergyvaccines, antihistamines, antileukotrienes, beta-agonists, theophylline,and anticholinergics.

Also described herein is a method of inhibiting store-operated calciumentry (SOCE) activation of nuclear factor of activated T cells (NFAT) ina mammal comprising administering a compound of Formula (I), (IA), (II),(IIA), (III), (IIIA), (IV), (IVA), (V), (VA), (VI), (VIA), (VII), or(VIIA) or pharmaceutically acceptable salt, pharmaceutically acceptablesolvate, or pharmaceutically acceptable prodrug thereof.

In one embodiment is a method of inhibiting store-operated calcium entry(SOCE) activation of nuclear factor of activated T cells (NFAT) in amammal comprising administering a compound of Formula (I), (IA), (II),(IIA), (III), (IIIA), (IV), (IVA), (V), (VA), (VI), (VIA), (VII), or(VIIA), or pharmaceutically acceptable salt, pharmaceutically acceptablesolvate, or pharmaceutically acceptable prodrug thereof, wherein thecompound of Formula (I), (IA), (II), (IIA), (III), (IIIA), (IV), (IVA),(V), (VA), (VI), (VIA), (VII), or (VIIA) modulates an interaction of, ormodulates the level of, or binds to, or interacts with a mammalian STIM1protein, or a mammalian STIM2 protein.

In another aspect is a method of decreasing cytokine expression byinhibiting the store-operated calcium entry activation of NFAT in amammal comprising administering a compound of Formula (I), (IA), (II),(IIA), (III), (IIIA), (IV), (IVA), (V), (VA), (VI), (VIA), (VII), or(VIIA), or pharmaceutically acceptable salt, pharmaceutically acceptablesolvate, or pharmaceutically acceptable prodrug thereof.

In another embodiment is a method of decreasing cytokine expression byinhibiting the store-operated calcium entry activation of NFAT in amammal comprising administering a compound of Formula (I), (IA), (II),(IIA), (III), (IIIA), (IV), (IVA), (V), (VA), (VI), (VIA), (VII), or(VIIA), or pharmaceutically acceptable salt, pharmaceutically acceptablesolvate, or pharmaceutically acceptable prodrug thereof wherein thecompound of Formula (I), (IA), (II), (IIA), (III), (IIIA), (IV), (IVA),(V), (VA), (VI), (VIA), (VII), or (VIIA) modulates an interaction of, ormodulates the level of, or binds to, or interacts with a mammalian STIM1protein or a mammalian STIM2 protein.

In yet another embodiment is a method of decreasing cytokine expressionby inhibiting the store-operated calcium entry activation of NFAT in amammal comprising administering a compound of Formula (I), (IA), (II),(IIA), (III), (IIIA), (IV), (IVA), (V), (VA), (VI), (VIA), (VII), or(VIIA), or pharmaceutically acceptable salt, pharmaceutically acceptablesolvate, or pharmaceutically acceptable prodrug thereof wherein thecytokine is selected from IL-2, IL-3, IL-4, IL-5, IL-6, IL-7, IL-8,IL-9, IL-10, IL-11, IL-12, IL-13, IL-15, IL-16, IL-17, IL-18, IL-1α,IL-1β, IL-1 RA, granulocyte colony stimulating factor (G-CSF),granulocyte-macrophage colony stimulating factor (GM-CSF), oncostatin M,erythropoietin, leukemia inhibitory factor (LIF), interferons,gamma-interferon (γ-IFN), B7.1 (CD80), B7.2 (B70, CD86), TNF-α, TNF-β,LT-β, CD40 ligand, Fas ligand, CD27 ligand, CD30 ligand, 4-1BBL, Trail,and migration inhibitory factor (MIF).

Further Forms of Compounds

The compounds described herein may in some cases exist as diastereomers,enantiomers, or other stereoisomeric forms. The compounds presentedherein include all diastereomeric, enantiomeric, and epimeric forms aswell as the appropriate mixtures thereof. Separation of stereoisomersmay be performed by chromatography or by the forming diastereomeric andseparation by recrystallization, or chromatography, or any combinationthereof. (Jean Jacques, Andre Collet, Samuel H. Wilen, “Enantiomers,Racemates and Resolutions”, John Wiley And Sons, Inc., 1981, hereinincorporated by reference for this disclosure). Stereoisomers may alsobe obtained by stereoselective synthesis.

In some situations, compounds may exist as tautomers. All tautomers areincluded within the formulas described herein.

The methods and compositions described herein include the use ofamorphous forms as well as crystalline forms (also known as polymorphs).The compounds described herein may be in the form of pharmaceuticallyacceptable salts. As well, active metabolites of these compounds havingthe same type of activity are included in the scope of the presentdisclosure. In addition, the compounds described herein can exist inunsolvated as well as solvated forms with pharmaceutically acceptablesolvents such as water, ethanol, and the like. The solvated forms of thecompounds presented herein are also considered to be disclosed herein.

In some embodiments, compounds described herein may be prepared asprodrugs. A “prodrug” refers to an agent that is converted into theparent drug in vivo. Prodrugs are often useful because, in somesituations, they may be easier to administer than the parent drug. Theymay, for instance, be bioavailable by oral administration whereas theparent is not. The prodrug may also have improved solubility inpharmaceutical compositions over the parent drug. An example, withoutlimitation, of a prodrug would be a compound described herein, which isadministered as an ester (the “prodrug”) to facilitate transmittalacross a cell membrane where water solubility is detrimental to mobilitybut which then is metabolically hydrolyzed to the carboxylic acid, theactive entity, once inside the cell where water-solubility isbeneficial. A further example of a prodrug might be a short peptide(polyaminoacid) bonded to an acid group where the peptide is metabolizedto reveal the active moiety. In certain embodiments, upon in vivoadministration, a prodrug is chemically converted to the biologically,pharmaceutically or therapeutically active form of the compound. Incertain embodiments, a prodrug is enzymatically metabolized by one ormore steps or processes to the biologically, pharmaceutically ortherapeutically active form of the compound.

To produce a prodrug, a pharmaceutically active compound is modifiedsuch that the active compound will be regenerated upon in vivoadministration. The prodrug can be designed to alter the metabolicstability or the transport characteristics of a drug, to mask sideeffects or toxicity, to improve the flavor of a drug or to alter othercharacteristics or properties of a drug. In some embodiments, by virtueof knowledge of pharmacodynamic processes and drug metabolism in vivo,once a pharmaceutically active compound is determined, prodrugs of thecompound are designed. (see, for example, Nogrady (1985) MedicinalChemistry A Biochemical Approach, Oxford University Press, New York,pages 388-392; Silverman (1992), The Organic Chemistry of Drug Designand Drug Action, Academic Press, Inc., San Diego, pages 352-401,Saulnier et al., (1994), Bioorganic and Medicinal Chemistry Letters,Vol. 4, p. 1985; Rooseboom et al., Pharmacological Reviews, 56:53-102,2004; Miller et al., J. Med. Chem. Vol. 46, no. 24, 5097-5116, 2003;Aesop Cho, “Recent Advances in Oral Prodrug Discovery”, Annual Reportsin Medicinal Chemistry, Vol. 41, 395-407, 2006).

Prodrug forms of the herein described compounds, wherein the prodrug ismetabolized in vivo to produce a compound having the structure ofFormula (I), (IA), (II), (IIA), (III), (IIIA), (IV), (IVA), (V), (VA),(VI), (VIA), (VII), or (VIIA) as set forth herein are included withinthe scope of the claims. In some cases, some of the herein-describedcompounds may be a prodrug for another derivative or active compound.

Prodrugs are often useful because, in some situations, they may beeasier to administer than the parent drug. They may, for instance, bebioavailable by oral administration whereas the parent is not. Theprodrug may also have improved solubility in pharmaceutical compositionsover the parent drug. Prodrugs may be designed as reversible drugderivatives, for use as modifiers to enhance drug transport tosite-specific tissues. In some embodiments, the design of a prodrugincreases the effective water solubility. See, e.g., Fedorak et al., Am.J. Physiol., 269:G210-218 (1995); McLoed et al., Gastroenterol,106:405-413 (1994); Hochhaus et al., Biomed. Chrom., 6:283-286 (1992);J. Larsen and H. Bundgaard, Int. J. Pharmaceutics, 37, 87 (1987); J.Larsen et al., Int. J. Pharmaceutics, 47, 103 (1988); Sinkula et al., J.Pham. Sci., 64:181-210 (1975); T. Higuchi and V. Stella, Pro-drugs asNovel Delivery Systems, Vol. 14 of the A.C.S. Symposium Series; andEdward B. Roche, Bioreversible Carriers in Drug Design, AmericanPharmaceutical Association and Pergamon Press, 1987, all incorporatedherein for such disclosure).

Sites on the aromatic ring portion of compounds described herein can besusceptible to various metabolic reactions, therefore incorporation ofappropriate substituents on the aromatic ring structures, such as, byway of example only, halogens can reduce, minimize or eliminate thismetabolic pathway.

The compounds described herein may be labeled isotopically (e.g. with aradioisotope) or by other means, including, but not limited to, the useof chromophores or fluorescent moieties, bioluminescent labels,photoactivatable or chemiluminescent labels.

Compounds described herein include isotopically-labeled compounds, whichare identical to those recited in the various formulae and structurespresented herein, but for the fact that one or more atoms are replacedby an atom having an atomic mass or mass number different from theatomic mass or mass number usually found in nature. Examples of isotopesthat can be incorporated into the present compounds include isotopes ofhydrogen, carbon, nitrogen, oxygen, fluorine and chlorine, such as, forexample, ²H, ³H, ¹³C, ¹⁴C, ¹⁵N, ¹⁸O, ¹⁷O, ³⁵S, ¹⁸F, ³⁶Cl, respectively.Certain isotopically-labeled compounds described herein, for examplethose into which radioactive isotopes such as ³H and ¹⁴C areincorporated, are useful in drug and/or substrate tissue distributionassays. Further, substitution with isotopes such as deuterium, i.e., ²H,can afford certain therapeutic advantages resulting from greatermetabolic stability, such as, for example, increased in vivo half-lifeor reduced dosage requirements.

In additional or further embodiments, the compounds described herein aremetabolized upon administration to an organism in need to produce ametabolite that is then used to produce a desired effect, including adesired therapeutic effect.

Compounds described herein may be formed as, and/or used as,pharmaceutically acceptable salts. The type of pharmaceutical acceptablesalts, include, but are not limited to: (1) acid addition salts, formedby reacting the free base form of the compound with a pharmaceuticallyacceptable: inorganic acid, such as, for example, hydrochloric acid,hydrobromic acid, sulfuric acid, phosphoric acid, metaphosphoric acid,and the like; or with an organic acid, such as, for example, aceticacid, propionic acid, hexanoic acid, cyclopentanepropionic acid,glycolic acid, pyruvic acid, lactic acid, malonic acid, succinic acid,malic acid, maleic acid, fumaric acid, trifluoroacetic acid, tartaricacid, citric acid, benzoic acid, 3-(4-hydroxybenzoyl)benzoic acid,cinnamic acid, mandelic acid, methanesulfonic acid, ethanesulfonic acid,1,2-ethanedisulfonic acid, 2-hydroxyethanesulfonic acid, benzenesulfonicacid, toluenesulfonic acid, 2-naphthalenesulfonic acid,4-methylbicyclo-[2.2.2]oct-2-ene-1-carboxylic acid, glucoheptonic acid,4,4′-methylenebis-(3-hydroxy-2-ene-1-carboxylic acid), 3-phenylpropionicacid, trimethylacetic acid, tertiary butylacetic acid, lauryl sulfuricacid, gluconic acid, glutamic acid, hydroxynaphthoic acid, salicylicacid, stearic acid, muconic acid, butyric acid, phenylacetic acid,phenylbutyric acid, valproic acid, and the like; (2) salts formed whenan acidic proton present in the parent compound is replaced by a metalion, e.g., an alkali metal ion (e.g. lithium, sodium, potassium), analkaline earth ion (e.g. magnesium, or calcium), or an aluminum ion. Insome cases, compounds described herein may coordinate with an organicbase, such as, but not limited to, ethanolamine, diethanolamine,triethanolamine, tromethamine, N-methylglucamine, dicyclohexylamine,tris(hydroxymethyl)methylamine. In other cases, compounds describedherein may form salts with amino acids such as, but not limited to,arginine, lysine, and the like. Acceptable inorganic bases used to formsalts with compounds that include an acidic proton, include, but are notlimited to, aluminum hydroxide, calcium hydroxide, potassium hydroxide,sodium carbonate, sodium hydroxide, and the like.

It should be understood that a reference to a pharmaceuticallyacceptable salt includes the solvent addition forms or crystal formsthereof, particularly solvates or polymorphs. Solvates contain eitherstoichiometric or non-stoichiometric amounts of a solvent, and may beformed during the process of crystallization with pharmaceuticallyacceptable solvents such as water, ethanol, and the like. Hydrates areformed when the solvent is water, or alcoholates are formed when thesolvent is alcohol. Solvates of compounds described herein can beconveniently prepared or formed during the processes described herein.In addition, the compounds provided herein can exist in unsolvated aswell as solvated forms. In general, the solvated forms are consideredequivalent to the unsolvated forms for the purposes of the compounds andmethods provided herein.

In some embodiments, compounds described herein, such as compounds ofFormula (I), (IA), (II), (IIA), (III), (IIIA), (IV), (IVA), (V), (VA),(VI), (VIA), (VII), or (VIIA), are in various forms, including but notlimited to, amorphous forms, milled forms and nano-particulate forms. Inaddition, compounds described herein include crystalline forms, alsoknown as polymorphs. Polymorphs include the different crystal packingarrangements of the same elemental composition of a compound. Polymorphsusually have different X-ray diffraction patterns, melting points,density, hardness, crystal shape, optical properties, stability, andsolubility. Various factors such as the recrystallization solvent, rateof crystallization, and storage temperature may cause a single crystalform to dominate.

The screening and characterization of the pharmaceutically acceptablesalts, polymorphs and/or solvates may be accomplished using a variety oftechniques including, but not limited to, thermal analysis, x-raydiffraction, spectroscopy, vapor sorption, and microscopy. Thermalanalysis methods address thermo chemical degradation or thermo physicalprocesses including, but not limited to, polymorphic transitions, andsuch methods are used to analyze the relationships between polymorphicforms, determine weight loss, to find the glass transition temperature,or for excipient compatibility studies. Such methods include, but arenot limited to, Differential scanning calorimetry (DSC), ModulatedDifferential Scanning calorimetry (MDCS), Thermogravimetric analysis(TGA), and Thermogravi-metric and Infrared analysis (TG/IR). X-raydiffraction methods include, but are not limited to, single crystal andpowder diffractometers and synchrotron sources. The variousspectroscopic techniques used include, but are not limited to, Raman,FTIR, UV-VIS, and NMR (liquid and solid state). The various microscopytechniques include, but are not limited to, polarized light microscopy,Scanning Electron Microscopy (SEM) with Energy Dispersive X-Ray Analysis(EDX), Environmental Scanning Electron Microscopy with EDX (in gas orwater vapor atmosphere), IR microscopy, and Raman microscopy.

Throughout the specification, groups and substituents thereof can bechosen to provide stable moieties and compounds.

Synthesis of Compounds

In some embodiments, the synthesis of compounds described herein areaccomplished using means described in the chemical literature, using themethods described herein, or by a combination thereof. In addition,solvents, temperatures and other reaction conditions presented hereinmay vary.

In other embodiments, the starting materials and reagents used for thesynthesis of the compounds described herein are synthesized or areobtained from commercial sources, such as, but not limited to,Sigma-Aldrich, FischerScientific (Fischer Chemicals), and AcrosOrganics.

In further embodiments, the compounds described herein, and otherrelated compounds having different substituents are synthesized usingtechniques and materials described herein as well as those that arerecognized in the field, such as described, for example, in Fieser andFieser's Reagents for Organic Synthesis, Volumes 1-17 (John Wiley andSons, 1991); Rodd's Chemistry of Carbon Compounds, Volumes 1-5 andSupplementals (Elsevier Science Publishers, 1989); Organic Reactions,Volumes 1-40 (John Wiley and Sons, 1991), Larock's Comprehensive OrganicTransformations (VCH Publishers Inc., 1989), March, ADVANCED ORGANICCHEMISTRY 4^(th) Ed., (Wiley 1992); Carey and Sundberg, ADVANCED ORGANICCHEMISTRY 4^(th) Ed., Vols. A and B (Plenum 2000, 2001), and Green andWuts, PROTECTIVE GROUPS IN ORGANIC SYNTHESIS 3^(rd) Ed., (Wiley 1999)(all of which are incorporated by reference for such disclosure).General methods for the preparation of compound as disclosed herein maybe derived from reactions and the reactions may be modified by the useof appropriate reagents and conditions, for the introduction of thevarious moieties found in the formulae as provided herein. As a guidethe following synthetic methods may be utilized.

Formation of Covalent Linkages by Reaction of an Electrophile with aNucleophile

The compounds described herein can be modified using variouselectrophiles and/or nucleophiles to form new functional groups orsubstituents. Table 1 entitled “Examples of Covalent Linkages andPrecursors Thereof” lists selected non-limiting examples of covalentlinkages and precursor functional groups which yield the covalentlinkages. Table 1 may be used as guidance toward the variety ofelectrophiles and nucleophiles combinations available that providecovalent linkages. Precursor functional groups are shown aselectrophilic groups and nucleophilic groups.

TABLE 1 Examples of Covalent Linkages and Precursors Thereof CovalentLinkage Product Electrophile Nucleophile Carboxamides Activated estersamines/anilines Carboxamides acyl azides amines/anilines Carboxamidesacyl halides amines/anilines Esters acyl halides alcohols/phenols Estersacyl nitriles alcohols/phenols Carboxamides acyl nitrilesamines/anilines Imines Aldehydes amines/anilines Alkyl amines alkylhalides amines/anilines Esters alkyl halides carboxylic acids Thioethersalkyl halides Thiols Ethers alkyl halides alcohols/phenols Thioethersalkyl sulfonates Thiols Esters Anhydrides alcohols/phenols CarboxamidesAnhydrides amines/anilines Thiophenols aryl halides Thiols Aryl aminesaryl halides Amines Thioethers Azindines Thiols Carboxamides carboxylicacids amines/anilines Esters carboxylic acids Alcohols hydrazinesHydrazides carboxylic acids N-acylureas or Anhydrides carbodiimidescarboxylic acids Esters diazoalkanes carboxylic acids ThioethersEpoxides Thiols Thioethers haloacetamides Thiols Ureas Isocyanatesamines/anilines Urethanes Isocyanates alcohols/phenols Thioureasisothiocyanates amines/anilines Thioethers Maleimides Thiols Alkylamines sulfonate esters amines/anilines Thioethers sulfonate estersThiols Sulfonamides sulfonyl halides amines/anilines Sulfonate esterssulfonyl halides phenols/alcoholsUse of Protecting Groups

In the reactions described, it may be necessary to protect reactivefunctional groups, for example hydroxy, amino, imino, thio or carboxygroups, where these are desired in the final product, in order to avoidtheir unwanted participation in reactions. Protecting groups are used toblock some or all of the reactive moieties and prevent such groups fromparticipating in chemical reactions until the protective group isremoved. It is preferred that each protective group be removable by adifferent means. Protective groups that are cleaved under totallydisparate reaction conditions fulfill the requirement of differentialremoval.

Protective groups can be removed by acid, base, reducing conditions(such as, for example, hydrogenolysis), and/or oxidative conditions.Groups such as trityl, dimethoxytrityl, acetal and t-butyldimethylsilylare acid labile and may be used to protect carboxy and hydroxy reactivemoieties in the presence of amino groups protected with Cbz groups,which are removable by hydrogenolysis, and Fmoc groups, which are baselabile. Carboxylic acid and hydroxy reactive moieties may be blockedwith base labile groups such as, but not limited to, methyl, ethyl, andacetyl in the presence of amines blocked with acid labile groups such ast-butyl carbamate or with carbamates that are both acid and base stablebut hydrolytically removable.

Carboxylic acid and hydroxy reactive moieties may also be blocked withhydrolytically removable protective groups such as the benzyl group,while amine groups capable of hydrogen bonding with acids may be blockedwith base labile groups such as Fmoc. Carboxylic acid reactive moietiesmay be protected by conversion to simple ester compounds as exemplifiedherein, which include conversion to alkyl esters, or they may be blockedwith oxidatively-removable protective groups such as2,4-dimethoxybenzyl, while co-existing amino groups may be blocked withfluoride labile silyl carbamates.

Allyl blocking groups are useful in then presence of acid- andbase-protecting groups since the former are stable and can besubsequently removed by metal or pi-acid catalysts. For example, anallyl-blocked carboxylic acid can be deprotected with a Pd⁰-catalyzedreaction in the presence of acid labile t-butyl carbamate or base-labileacetate amine protecting groups. Yet another form of protecting group isa resin to which a compound or intermediate may be attached. As long asthe residue is attached to the resin, that functional group is blockedand cannot react. Once released from the resin, the functional group isavailable to react.

Typically blocking/protecting groups may be selected from:

Other protecting groups, plus a detailed description of techniquesapplicable to the creation of protecting groups and their removal aredescribed in Greene and Wuts, Protective Groups in Organic Synthesis,3rd Ed., John Wiley & Sons, New York, N.Y., 1999, and Kocienski,Protective Groups, Thieme Verlag, New York, N.Y., 1994, which areincorporated herein by reference for such disclosure).

CERTAIN TERMINOLOGY

Unless defined otherwise, all technical and scientific terms used hereinhave the same meaning as is commonly understood to which the claimedsubject matter belongs. In the event that there are a plurality ofdefinitions for terms herein, those in this section prevail. Allpatents, patent applications, publications and published nucleotide andamino acid sequences (e.g., sequences available in GenBank or otherdatabases) referred to herein are incorporated by reference. Wherereference is made to a URL or other such identifier or address, it isunderstood that such identifiers can change and particular informationon the internet can come and go, but equivalent information can be foundby searching the internet. Reference thereto evidences the availabilityand public dissemination of such information.

It is to be understood that the foregoing general description and thefollowing detailed description are exemplary and explanatory only andare not restrictive of any subject matter claimed. In this application,the use of the singular includes the plural unless specifically statedotherwise. It must be noted that, as used in the specification and theappended claims, the singular forms “a,” “an” and “the” include pluralreferents unless the context clearly dictates otherwise. In thisapplication, the use of “or” means “and/or” unless stated otherwise.Furthermore, use of the term “including” as well as other forms, such as“include”, “includes,” and “included,” is not limiting.

The section headings used herein are for organizational purposes onlyand are not to be construed as limiting the subject matter described.

Definition of standard chemistry terms may be found in reference works,including but not limited to, Carey and Sundberg “ADVANCED ORGANICCHEMISTRY 4^(TH) ED.” Vols. A (2000) and B (2001), Plenum Press, NewYork. Unless otherwise indicated, conventional methods of massspectroscopy, NMR, HPLC, protein chemistry, biochemistry, recombinantDNA techniques and pharmacology.

Unless specific definitions are provided, the nomenclature employed inconnection with, and the laboratory procedures and techniques of,analytical chemistry, synthetic organic chemistry, and medicinal andpharmaceutical chemistry described herein are those recognized in thefield. Standard techniques can be used for chemical syntheses, chemicalanalyses, pharmaceutical preparation, formulation, and delivery, andtreatment of patients. Standard techniques can be used for recombinantDNA, oligonucleotide synthesis, and tissue culture and transformation(e.g., electroporation, lipofection). Reactions and purificationtechniques can be performed e.g., using kits of manufacturer'sspecifications or as commonly accomplished in the art or as describedherein. The foregoing techniques and procedures can be generallyperformed of conventional methods and as described in various generaland more specific references that are cited and discussed throughout thepresent specification.

It is to be understood that the methods and compositions describedherein are not limited to the particular methodology, protocols, celllines, constructs, and reagents described herein and as such may vary.It is also to be understood that the terminology used herein is for thepurpose of describing particular embodiments only, and is not intendedto limit the scope of the methods, compounds, compositions describedherein.

As used herein, C₁-C_(x) includes C₁-C₂, C₁-C₃ . . . C₁-C_(x). C₁-C_(x)refers to the number of carbon atoms that make up the moiety to which itdesignates (excluding optional substituents).

An “alkyl” group refers to an aliphatic hydrocarbon group. The alkylgroups may or may not include units of unsaturation. The alkyl moietymay be a “saturated alkyl” group, which means that it does not containany units of unsaturation (i.e. a carbon-carbon double bond or acarbon-carbon triple bond). The alkyl group may also be an “unsaturatedalkyl” moiety, which means that it contains at least one unit ofunsaturation. The alkyl moiety, whether saturated or unsaturated, may bebranched, straight chain, or cyclic.

The “alkyl” group may have 1 to 6 carbon atoms (whenever it appearsherein, a numerical range such as “1 to 6” refers to each integer in thegiven range; e.g., “1 to 6 carbon atoms” means that the alkyl group mayconsist of 1 carbon atom, 2 carbon atoms, 3 carbon atoms, etc., up toand including 6 carbon atoms, although the present definition alsocovers the occurrence of the term “alkyl” where no numerical range isdesignated). The alkyl group of the compounds described herein may bedesignated as “C₁-C₆ alkyl” or similar designations. By way of exampleonly, “C₁-C₆ alkyl” indicates that there are one to six carbon atoms inthe alkyl chain, i.e., the alkyl chain is selected from the groupconsisting of methyl, ethyl, n-propyl, iso-propyl, n-butyl, iso-butyl,sec-butyl, t-butyl, n-pentyl, iso-pentyl, neo-pentyl, hexyl, propen-3-yl(allyl), cyclopropylmethyl, cyclobutylmethyl, cyclopentylmethyl,cyclohexylmethyl. Alkyl groups can be substituted or unsubstituted.Depending on the structure, an alkyl group can be a monoradical or adiradical (i.e., an alkylene group).

An “alkoxy” refers to a “—O-alkyl” group, where alkyl is as definedherein.

The term “alkenyl” refers to a type of alkyl group in which the firsttwo atoms of the alkyl group form a double bond that is not part of anaromatic group. That is, an alkenyl group begins with the atoms—C(R)═CR₂, wherein R refers to the remaining portions of the alkenylgroup, which may be the same or different. Non-limiting examples of analkenyl group include —CH═CH₂, —C(CH₃)═CH₂, —CH═CHCH₃, —CH═C(CH₃)₂ and—C(CH₃)═CHCH₃. The alkenyl moiety may be branched, straight chain, orcyclic (in which case, it would also be known as a “cycloalkenyl”group). Alkenyl groups may have 2 to 6 carbons. Alkenyl groups can besubstituted or unsubstituted. Depending on the structure, an alkenylgroup can be a monoradical or a diradical (i.e., an alkenylene group).

The term “alkynyl” refers to a type of alkyl group in which the firsttwo atoms of the alkyl group form a triple bond. That is, an alkynylgroup begins with the atoms —C≡C—R, wherein R refers to the remainingportions of the alkynyl group. Non-limiting examples of an alkynyl groupinclude —C≡CH, —C≡CCH₃, —C≡CCH₂CH₃ and —C≡CCH₂CH₂CH₃. The “R” portion ofthe alkynyl moiety may be branched, straight chain, or cyclic. Analkynyl group can have 2 to 6 carbons. Alkynyl groups can be substitutedor unsubstituted. Depending on the structure, an alkynyl group can be amonoradical or a diradical (i.e., an alkynylene group).

“Amino” refers to a —NH₂ group.

The term “alkylamine” or “alkylamino” refers to the —N(alkyl)_(x)H_(y)group, where alkyl is as defined herein and x and y are selected fromthe group x=1, y=1 and x=2, y=0. When x=2, the alkyl groups, takentogether with the nitrogen to which they are attached, can optionallyform a cyclic ring system. “Dialkylamino” refers to a —N(alkyl)₂ group,where alkyl is as defined herein.

The term “aromatic” refers to a planar ring having a delocalizedπ-electron system containing 4n+2 π electrons, where n is an integer.Aromatic rings can be formed from five, six, seven, eight, nine, or morethan nine atoms. Aromatics can be optionally substituted. The term“aromatic” includes both aryl groups (e.g., phenyl, naphthalenyl) andheteroaryl groups (e.g., pyridinyl, quinolinyl).

As used herein, the term “aryl” refers to an aromatic ring wherein eachof the atoms forming the ring is a carbon atom. Aryl rings can be formedby five, six, seven, eight, nine, or more than nine carbon atoms. Arylgroups can be optionally substituted. Examples of aryl groups include,but are not limited to phenyl, and naphthalenyl. Depending on thestructure, an aryl group can be a monoradical or a diradical (i.e., anarylene group).

“Carboxy” refers to —CO₂H. In some embodiments, carboxy moieties may bereplaced with a “carboxylic acid bioisostere”, which refers to afunctional group or moiety that exhibits similar physical and/orchemical properties as a carboxylic acid moiety. A carboxylic acidbioisostere has similar biological properties to that of a carboxylicacid group. A compound with a carboxylic acid moiety can have thecarboxylic acid moiety exchanged with a carboxylic acid bioisostere andhave similar physical and/or biological properties when compared to thecarboxylic acid-containing compound. For example, in one embodiment, acarboxylic acid bioisostere would ionize at physiological pH to roughlythe same extent as a carboxylic acid group. Examples of bioisosteres ofa carboxylic acid include, but are not limited to,

and the like.

The term “cycloalkyl” refers to a monocyclic or polycyclic non-aromaticradical, wherein each of the atoms forming the ring (i.e. skeletalatoms) is a carbon atom. Cycloalkyls may be saturated, or partiallyunsaturated. Cycloalkyls may be fused with an aromatic ring (in whichcase the cycloalkyl is bonded through a non-aromatic ring carbon atom).Cycloalkyl groups include groups having from 3 to 10 ring atoms.Illustrative examples of cycloalkyl groups include, but are not limitedto, the following moieties:

and the like.

The terms “heteroaryl” or, alternatively, “heteroaromatic” refers to anaryl group that includes one or more ring heteroatoms selected fromnitrogen, oxygen and sulfur. An N-containing “heteroaromatic” or“heteroaryl” moiety refers to an aromatic group in which at least one ofthe skeletal atoms of the ring is a nitrogen atom. Polycyclic heteroarylgroups may be fused or non-fused. Illustrative examples of heteroarylgroups include the following moieties:

and the like.

A “heterocycloalkyl” group or “heteroalicyclic” group refers to acycloalkyl group, wherein at least one skeletal ring atom is aheteroatom selected from nitrogen, oxygen and sulfur. The radicals maybe fused with an aryl or heteroaryl. Illustrative examples ofheterocycloalkyl groups, also referred to as non-aromatic heterocycles,include:

and the like. The term heteroalicyclic also includes all ring forms ofthe carbohydrates, including but not limited to the monosaccharides, thedisaccharides and the oligosaccharides. Unless otherwise noted,heterocycloalkyls have from 2 to 10 carbons in the ring. It isunderstood that when referring to the number of carbon atoms in aheterocycloalkyl, the number of carbon atoms in the heterocycloalkyl isnot the same as the total number of atoms (including the heteroatoms)that make up the heterocycloalkyl (i.e. skeletal atoms of theheterocycloalkyl ring).

The term “halo” or, alternatively, “halogen” means fluoro, chloro, bromoand iodo.

The term “haloalkyl” refers to an alkyl group that is substituted withone or more halogens. The halogens may the same or they may bedifferent. Non-limiting examples of haloalkyls include —CH₂C1, —CF₃,—CHF₂, —CH₂CF₃, —CF₂CF₃, —CF(CH₃)₃, and the like.

The terms “fluoroalkyl” and “fluoroalkoxy” include alkyl and alkoxygroups, respectively, that are substituted with one or more fluorineatoms. Non-limiting examples of fluoroalkyls include —CF₃, —CHF₂, —CH₂F,—CH₂CF₃, —CF₂CF₃, —CF₂CF₂CF₃, —CF(CH₃)₃, and the like. Non-limitingexamples of fluoroalkoxy groups, include —OCF₃, —OCHF₂, —OCH₂F,—OCH₂CF₃, —OCF₂CF₃, —OCF₂CF₂CF₃, —OCF(CH₃)₂, and the like.

The term “heteroalkyl” refers to an alkyl radical where one or moreskeletal chain atoms is selected from an atom other than carbon, e.g.,oxygen, nitrogen, sulfur, phosphorus, silicon, or combinations thereof.The heteroatom(s) may be placed at any interior position of theheteroalkyl group. Examples include, but are not limited to, —CH₂—O—CH₃,—CH₂—CH₂—O—CH₃, —CH₂—NH—CH₃, —CH₂—CH₂—NH—CH₃, —CH₂—N(CH₃)—CH₃,—CH₂—CH₂—NH—CH₃, —CH₂—CH₂—N(CH₃)—CH₃, —CH₂—S—CH₂—CH₃, —CH₂—CH₂,—S(O)—CH₃, —CH₂—CH₂—S(O)₂—CH₃, —CH₂—NH—OCH₃, —CH₂—O—Si(CH₃)₃,—CH₂—CH═N—OCH₃, and —CH═CH—N(CH₃)—CH₃. In addition, up to twoheteroatoms may be consecutive, such as, by way of example, —CH₂—NH—OCH₃and —CH₂—O—Si(CH₃)₃. Excluding the number of heteroatoms, a“heteroalkyl” may have from 1 to 6 carbon atoms.

The term “bond” or “single bond” refers to a chemical bond between twoatoms, or two moieties when the atoms joined by the bond are consideredto be part of larger substructure.

The term “moiety” refers to a specific segment or functional group of amolecule. Chemical moieties are often recognized chemical entitiesembedded in or appended to a molecule.

As used herein, the substituent “R” appearing by itself and without anumber designation refers to a substituent selected from among fromalkyl, haloalkyl, heteroalkyl, alkenyl, cycloalkyl, aryl, heteroaryl(bonded through a ring carbon), and heterocycloalkyl.

The term “optionally substituted” or “substituted” means that thereferenced group may be substituted with one or more additional group(s)individually and independently selected from alkyl, cycloalkyl, aryl,heteroaryl, heterocycloalkyl, —OH, alkoxy, aryloxy, alkylthio, arylthio,alkylsulfoxide, arylsulfoxide, alkylsulfone, arylsulfone, —CN, alkyne,C₁-C₆alkylalkyne, halo, acyl, acyloxy, —CO₂H, —CO₂-alkyl, nitro,haloalkyl, fluoroalkyl, and amino, including mono- and di-substitutedamino groups (e.g. —NH₂, —NHR, —N(R)₂), and the protected derivativesthereof. By way of example, an optional substituents may be L^(s)R^(s),wherein each L^(s) is independently selected from a bond, —O—, —C(═O)—,—S—, —S(═O)—, —S(═O)₂—, —NH—, —NHC(O)—, —C(O)NH—, S(═O)₂NH—, —NHS(═O)₂,—OC(O)NH—, —NHC(O)O—, —(C₁-C₆alkyl)-, or —(C₂-C₆alkenyl)-; and eachR^(s) is independently selected from among H, (C₁-C₆alkyl),(C₃-C₈cycloalkyl), aryl, heteroaryl, heterocycloalkyl, andC₁-C₆heteroalkyl. The protecting groups that may form the protectivederivatives of the above substituents are found in sources such asGreene and Wuts, above.

The methods and formulations described herein include the use ofcrystalline forms (also known as polymorphs), or pharmaceuticallyacceptable salts of compounds having the structure of Formula (I), (IA),(II), (IIA), (III), (IIIA), (IV), (IVA), (V), (VA), (VI), (VIA), (VII),or (VIIA), as well as active metabolites of these compounds having thesame type of activity. In some situations, compounds may exist astautomers. All tautomers are included within the scope of the compoundspresented herein. In addition, the compounds described herein can existin unsolvated as well as solvated forms with pharmaceutically acceptablesolvents such as water, ethanol, and the like. The solvated forms of thecompounds presented herein are also considered to be disclosed herein.

The terms “kit” and “article of manufacture” are used as synonyms.

The term “subject” or “patient” encompasses mammals and non-mammals.Examples of mammals include, but are not limited to, any member of theMammalian class: humans, non-human primates such as chimpanzees, andother apes and monkey species; farm animals such as cattle, horses,sheep, goats, swine; domestic animals such as rabbits, dogs, and cats;laboratory animals including rodents, such as rats, mice and guineapigs, and the like. Examples of non-mammals include, but are not limitedto, birds, fish and the like. In one embodiment of the methods andcompositions provided herein, the mammal is a human.

The terms “treat,” “treating” or “treatment,” as used herein, includealleviating, abating or ameliorating a disease or condition symptoms,preventing additional symptoms, ameliorating or preventing theunderlying causes of symptoms, inhibiting the disease or condition,e.g., arresting the development of the disease or condition, relievingthe disease or condition, causing regression of the disease orcondition, relieving a condition caused by the disease or condition, orstopping the symptoms of the disease or condition eitherprophylactically and/or therapeutically.

As used herein, the term “target protein” refers to a protein or aportion of a protein capable of being bound by, or interacting with acompound described herein, such as a compound of Formula (I), (IA),(II), (IIA), (III), (IIIA), (IV), (IVA), (V), (VA), (VI), (VIA), (VII),or (VIIA). In certain embodiments, a target protein is a STIM protein.In certain embodiments, a target protein is an Orai protein.

As used herein, “STIM protein” includes but is not limited to, mammalianSTIM-1, such as human and rodent (e.g., mouse) STIM-1, Drosophilamelanogaster D-STIM, C. elegans C-STIM, Anopheles gambiae STIM andmammalian STIM-2, such as human and rodent (e.g., mouse) STIM-2. (seeparagraphs [0211] through [0270] of US 2007/0031814, as well as Table 3of US 2007/0031814, herein incorporated by reference) As describedherein, such proteins have been identified as being involved in,participating in and/or providing for store-operated calcium entry ormodulation thereof, cytoplasmic calcium buffering and/or modulation ofcalcium levels in or movement of calcium into, within or out ofintracellular calcium stores (e.g., endoplasmic reticulum).

As used herein, an “Orai protein” includes Orai1 (SEQ ID NO: 1 asdescribed in WO 07/081804), Orai2 (SEQ ID NO: 2 as described in WO07/081804), or Orai3 (SEQ ID NO: 3 as described in WO 07/081804). Orai1nucleic acid sequence corresponds to GenBank accession number NM_032790,Orai2 nucleic acid sequence corresponds to GenBank accession numberBC069270 and Orai3 nucleic acid sequence corresponds to GenBankaccession number NM_152288. As used herein, Orai refers to any one ofthe Orai genes, e.g., Orai1, Orai2, Orai3 (see Table I of WO 07/081804).As described herein, such proteins have been identified as beinginvolved in, participating in and/or providing for store-operatedcalcium entry or modulation thereof, cytoplasmic calcium bufferingand/or modulation of calcium levels in or movement of calcium into,within or out of intracellular calcium stores (e.g., endoplasmicreticulum).

The term “fragment” or “derivative” when referring to a protein (e.g.STIM, Orai) means proteins or polypeptides which retain essentially thesame biological function or activity in at least one assay as the nativeprotein(s). For example, the fragments or derivatives of the referencedprotein maintains at least about 50% of the activity of the nativeproteins, at least 75%, at least about 95% of the activity of the nativeproteins, as determined e.g. by a calcium influx assay.

As used herein, amelioration of the symptoms of a particular disease,disorder or condition by administration of a particular compound orpharmaceutical composition refers to any lessening of severity, delay inonset, slowing of progression, or shortening of duration, whetherpermanent or temporary, lasting or transient that can be attributed toor associated with administration of the compound or composition.

The term “modulate,” as used herein, means to interact with a targetprotein either directly or indirectly so as to alter the activity of thetarget protein, including, by way of example only, to inhibit theactivity of the target, or to limit or reduce the activity of thetarget.

As used herein, the term “modulator” refers to a compound that alters anactivity of a target. For example, a modulator can cause an increase ordecrease in the magnitude of a certain activity of a target compared tothe magnitude of the activity in the absence of the modulator. Incertain embodiments, a modulator is an inhibitor, which decreases themagnitude of one or more activities of a target. In certain embodiments,an inhibitor completely prevents one or more activities of a target.

As used herein, “modulation” with reference to intracellular calciumrefers to any alteration or adjustment in intracellular calciumincluding but not limited to alteration of calcium concentration in thecytoplasm and/or intracellular calcium storage organelles, e.g.,endoplasmic reticulum, and alteration of the kinetics of calcium fluxesinto, out of and within cells. In aspect, modulation refers toreduction.

As used herein, the term “target activity” refers to a biologicalactivity capable of being modulated by a modulator. Certain exemplarytarget activities include, but are not limited to, binding affinity,signal transduction, enzymatic activity, tumor growth, inflammation orinflammation-related processes, and amelioration of one or more symptomsassociated with a disease or condition.

The terms “inhibits”, “inhibiting”, or “inhibitor” of SOC channelactivity or CRAC channel activity, as used herein, refer to inhibitionof store operated calcium channel activity or calcium release activatedcalcium channel activity.

The term “acceptable” with respect to a formulation, composition oringredient, as used herein, means having no persistent detrimentaleffect on the general health of the subject being treated.

By “pharmaceutically acceptable,” as used herein, refers a material,such as a carrier or diluent, which does not abrogate the biologicalactivity or properties of the compound, and is relatively nontoxic,i.e., the material may be administered to an individual without causingundesirable biological effects or interacting in a deleterious mannerwith any of the components of the composition in which it is contained.

The term “pharmaceutical combination” as used herein, means a productthat results from the mixing or combining of more than one activeingredient and includes both fixed and non-fixed combinations of theactive ingredients. The term “fixed combination” means that one activeingredient, e.g. a compound of Formula (I), (IA), (II), (IIA), (III),(IIIA), (IV), (IVA), (V), (VA), (VI), (VIA), (VII), or (VIIA), and aco-agent, are both administered to a patient simultaneously in the formof a single entity or dosage. The term “non-fixed combination” meansthat one active ingredient, e.g. a compound of Formula (I), (IA), (II),(IIA), (III), (IIIA), (IV), (IVA), (V), (VA), (VI), (VIA), (VII), or(VIIA), and a co-agent, are administered to a patient as separateentities either simultaneously, concurrently or sequentially with nospecific intervening time limits, wherein such administration provideseffective levels of the two compounds in the body of the patient. Thelatter also applies to cocktail therapy, e.g. the administration ofthree or more active ingredients.

The term “pharmaceutical composition” refers to a mixture of a compoundof Formula (I), (IA), (II), (IIA), (III), (IIIA), (IV), (IVA), (V),(VA), (VI), (VIA), (VII), or (VIIA) described herein with other chemicalcomponents, such as carriers, stabilizers, diluents, dispersing agents,suspending agents, thickening agents, and/or excipients. Thepharmaceutical composition facilitates administration of the compound toan organism. Multiple techniques of administering a compound exist inthe art including, but not limited to: intravenous, oral, aerosol,parenteral, ophthalmic, pulmonary and topical administration.

The terms “effective amount” or “therapeutically effective amount,” asused herein, refer to a sufficient amount of an agent or a compoundbeing administered which will relieve to some extent one or more of thesymptoms of the disease or condition being treated. The result can bereduction and/or alleviation of the signs, symptoms, or causes of adisease, or any other desired alteration of a biological system. Forexample, an “effective amount” for therapeutic uses is the amount of thecomposition that includes a compound of Formula (I), (IA), (II), (IIA),(III), (IIIA), (IV), (IVA), (V), (VA), (VI), (VIA), (VII), or (VIIA)described herein required to provide a clinically significant decreasein disease symptoms. An appropriate “effective” amount in any individualcase may be determined using techniques, such as a dose escalationstudy.

The terms “enhance” or “enhancing,” as used herein, means to increase orprolong either in potency or duration a desired effect. Thus, in regardto enhancing the effect of therapeutic agents, the term “enhancing”refers to the ability to increase or prolong, either in potency orduration, the effect of other therapeutic agents on a system. An“enhancing-effective amount,” as used herein, refers to an amountadequate to enhance the effect of another therapeutic agent in a desiredsystem.

The terms “co-administration” or the like, as used herein, are meant toencompass administration of the selected therapeutic agents to a singlepatient, and are intended to include treatment regimens in which theagents are administered by the same or different route of administrationor at the same or different time.

The term “carrier,” as used herein, refers to relatively nontoxicchemical compounds or agents that facilitate the incorporation of acompound into cells or tissues.

The term “diluent” refers to chemical compounds that are used to dilutethe compound of interest prior to delivery. Diluents can also be used tostabilize compounds because they can provide a more stable environment.Salts dissolved in buffered solutions (which also can provide pH controlor maintenance) are utilized as diluents in the art, including, but notlimited to a phosphate buffered saline solution.

A “metabolite” of a compound disclosed herein is a derivative of thatcompound that is formed when the compound is metabolized. The term“active metabolite” refers to a biologically active derivative of acompound that is formed when the compound is metabolized. The term“metabolized,” as used herein, refers to the sum of the processes(including, but not limited to, hydrolysis reactions and reactionscatalyzed by enzymes) by which a particular substance is changed by anorganism. Thus, enzymes may produce specific structural alterations to acompound. For example, cytochrome P450 catalyzes a variety of oxidativeand reductive reactions while uridine diphosphate glucuronyltransferasescatalyze the transfer of an activated glucuronic-acid molecule toaromatic alcohols, aliphatic alcohols, carboxylic acids, amines and freesulphydryl groups. Further information on metabolism may be obtainedfrom The Pharmacological Basis of Therapeutics, 9th Edition, McGraw-Hill(1996). Metabolites of the compounds disclosed herein can be identifiedeither by administration of compounds to a host and analysis of tissuesamples from the host, or by incubation of compounds with hepatic cellsin vitro and analysis of the resulting compounds.

“Bioavailability” refers to the percentage of the weight of the compounddisclosed herein (e.g. compound of Formula (I), (IA), (II), (IIA),(III), (IIIA), (IV), (IVA), (V), (VA), (VI), (VIA), (VII), or (VIIA)),that is delivered into the general circulation of the animal or humanbeing studied. The total exposure (AUC(0-∞)) of a drug when administeredintravenously is usually defined as 100% bioavailable (F %). “Oralbioavailability” refers to the extent to which a compound disclosedherein, is absorbed into the general circulation when the pharmaceuticalcomposition is taken orally as compared to intravenous injection.

“Blood plasma concentration” refers to the concentration of a compoundof Formula (I), (IA), (II), (IIA), (III), (IIIA), (IV), (IVA), (V),(VA), (VI), (VIA), (VII), or (VIIA) disclosed herein, in the plasmacomponent of blood of a subject. It is understood that the plasmaconcentration of compounds described herein may vary significantlybetween subjects, due to variability with respect to metabolism and/orpossible interactions with other therapeutic agents. In accordance withone embodiment disclosed herein, the blood plasma concentration of thecompounds disclosed herein may vary from subject to subject. Likewise,values such as maximum plasma concentration (Cmax) or time to reachmaximum plasma concentration (Tmax), or total area under the plasmaconcentration time curve (AUC(0-∞)) may vary from subject to subject.Due to this variability, the amount necessary to constitute “atherapeutically effective amount” of a compound may vary from subject tosubject.

As used herein, “calcium homeostasis” refers to the maintenance of anoverall balance in intracellular calcium levels and movements, includingcalcium signaling, within a cell.

As used herein, “intracellular calcium” refers to calcium located in acell without specification of a particular cellular location. Incontrast, “cytosolic” or “cytoplasmic” with reference to calcium refersto calcium located in the cell cytoplasm.

As used herein, an effect on intracellular calcium is any alteration ofany aspect of intracellular calcium, including but not limited to, analteration in intracellular calcium levels and location and movement ofcalcium into, out of or within a cell or intracellular calcium store ororganelle. For example, an effect on intracellular calcium can be analteration of the properties, such as, for example, the kinetics,sensitivities, rate, amplitude, and electrophysiologicalcharacteristics, of calcium flux or movement that occurs in a cell orportion thereof. An effect on intracellular calcium can be an alterationin any intracellular calcium-modulating process, including,store-operated calcium entry, cytosolic calcium buffering, and calciumlevels in or movement of calcium into, out of or within an intracellularcalcium store. Any of these aspects can be assessed in a variety of waysincluding, but not limited to, evaluation of calcium or other ion(particularly cation) levels, movement of calcium or other ion(particularly cation), fluctuations in calcium or other ion(particularly cation) levels, kinetics of calcium or other ion(particularly cation) fluxes and/or transport of calcium or other ion(particularly cation) through a membrane. An alteration can be any suchchange that is statistically significant. Thus, for example ifintracellular calcium in a test cell and a control cell is said todiffer, such difference can be a statistically significant difference.

As used herein, “involved in” with respect to the relationship between aprotein and an aspect of intracellular calcium or intracellular calciumregulation means that when expression or activity of the protein in acell is reduced, altered or eliminated, there is a concomitant orassociated reduction, alteration or elimination of one or more aspectsof intracellular calcium or intracellular calcium regulation. Such analteration or reduction in expression or activity can occur by virtue ofan alteration of expression of a gene encoding the protein or byaltering the levels of the protein. A protein involved in an aspect ofintracellular calcium, such as, for example, store-operated calciumentry, thus, can be one that provides for or participates in an aspectof intracellular calcium or intracellular calcium regulation. Forexample, a protein that provides for store-operated calcium entry can bea STIM protein and/or an Orai protein.

As used herein, a protein that is a component of a calcium channel is aprotein that participates in multi-protein complex that forms thechannel.

As used herein, “basal” or “resting” with reference to cytosolic calciumlevels refers to the concentration of calcium in the cytoplasm of acell, such as, for example, an unstimulated cell, that has not beensubjected to a condition that results in movement of calcium into or outof the cell or within the cell. The basal or resting cytosolic calciumlevel can be the concentration of free calcium (i.e., calcium that isnot bound to a cellular calcium-binding substance) in the cytoplasm of acell, such as, for example, an unstimulated cell, that has not beensubjected to a condition that results in movement of calcium into or outof the cell.

As used herein, “movement” with respect to ions, including cations,e.g., calcium, refers to movement or relocation, such as for exampleflux, of ions into, out of, or within a cell. Thus, movement of ions canbe, for example, movement of ions from the extracellular medium into acell, from within a cell to the extracellular medium, from within anintracellular organelle or storage site to the cytosol, from the cytosolinto an intracellular organelle or storage site, from one intracellularorganelle or storage site to another intracellular organelle or storagesite, from the extracellular medium into an intracellular organelle orstorage site, from an intracellular organelle or storage site to theextracellular medium and from one location to another within the cellcytoplasm.

As used herein, “cation entry” or “calcium entry” into a cell refers toentry of cations, such as calcium, into an intracellular location, suchas the cytoplasm of a cell or into the lumen of an intracellularorganelle or storage site. Thus, cation entry can be, for example, themovement of cations into the cell cytoplasm from the extracellularmedium or from an intracellular organelle or storage site, or themovement of cations into an intracellular organelle or storage site fromthe cytoplasm or extracellular medium. Movement of calcium into thecytoplasm from an intracellular organelle or storage site is alsoreferred to as “calcium release” from the organelle or storage site.

As used herein, “protein that modulates intracellular calcium” refers toany cellular protein that is involved in regulating, controlling and/oraltering intracellular calcium. For example, such a protein can beinvolved in altering or adjusting intracellular calcium in a number ofways, including, but not limited to, through the maintenance of restingor basal cytoplasmic calcium levels, or through involvement in acellular response to a signal that is transmitted in a cell through amechanism that includes a deviation in intracellular calcium fromresting or basal states. In the context of a “protein that modulatesintracellular calcium,” a “cellular” protein is one that is associatedwith a cell, such as, for example, a cytoplasmic protein, a plasmamembrane-associated protein or an intracellular membrane protein.Proteins that modulate intracellular calcium include, but are notlimited to, ion transport proteins, calcium-binding proteins andregulatory proteins that regulate ion transport proteins.

As used herein, “amelioration” refers to an improvement in a disease orcondition or at least a partial relief of symptoms associated with adisease or condition.

As used herein, “cell response” refers to any cellular response thatresults from ion movement into or out of a cell or within a cell. Thecell response may be associated with any cellular activity that isdependent, at least in part, on ions such as, for example, calcium. Suchactivities may include, for example, cellular activation, geneexpression, endocytosis, exocytosis, cellular trafficking and apoptoticcell death.

As used herein, “immune cells” include cells of the immune system andcells that perform a function or activity in an immune response, suchas, but not limited to, T-cells, B-cells, lymphocytes, macrophages,dendritic cells, neutrophils, eosinophils, basophils, mast cells, plasmacells, white blood cells, antigen presenting cells and natural killercells.

As used herein, “cytokine” refers to small soluble proteins secreted bycells that can alter the behavior or properties of the secreting cell oranother cell. Cytokines bind to cytokine receptors and trigger abehavior or property within the cell, for example, cell proliferation,death or differentiation. Exemplary cytokines include, but are notlimited to, interleukins (e.g., IL-2, IL-3, IL-4, IL-5, IL-6, IL-7,IL-8, IL-9, IL-10, IL-11, IL-12, IL-13, IL-15, IL-16, IL-17, IL-18,IL-1α, IL-1β, and IL-1 RA), granulocyte colony stimulating factor(G-CSF), granulocyte-macrophage colony stimulating factor (GM-CSF),oncostatin M, erythropoietin, leukemia inhibitory factor (LIF),interferons, B7.1 (also known as CD80), B7.2 (also known as B70, CD86),TNF family members (TNF-α, TNF-β, LT-β, CD40 ligand, Fas ligand, CD27ligand, CD30 ligand, 4-1BBL, Trail), and MIF.

“Store operated calcium entry” or “SOCE” refers to the mechanism bywhich release of calcium ions from intracellular stores is coordinatedwith ion influx across the plasma membrane.

“Selective inhibitor of SOC channel activity” means that the inhibitoris selective for SOC channels and does not substantially affect theactivity of other types of ion channels.

“Selective inhibitor of CRAC channel activity” means that the inhibitoris selective for CRAC channels and does not substantially affect theactivity of other types of ion channels and/or other SOC channels.

Monitoring or Assessing Effects on Intracellular Calcium

In monitoring or assessing the effect of a compound of Formula (I),(IA), (II), (IIA), (III), (IIIA), (IV), (IVA), (V), (VA), (VI), (VIA),(VII), or (VIIA) on intracellular calcium in any of thescreening/identification methods described herein or recognized in thefield, a direct or indirect evaluation or measurement of cellular(including cytosolic and intracellular organelle or compartment) calciumand/or movement of ions into, within or out of a cell, organelle,calcium store or portions thereof (e.g., a membrane) can be conducted. Avariety of methods are described herein and/or recognized in the fieldfor evaluating calcium levels and ion movements or flux. The particularmethod used and the conditions employed can depend on whether aparticular aspect of intracellular calcium is being monitored orassessed. For example, as described herein in some embodiments, reagentsand conditions are used, for specifically evaluating store-operatedcalcium entry, resting cytosolic calcium levels, calcium buffering andcalcium levels and uptake by or release from intracellular organellesand calcium stores. The effect of a compound of Formula (I), (IA), (II),(IIA), (III), (IIIA), (IV), (IVA), (V), (VA), (VI), (VIA), (VII), or(VIIA) on intracellular calcium can be monitored or assessed using, forexample, a cell, an intracellular organelle or calcium storagecompartment, a membrane (including, e.g., a detached membrane patch or alipid bilayer) or a cell-free assay system (e.g., outside-out membranevesicle). Generally, some aspect of intracellular calcium is monitoredor assessed in the presence of test agent and compared to a control,e.g., intracellular calcium in the absence of test agent.

Methods of Modulating Intracellular Calcium

Modulation of intracellular calcium can be any alteration or adjustmentin intracellular calcium including but not limited to alteration ofcalcium concentration or level in the cytoplasm and/or intracellularcalcium storage organelles, e.g., endoplasmic reticulum, alteration inthe movement of calcium into, out of and within a cell or intracellularcalcium store or organelle, alteration in the location of calcium withina cell, and alteration of the kinetics, or other properties, of calciumfluxes into, out of and within cells. In particular embodiments,intracellular calcium modulation can involve alteration or adjustment,e.g. reduction or inhibition, of store-operated calcium entry, cytosoliccalcium buffering, calcium levels in or movement of calcium into, out ofor within an intracellular calcium store or organelle, and/or basal orresting cytosolic calcium levels. In some embodiments, modulation ofintracellular calcium can involve an alteration or adjustment inreceptor-mediated ion (e.g., calcium) movement, secondmessenger-operated ion (e.g., calcium) movement, calcium influx into orefflux out of a cell, and/or ion (e.g., calcium) uptake into or releasefrom intracellular compartments, including, for example, endosomes andlysosomes.

In one aspect, compounds described herein modulate intracellularcalcium, such as but not limited to, modulation (e.g. reduction orinhibition) of SOC channel activity, such as inhibition of CRAC channelactivity (e g inhibition of I_(CRAC), inhibition of SOCE) in an immunesystem cell (e.g., a lymphocyte, white blood cell, T cell, B cell), afibroblast (or a cell derived from a fibroblast), or an epidermal,dermal or skin cell (e.g., a keratinocyte). The step of modulating oneor more proteins involved in modulating intracellular calcium (e.g. aSTIM protein and/or Orai protein) can involve, for example, reducing thelevel, expression of, an activity of, function of and/or molecularinteractions of a protein. For instance, if a cell exhibits an increasein calcium levels or lack of regulation of an aspect of intracellularcalcium modulation, e.g., store-operated calcium entry, then modulatingmay involve reducing the level of, expression of, an activity orfunction of, or a molecular interaction of a protein, e.g. a STIMprotein and/or Orai protein.

Examples of Pharmaceutical Compositions and Methods of Administration

Pharmaceutical compositions may be formulated in a conventional mannerusing one or more physiologically acceptable carriers includingexcipients and auxiliaries which facilitate processing of the activecompounds into preparations which can be used pharmaceutically. Properformulation is dependent upon the route of administration chosen.Additional details about suitable excipients for pharmaceuticalcompositions described herein may be found, for example, in Remington:The Science and Practice of Pharmacy, Nineteenth Ed (Easton, Pa.: MackPublishing Company, 1995); Hoover, John E., Remington's PharmaceuticalSciences, Mack Publishing Co., Easton, Pa. 1975; Liberman, H. A. andLachman, L., Eds., Pharmaceutical Dosage Forms, Marcel Decker, New York,N.Y., 1980; and Pharmaceutical Dosage Forms and Drug Delivery Systems,Seventh Ed. (Lippincott Williams & Wilkins 1999), herein incorporated byreference for such disclosure.

A pharmaceutical composition, as used herein, refers to a mixture of acompound of Formula (I), (IA), (II), (IIA), (III), (IIIA), (IV), (IVA),(V), (VA), (VI), (VIA), (VII), or (VIIA) described herein, with otherchemical components, such as carriers, stabilizers, diluents, dispersingagents, suspending agents, thickening agents, and/or excipients. Thepharmaceutical composition facilitates administration of the compound toan organism. In practicing the methods of treatment or use providedherein, therapeutically effective amounts of compounds described hereinare administered in a pharmaceutical composition to a mammal having adisease, disorder, or condition to be treated. In some embodiments, themammal is a human. A therapeutically effective amount can vary widelydepending on the severity of the disease, the age and relative health ofthe subject, the potency of the compound used and other factors. Thecompounds of Formula (I), (IA), (II), (IIA), (III), (IIIA), (IV), (IVA),(V), (VA), (VI), (VIA), (VII), or (VIIA) can be used singly or incombination with one or more therapeutic agents as components ofmixtures (as in combination therapy).

The pharmaceutical formulations described herein can be administered toa subject by multiple administration routes, including but not limitedto, oral, parenteral (e.g., intravenous, subcutaneous, intramuscular),intranasal, buccal, topical, rectal, or transdermal administrationroutes. Moreover, the pharmaceutical compositions described herein,which include a compound of Formula (I), (IA), (II), (IIA), (III),(IIIA), (IV), (IVA), (V), (VA), (VI), (VIA), (VII), or (VIIA) describedherein, can be formulated into any suitable dosage form, including butnot limited to, aqueous oral dispersions, liquids, gels, syrups,elixirs, slurries, suspensions, aerosols, controlled releaseformulations, fast melt formulations, effervescent formulations,lyophilized formulations, tablets, powders, pills, dragees, capsules,delayed release formulations, extended release formulations, pulsatilerelease formulations, multiparticulate formulations, and mixed immediaterelease and controlled release formulations.

One may administer the compounds and/or compositions in a local ratherthan systemic manner, for example, via injection of the compounddirectly into an organ or tissue, often in a depot preparation orsustained release formulation. Such long acting formulations may beadministered by implantation (for example subcutaneously orintramuscularly) or by intramuscular injection. Furthermore, one mayadminister the drug in a targeted drug delivery system, for example, ina liposome coated with organ-specific antibody. The liposomes will betargeted to and taken up selectively by the organ. In addition, the drugmay be provided in the form of a rapid release formulation, in the formof an extended release formulation, or in the form of an intermediaterelease formulation.

Pharmaceutical compositions including a compound described herein may bemanufactured in a conventional manner, such as, by way of example only,by means of conventional mixing, dissolving, granulating, dragee-making,levigating, emulsifying, encapsulating, entrapping or compressionprocesses.

The pharmaceutical compositions will include at least one compound ofFormula (I), (IA), (II), (IIA), (III), (IIIA), (IV), (IVA), (V), (VA),(VI), (VIA), (VII), or (VIIA) described herein, as an active ingredientin free-acid or free-base form, or in a pharmaceutically acceptable saltform. In addition, the methods and pharmaceutical compositions describedherein include the use of crystalline forms (also known as polymorphs),as well as active metabolites of these compounds having the same type ofactivity. In some situations, compounds may exist as tautomers. Alltautomers are included within the scope of the compounds presentedherein. Additionally, the compounds described herein can exist inunsolvated as well as solvated forms with pharmaceutically acceptablesolvents such as water, ethanol, and the like. The solvated forms of thecompounds presented herein are also considered to be disclosed herein.

In certain embodiments, compositions provided herein may also includeone or more preservatives to inhibit microbial activity. Suitablepreservatives include quaternary ammonium compounds such as benzalkoniumchloride, cetyltrimethylammonium bromide and cetylpyridinium chloride.

Pharmaceutical preparations for oral use can be obtained by mixing oneor more solid excipient with one or more of the compounds describedherein (e.g. compounds of Formula (I), (IA), (II), (HA), (III), (IIIA),(IV), (IVA), (V), (VA), (VI), (VIA), (VII), or (VIIA)), optionallygrinding the resulting mixture, and processing the mixture of granules,after adding suitable auxiliaries, if desired, to obtain tablets, pills,or capsules. Suitable excipients include, for example, fillers such assugars, including lactose, sucrose, mannitol, or sorbitol; cellulosepreparations such as, for example, maize starch, wheat starch, ricestarch, potato starch, gelatin, gum tragacanth, methylcellulose,microcrystalline cellulose, hydroxypropylmethylcellulose, sodiumcarboxymethylcellulose; or others such as: polyvinylpyrrolidone (PVP orpovidone) or calcium phosphate. If desired, disintegrating agents may beadded, such as the cross-linked croscarmellose sodium,polyvinylpyrrolidone, agar, or alginic acid or a salt thereof such assodium alginate.

Dragee cores are provided with suitable coatings. For this purpose,concentrated sugar solutions may be used, which may optionally containgum arabic, talc, polyvinylpyrrolidone, carbopol gel, polyethyleneglycol, and/or titanium dioxide, lacquer solutions, and suitable organicsolvents or solvent mixtures. Dyestuffs or pigments may be added to thetablets or dragee coatings for identification or to characterizedifferent combinations of active compound doses.

Pharmaceutical preparations that can be used orally include push-fitcapsules made of gelatin, as well as soft, sealed capsules made ofgelatin and a plasticizer, such as glycerol or sorbitol. The push-fitcapsules can contain the active ingredients in admixture with fillersuch as lactose, binders such as starches, and/or lubricants such astalc or magnesium stearate and, optionally, stabilizers. In softcapsules, the active compounds may be dissolved or suspended in suitableliquids, such as fatty oils, liquid paraffin, or liquid polyethyleneglycols. In addition, stabilizers may be added.

In some embodiments, the solid dosage forms disclosed herein may be inthe form of a tablet, (including a suspension tablet, a fast-melttablet, a bite-disintegration tablet, a rapid-disintegration tablet, aneffervescent tablet, or a caplet), a pill, a powder (including a sterilepackaged powder, a dispensable powder, or an effervescent powder), acapsule (including both soft or hard capsules, e.g., capsules made fromanimal-derived gelatin or plant-derived HPMC, or “sprinkle capsules”),solid dispersion, solid solution, bioerodible dosage form, controlledrelease formulations, pulsatile release dosage forms, multiparticulatedosage forms, pellets, granules, or an aerosol. In other embodiments,the pharmaceutical formulation is in the form of a powder. In stillother embodiments, the pharmaceutical formulation is in the form of atablet, including but not limited to, a fast-melt tablet. Additionally,pharmaceutical formulations of the compounds described herein may beadministered as a single capsule or in multiple capsule dosage form. Insome embodiments, the pharmaceutical formulation is administered in two,or three, or four, capsules or tablets.

In some embodiments, solid dosage forms, e.g., tablets, effervescenttablets, and capsules, are prepared by mixing particles of a compound ofFormula (I), (IA), (II), (IIA), (III), (IIIA), (IV), (IVA), (V), (VA),(VI), (VIA), (VII), or (VIIA) described herein, with one or morepharmaceutical excipients to form a bulk blend composition. Whenreferring to these bulk blend compositions as homogeneous, it is meantthat the particles of the compound of Formula (I), (IA), (II), (IIA),(III), (IIIA), (IV), (IVA), (V), (VA), (VI), (VIA), (VII), or (VIIA)described herein, are dispersed evenly throughout the composition sothat the composition may be subdivided into equally effective unitdosage forms, such as tablets, pills, and capsules. The individual unitdosages may also include film coatings, which disintegrate upon oralingestion or upon contact with diluent. These formulations can bemanufactured by conventional pharmacological techniques.

The pharmaceutical solid dosage forms described herein can include acompound of Formula (I), (IA), (II), (IIA), (III), (IIIA), (IV), (IVA),(V), (VA), (VI), (VIA), (VII), or (VIIA) described herein, and one ormore pharmaceutically acceptable additives such as a compatible carrier,binder, filling agent, suspending agent, flavoring agent, sweeteningagent, disintegrating agent, dispersing agent, surfactant, lubricant,colorant, diluent, solubilizer, moistening agent, plasticizer,stabilizer, penetration enhancer, wetting agent, anti-foaming agent,antioxidant, preservative, or one or more combination thereof. In stillother aspects, using standard coating procedures, such as thosedescribed in Remington's Pharmaceutical Sciences, 20th Edition (2000), afilm coating is provided around the formulation of the compounddescribed herein. In one embodiment, some or all of the particles of thecompound described herein are coated. In another embodiment, some or allof the particles of the compound described herein are microencapsulated.In still another embodiment, the particles of the compound describedherein are not microencapsulated and are uncoated.

Suitable carriers for use in the solid dosage forms described hereininclude, but are not limited to, acacia, gelatin, colloidal silicondioxide, calcium glycerophosphate, calcium lactate, maltodextrin,glycerine, magnesium silicate, sodium caseinate, soy lecithin, sodiumchloride, tricalcium phosphate, dipotassium phosphate, sodium stearoyllactylate, carrageenan, monoglyceride, diglyceride, pregelatinizedstarch, hydroxypropylmethylcellulose, hydroxypropylmethylcelluloseacetate stearate, sucrose, microcrystalline cellulose, lactose, mannitoland the like.

Suitable filling agents for use in the solid dosage forms describedherein include, but are not limited to, lactose, calcium carbonate,calcium phosphate, dibasic calcium phosphate, calcium sulfate,microcrystalline cellulose, cellulose powder, dextrose, dextrates,dextran, starches, pregelatinized starch, hydroxypropylmethycellulose(HPMC), hydroxypropylmethycellulose phthalate,hydroxypropylmethylcellulose acetate stearate (HPMCAS), sucrose,xylitol, lactitol, mannitol, sorbitol, sodium chloride, polyethyleneglycol, and the like.

In order to release the compound of Formula (I), (IA), (II), (IIA),(III), (IIIA), (IV), (IVA), (V), (VA), (VI), (VIA), (VII), or (VIIA)from a solid dosage form matrix as efficiently as possible,disintegrants are often used in the formulation, especially when thedosage forms are compressed with binder. Disintegrants help rupturingthe dosage form matrix by swelling or capillary action when moisture isabsorbed into the dosage form. Suitable disintegrants for use in thesolid dosage forms described herein include, but are not limited to,natural starch such as corn starch or potato starch, a pregelatinizedstarch such as National 1551 or Amijel®, or sodium starch glycolate suchas Promogel® or Explotab®, a cellulose such as a wood product,methylcrystalline cellulose, e.g., Avicel®, Avicel® PH101, Avicel®PH102, Avicel® PH105, Elcema® P100, Emcocel®, Vivacel®, Ming Tia®, andSolka-Floc®, methylcellulose, croscarmellose, or a cross-linkedcellulose, such as cross-linked sodium carboxymethylcellulose(Ac-Di-Sol®), cross-linked carboxymethylcellulose, or cross-linkedcroscarmellose, a cross-linked starch such as sodium starch glycolate, across-linked polymer such as crospovidone, a cross-linkedpolyvinylpyrrolidone, alginate such as alginic acid or a salt of alginicacid such as sodium alginate, a clay such as Veegum® HV (magnesiumaluminum silicate), a gum such as agar, guar, locust bean, Karaya,pectin, or tragacanth, sodium starch glycolate, bentonite, a naturalsponge, a surfactant, a resin such as a cation-exchange resin, citruspulp, sodium lauryl sulfate, sodium lauryl sulfate in combinationstarch, and the like.

Binders impart cohesiveness to solid oral dosage form formulations: forpowder filled capsule formulation, they aid in plug formation that canbe filled into soft or hard shell capsules and for tablet formulation,they ensure the tablet remaining intact after compression and helpassure blend uniformity prior to a compression or fill step. Materialssuitable for use as binders in the solid dosage forms described hereininclude, but are not limited to, carboxymethylcellulose, methylcellulose(e.g., Methocel®), hydroxypropylmethylcellulose (e.g. Hypromellose USPPharmacoat-603, hydroxypropylmethylcellulose acetate stearate (AqoateHS-LF and HS), hydroxyethylcellulose, hydroxypropylcellulose (e.g.,Klucel®), ethylcellulose (e.g., Ethocel®), and microcrystallinecellulose (e.g., Avicel®), microcrystalline dextrose, amylose, magnesiumaluminum silicate, polysaccharide acids, bentonites, gelatin,polyvinylpyrrolidone/vinyl acetate copolymer, crospovidone, povidone,starch, pregelatinized starch, tragacanth, dextrin, a sugar, such assucrose (e.g., Dipac®), glucose, dextrose, molasses, mannitol, sorbitol,xylitol (e.g., Xylitab®), lactose, a natural or synthetic gum such asacacia, tragacanth, ghatti gum, mucilage of isapol husks, starch,polyvinylpyrrolidone (e.g., Povidone® CL, Kollidon® C.L, Polyplasdone®XL-10, and Povidone® K-12), larch arabogalactan, Veegum®, polyethyleneglycol, waxes, sodium alginate, and the like.

In general, binder levels of 20-70% are used in powder-filled gelatincapsule formulations. Binder usage level in tablet formulations varieswhether direct compression, wet granulation, roller compaction, or usageof other excipients such as fillers which itself can act as moderatebinder. In some embodiments, formulators determine the binder level forthe formulations, but binder usage level of up to 70% in tabletformulations is common.

Suitable lubricants or glidants for use in the solid dosage formsdescribed herein include, but are not limited to, stearic acid, calciumhydroxide, talc, corn starch, sodium stearyl fumerate, alkali-metal andalkaline earth metal salts, such as aluminum, calcium, magnesium, zinc,stearic acid, sodium stearates, magnesium stearate, zinc stearate,waxes, Stearowet®, boric acid, sodium benzoate, sodium acetate, sodiumchloride, leucine, a polyethylene glycol or a methoxypolyethylene glycolsuch as Carbowax™, PEG 4000, PEG 5000, PEG 6000, propylene glycol,sodium oleate, glyceryl behenate, glyceryl palmitostearate, glycerylbenzoate, magnesium or sodium lauryl sulfate, and the like.

Suitable diluents for use in the solid dosage forms described hereininclude, but are not limited to, sugars (including lactose, sucrose, anddextrose), polysaccharides (including dextrates and maltodextrin),polyols (including mannitol, xylitol, and sorbitol), cyclodextrins andthe like.

Suitable wetting agents for use in the solid dosage forms describedherein include, for example, oleic acid, glyceryl monostearate, sorbitanmonooleate, sorbitan monolaurate, triethanolamine oleate,polyoxyethylene sorbitan monooleate, polyoxyethylene sorbitanmonolaurate, quaternary ammonium compounds (e.g., Polyquat 10®), sodiumoleate, sodium lauryl sulfate, magnesium stearate, sodium docusate,triacetin, vitamin E TPGS and the like.

Suitable surfactants for use in the solid dosage forms described hereininclude, for example, sodium lauryl sulfate, sorbitan monooleate,polyoxyethylene sorbitan monooleate, polysorbates, polaxomers, bilesalts, glyceryl monostearate, copolymers of ethylene oxide and propyleneoxide, e.g., Pluronic® (BASF), and the like.

Suitable suspending agents for use in the solid dosage forms describedhere include, but are not limited to, polyvinylpyrrolidone, e.g.,polyvinylpyrrolidone K12, polyvinylpyrrolidone K17, polyvinylpyrrolidoneK25, or polyvinylpyrrolidone K30, polyethylene glycol, e.g., thepolyethylene glycol can have a molecular weight of about 300 to about6000, or about 3350 to about 4000, or about 5400 to about 7000, vinylpyrrolidone/vinyl acetate copolymer (S630), sodiumcarboxymethylcellulose, methylcellulose, hydroxy-propylmethylcellulose,polysorbate-80, hydroxyethylcellulose, sodium alginate, gums, such as,e.g., gum tragacanth and gum acacia, guar gum, xanthans, includingxanthan gum, sugars, cellulosics, such as, e.g., sodiumcarboxymethylcellulose, methylcellulose, sodium carboxymethylcellulose,hydroxypropylmethylcellulose, hydroxyethylcellulose, polysorbate-80,sodium alginate, polyethoxylated sorbitan monolaurate, polyethoxylatedsorbitan monolaurate, povidone and the like.

Suitable antioxidants for use in the solid dosage forms described hereininclude, for example, e.g., butylated hydroxytoluene (BHT), sodiumascorbate, and tocopherol.

There is considerable overlap between additives used in the solid dosageforms described herein. Thus, the above-listed additives should be takenas merely exemplary, and not limiting, of the types of additives thatcan be included in solid dosage forms of the pharmaceutical compositionsdescribed herein.

In other embodiments, one or more layers of the pharmaceuticalformulation are plasticized. Illustratively, a plasticizer is generallya high boiling point solid or liquid. Suitable plasticizers can be addedfrom about 0.01% to about 50% by weight (w/w) of the coatingcomposition. Plasticizers include, but are not limited to, diethylphthalate, citrate esters, polyethylene glycol, glycerol, acetylatedglycerides, triacetin, polypropylene glycol, polyethylene glycol,triethyl citrate, dibutyl sebacate, stearic acid, stearol, stearate, andcastor oil.

Compressed tablets are solid dosage forms prepared by compacting thebulk blend of the formulations described above. In various embodiments,compressed tablets which are designed to dissolve in the mouth willinclude one or more flavoring agents. In other embodiments, thecompressed tablets will include a film surrounding the final compressedtablet. In some embodiments, the film coating can provide a delayedrelease of the compounds of Formula (I), (IA), (II), (IIA), (III),(IIIA), (IV), (IVA), (V), (VA), (VI), (VIA), (VII), or (VIIA) describedherein from the formulation. In other embodiments, the film coating aidsin patient compliance (e.g., Opadry® coatings or sugar coating). Filmcoatings including Opadry® typically range from about 1% to about 3% ofthe tablet weight. In other embodiments, the compressed tablets includeone or more excipients.

A capsule may be prepared, for example, by placing the bulk blend of theformulation of the compound described above, inside of a capsule. Insome embodiments, the formulations (non-aqueous suspensions andsolutions) are placed in a soft gelatin capsule. In other embodiments,the formulations are placed in standard gelatin capsules or non-gelatincapsules such as capsules comprising HPMC. In other embodiments, theformulation is placed in a sprinkle capsule, wherein the capsule may beswallowed whole or the capsule may be opened and the contents sprinkledon food prior to eating. In some embodiments, the therapeutic dose issplit into multiple (e.g., two, three, or four) capsules. In someembodiments, the entire dose of the formulation is delivered in acapsule form.

In various embodiments, the particles of the compound of Formula (I),(IA), (II), (IIA), (III), (IIIA), (IV), (IVA), (V), (VA), (VI), (VIA),(VII), or (VIIA) described herein and one or more excipients are dryblended and compressed into a mass, such as a tablet, having a hardnesssufficient to provide a pharmaceutical composition that substantiallydisintegrates within less than about 30 minutes, less than about 35minutes, less than about 40 minutes, less than about 45 minutes, lessthan about 50 minutes, less than about 55 minutes, or less than about 60minutes, after oral administration, thereby releasing the formulationinto the gastrointestinal fluid.

In another aspect, dosage forms may include microencapsulatedformulations. In some embodiments, one or more other compatiblematerials are present in the microencapsulation material. Exemplarymaterials include, but are not limited to, pH modifiers, erosionfacilitators, anti-foaming agents, antioxidants, flavoring agents, andcarrier materials such as binders, suspending agents, disintegrationagents, filling agents, surfactants, solubilizers, stabilizers,lubricants, wetting agents, and diluents.

Materials useful for the microencapsulation described herein includematerials compatible with compounds described herein, which sufficientlyisolate the compound from other non-compatible excipients. Materialscompatible with compounds described herein are those that delay therelease of the compounds of Formula (I), (IA), (II), (IIA), (III),(IIIA), (IV), (IVA), (V), (VA), (VI), (VIA), (VII), or (VIIA) in vivo.

Exemplary microencapsulation materials useful for delaying the releaseof the formulations including compounds described herein, include, butare not limited to, hydroxypropyl cellulose ethers (HPC) such as Klucel®or Nisso HPC, low-substituted hydroxypropyl cellulose ethers (L-HPC),hydroxypropyl methyl cellulose ethers (HPMC) such as Seppifilm-LC,Pharmacoat®, Metolose SR, Methocel®-E, Opadry YS, PrimaFlo, BenecelMP824, and Benecel MP843, methylcellulose polymers such as Methocel®-A,hydroxypropylmethylcellulose acetate stearate Aqoat (HF-LS, HF-LG,HF-MS)and Metolose®, Ethylcelluloses (EC) and mixtures thereof such as E461,Ethocel®, Aqualon®-EC, Surelease®, Polyvinyl alcohol (PVA) such asOpadry AMB, hydroxyethylcelluloses such as Natrosol®,carboxymethylcelluloses and salts of carboxymethylcelluloses (CMC) suchas Aqualon®-CMC, polyvinyl alcohol and polyethylene glycol co-polymerssuch as Kollicoat monoglycerides (Myverol), triglycerides (KLX),polyethylene glycols, modified food starch, acrylic polymers andmixtures of acrylic polymers with cellulose ethers such as Eudragit®EPO, Eudragit® L30D-55, Eudragit® FS 30D Eudragit® L100-55, Eudragit®L100, Eudragit® 5100, Eudragit® RD100, Eudragit® E100, Eudragit® L12.5,Eudragit® 512.5, Eudragit® NE30D, and Eudragit® NE 40D, celluloseacetate phthalate, sepifilms such as mixtures of HPMC and stearic acid,cyclodextrins, and mixtures of these materials.

In still other embodiments, plasticizers such as polyethylene glycols,e.g., PEG 300, PEG 400, PEG 600, PEG 1450, PEG 3350, and PEG 800,stearic acid, propylene glycol, oleic acid, and triacetin areincorporated into the microencapsulation material. In other embodiments,the microencapsulating material useful for delaying the release of thepharmaceutical compositions is from the USP or the National Formulary(NF). In yet other embodiments, the microencapsulation material isKlucel. In still other embodiments, the microencapsulation material ismethocel.

Microencapsulated compounds described herein may be formulated bymethods that include, e.g., spray drying processes, spinningdisk-solvent processes, hot melt processes, spray chilling methods,fluidized bed, electrostatic deposition, centrifugal extrusion,rotational suspension separation, polymerization at liquid-gas orsolid-gas interface, pressure extrusion, or spraying solvent extractionbath. In addition to these, several chemical techniques, e.g., complexcoacervation, solvent evaporation, polymer-polymer incompatibility,interfacial polymerization in liquid media, in situ polymerization,in-liquid drying, and desolvation in liquid media could also be used.Furthermore, other methods such as roller compaction,extrusion/spheronization, coacervation, or nanoparticle coating may alsobe used.

In still other embodiments, effervescent powders are also prepared inaccordance with the present disclosure. Effervescent salts have beenused to disperse medicines in water for oral administration.Effervescent salts are granules or coarse powders containing a medicinalagent in a dry mixture, usually composed of sodium bicarbonate, citricacid and/or tartaric acid. When such salts are added to water, the acidsand the base react to liberate carbon dioxide gas, thereby causing“effervescence.” Examples of effervescent salts include, e.g., thefollowing ingredients: sodium bicarbonate or a mixture of sodiumbicarbonate and sodium carbonate, citric acid and/or tartaric acid. Anyacid-base combination that results in the liberation of carbon dioxidecan be used in place of the combination of sodium bicarbonate and citricand tartaric acids, as long as the ingredients were suitable forpharmaceutical use and result in a pH of about 6.0 or higher.

In other embodiments, the formulations described herein, which include acompound described herein, are solid dispersions. Methods of producingsuch solid dispersions include, but are not limited to, for example,U.S. Pat. Nos. 4,343,789, 5,340,591, 5,456,923, 5,700,485, 5,723,269,and U.S. patent publication no. 2004/0013734. In still otherembodiments, the formulations described herein are solid solutions.Solid solutions incorporate a substance together with the active agentand other excipients such that heating the mixture results indissolution of the drug and the resulting composition is then cooled toprovide a solid blend which can be further formulated or directly addedto a capsule or compressed into a tablet. Methods of producing suchsolid solutions include, but are not limited to, for example, U.S. Pat.Nos. 4,151,273, 5,281,420, and 6,083,518.

The pharmaceutical solid oral dosage forms including formulationsdescribed herein, which include a compounds described herein, can befurther formulated to provide a controlled release of the compound ofFormula (I), (IA), (II), (IIA), (III), (IIIA), (IV), (IVA), (V), (VA),(VI), (VIA), (VII), or (VIIA). Controlled release refers to the releaseof the compounds described herein from a dosage form in which it isincorporated according to a desired profile over an extended period oftime. Controlled release profiles include, for example, sustainedrelease, prolonged release, pulsatile release, and delayed releaseprofiles. In contrast to immediate release compositions, controlledrelease compositions allow delivery of an agent to a subject over anextended period of time according to a predetermined profile. Suchrelease rates can provide therapeutically effective levels of agent foran extended period of time and thereby provide a longer period ofpharmacologic response while minimizing side effects as compared toconventional rapid release dosage forms. Such longer periods of responseprovide for many inherent benefits that are not achieved with thecorresponding short acting, immediate release preparations.

In some embodiments, the solid dosage forms described herein can beformulated as enteric coated delayed release oral dosage forms, i.e., asan oral dosage form of a pharmaceutical composition as described hereinwhich utilizes an enteric coating to affect release in the smallintestine of the gastrointestinal tract. The enteric coated dosage formmay be a compressed or molded or extruded tablet/mold (coated oruncoated) containing granules, powder, pellets, beads or particles ofthe active ingredient and/or other composition components, which arethemselves coated or uncoated. The enteric coated oral dosage form mayalso be a capsule (coated or uncoated) containing pellets, beads orgranules of the solid carrier or the composition, which are themselvescoated or uncoated.

The term “delayed release” as used herein refers to the delivery so thatthe release can be accomplished at some generally predictable locationin the intestinal tract more distal to that which would have beenaccomplished if there had been no delayed release alterations. In someembodiments the method for delay of release is coating. Any coatingsshould be applied to a sufficient thickness such that the entire coatingdoes not dissolve in the gastrointestinal fluids at pH below about 5,but does dissolve at pH about 5 and above. Coatings may be made from:

Acrylic polymers. The performance of acrylic polymers (primarily theirsolubility in biological fluids) can vary based on the degree and typeof substitution. Examples of suitable acrylic polymers includemethacrylic acid copolymers and ammonium methacrylate copolymers. TheEudragit series E, L, S, RL, RS and NE (Rohm Pharma) are available assolubilized in organic solvent, aqueous dispersion, or dry powders. TheEudragit series RL, NE, and RS are insoluble in the gastrointestinaltract but are permeable and are used primarily for colonic targeting.The Eudragit series E dissolve in the stomach. The Eudragit series L,L-30D and S are insoluble in stomach and dissolve in the intestine;

Cellulose Derivatives. Examples of suitable cellulose derivatives are:ethyl cellulose; reaction mixtures of partial acetate esters ofcellulose with phthalic anhydride. The performance can vary based on thedegree and type of substitution. Cellulose acetate phthalate (CAP)dissolves in pH>6. Aquateric (FMC) is an aqueous based system and is aspray dried CAP pseudolatex with particles<1 Other components inAquateric can include pluronics, Tweens, and acetylated monoglycerides.Other suitable cellulose derivatives include: cellulose acetatetrimellitate (Eastman); methylcellulose (Pharmacoat, Methocel);hydroxypropylmethyl cellulose phthalate (HPMCP); hydroxypropylmethylcellulose succinate (HPMCS); and hydroxypropylmethylcellulose acetatesuccinate (e.g., AQOAT (Shin Etsu)). The performance can vary based onthe degree and type of substitution. For example, HPMCP such as, HP-50,HP-55, HP-55S, HP-55F grades are suitable. The performance can varybased on the degree and type of substitution. For example, suitablegrades of hydroxypropylmethylcellulose acetate succinate include, butare not limited to, AS-LG (LF), which dissolves at pH 5, AS-MG (MF),which dissolves at pH 5.5, and AS-HG (HF), which dissolves at higher pH.These polymers are offered as granules, or as fine powders for aqueousdispersions;

Poly Vinyl Acetate Phthalate (PVAP). PVAP dissolves in pH>5, and it ismuch less permeable to water vapor and gastric fluids.

In some embodiments, the coating can, and usually does, contain aplasticizer and possibly other coating excipients such as colorants,talc, and/or magnesium stearate. Suitable plasticizers include triethylcitrate (Citroflex 2), triacetin (glyceryl triacetate), acetyl triethylcitrate (Citroflec A2), Carbowax 400 (polyethylene glycol 400), diethylphthalate, tributyl citrate, acetylated monoglycerides, glycerol, fattyacid esters, propylene glycol, and dibutyl phthalate. In particular,anionic carboxylic acrylic polymers usually will contain 10-25% byweight of a plasticizer, especially dibutyl phthalate, polyethyleneglycol, triethyl citrate and triacetin. Conventional coating techniquessuch as spray or pan coating are employed to apply coatings. The coatingthickness must be sufficient to ensure that the oral dosage form remainsintact until the desired site of topical delivery in the intestinaltract is reached.

Colorants, detackifiers, surfactants, antifoaming agents, lubricants(e.g., carnuba wax or PEG) may be added to the coatings besidesplasticizers to solubilize or disperse the coating material, and toimprove coating performance and the coated product.

In other embodiments, the formulations described herein, which include acompound of Formula (I), (IA), (II), (IIA), (III), (IIIA), (IV), (IVA),(V), (VA), (VI), (VIA), (VII), or (VIIA) described herein, are deliveredusing a pulsatile dosage form. A pulsatile dosage form is capable ofproviding one or more immediate release pulses at predetermined timepoints after a controlled lag time or at specific sites. Pulsatiledosage forms may be administered using a variety of pulsatileformulations including, but are not limited to, those described in U.S.Pat. Nos. 5,011,692; 5,017,381; 5,229,135; 5,840,329; 4,871,549;5,260,068; 5,260,069; 5,508,040; 5,567,441 and 5,837,284.

Many other types of controlled release systems are suitable for use withthe formulations described herein. Examples of such delivery systemsinclude, e.g., polymer-based systems, such as polylactic andpolyglycolic acid, polyanhydrides and polycaprolactone; porous matrices,nonpolymer-based systems that are lipids, including sterols, such ascholesterol, cholesterol esters and fatty acids, or neutral fats, suchas mono-, di- and triglycerides; hydrogel release systems; silasticsystems; peptide-based systems; wax coatings, bioerodible dosage forms,compressed tablets using conventional binders and the like. See, e.g.,Liberman et al., Pharmaceutical Dosage Forms, 2 Ed., Vol. 1, pp. 209-214(1990); Singh et al., Encyclopedia of Pharmaceutical Technology, 2ndEd., pp. 751-753 (2002); U.S. Pat. Nos. 4,327,725; 4,624,848; 4,968,509;5,461,140; 5,456,923; 5,516,527; 5,622,721; 5,686,105; 5,700,410;5,977,175; 6,465,014; and 6,932,983.

In some embodiments, pharmaceutical formulations are provided thatinclude particles of the compounds described herein, e.g. compounds ofFormula (I), (IA), (II), (IIA), (III), (IIIA), (IV), (IVA), (V), (VA),(VI), (VIA), (VII), or (VIIA), and at least one dispersing agent orsuspending agent for oral administration to a subject. The formulationsmay be a powder and/or granules for suspension, and upon admixture withwater, a substantially uniform suspension is obtained.

Liquid formulation dosage forms for oral administration can be aqueoussuspensions selected from the group including, but not limited to,pharmaceutically acceptable aqueous oral dispersions, emulsions,solutions, elixirs, gels, and syrups. See, e.g., Singh et al.,Encyclopedia of Pharmaceutical Technology, 2nd Ed., pp. 754-757 (2002).

The aqueous suspensions and dispersions described herein can remain in ahomogenous state, as defined in The USP Pharmacists' Pharmacopeia (2005edition, chapter 905), for at least 4 hours. The homogeneity should bedetermined by a sampling method consistent with regard to determininghomogeneity of the entire composition. In one embodiment, an aqueoussuspension can be re-suspended into a homogenous suspension by physicalagitation lasting less than 1 minute. In another embodiment, an aqueoussuspension can be re-suspended into a homogenous suspension by physicalagitation lasting less than 45 seconds. In yet another embodiment, anaqueous suspension can be re-suspended into a homogenous suspension byphysical agitation lasting less than 30 seconds. In still anotherembodiment, no agitation is necessary to maintain a homogeneous aqueousdispersion.

The pharmaceutical compositions described herein may include sweeteningagents such as, but not limited to, acacia syrup, acesulfame K, alitame,anise, apple, aspartame, banana, Bavarian cream, berry, black currant,butterscotch, calcium citrate, camphor, caramel, cherry, cherry cream,chocolate, cinnamon, bubble gum, citrus, citrus punch, citrus cream,cotton candy, cocoa, cola, cool cherry, cool citrus, cyclamate,cylamate, dextrose, eucalyptus, eugenol, fructose, fruit punch, ginger,glycyrrhetinate, glycyrrhiza (licorice) syrup, grape, grapefruit, honey,isomalt, lemon, lime, lemon cream, monoammonium glyrrhizinate(MagnaSweet®), maltol, mannitol, maple, marshmallow, menthol, mintcream, mixed berry, neohesperidine DC, neotame, orange, pear, peach,peppermint, peppermint cream, Prosweet® Powder, raspberry, root beer,rum, saccharin, safrole, sorbitol, spearmint, spearmint cream,strawberry, strawberry cream, stevia, sucralose, sucrose, sodiumsaccharin, saccharin, aspartame, acesulfame potassium, mannitol, talin,sucralose, sorbitol, swiss cream, tagatose, tangerine, thaumatin, tuttifruitti, vanilla, walnut, watermelon, wild cherry, wintergreen, xylitol,or any combination of these flavoring ingredients, e.g., anise-menthol,cherry-anise, cinnamon-orange, cherry-cinnamon, chocolate-mint,honey-lemon, lemon-lime, lemon-mint, menthol-eucalyptus, orange-cream,vanilla-mint, and mixtures thereof.

In some embodiments, the pharmaceutical formulations described hereincan be self-emulsifying drug delivery systems (SEDDS). Emulsions aredispersions of one immiscible phase in another, usually in the form ofdroplets. Generally, emulsions are created by vigorous mechanicaldispersion. SEDDS, as opposed to emulsions or microemulsions,spontaneously form emulsions when added to an excess of water withoutany external mechanical dispersion or agitation. An advantage of SEDDSis that only gentle mixing is required to distribute the dropletsthroughout the solution. Additionally, water or the aqueous phase can beadded just prior to administration, which ensures stability of anunstable or hydrophobic active ingredient. Thus, the SEDDS provides aneffective delivery system for oral and parenteral delivery ofhydrophobic active ingredients. SEDDS may provide improvements in thebioavailability of hydrophobic active ingredients. Methods of producingself-emulsifying dosage forms include, but are not limited to, forexample, U.S. Pat. Nos. 5,858,401, 6,667,048, and 6,960,563.

There is overlap between the above-listed additives used in the aqueousdispersions or suspensions described herein, since a given additive isoften classified differently by different practitioners in the field, oris commonly used for any of several different functions. Thus, theabove-listed additives should be taken as merely exemplary, and notlimiting, of the types of additives that can be included in formulationsdescribed herein.

Potential excipients for intranasal formulations include, for example,U.S. Pat. Nos. 4,476,116, 5,116,817 and 6,391,452. Formulationssolutions in saline, employing benzyl alcohol or other suitablepreservatives, fluorocarbons, and/or other solubilizing or dispersingagents. See, for example, Ansel, H. C. et al., Pharmaceutical DosageForms and Drug Delivery Systems, Sixth Ed. (1995). Preferably thesecompositions and formulations are prepared with suitable nontoxicpharmaceutically acceptable ingredients. The choice of suitable carriersis highly dependent upon the exact nature of the nasal dosage formdesired, e.g., solutions, suspensions, ointments, or gels. Nasal dosageforms generally contain large amounts of water in addition to the activeingredient. Minor amounts of other ingredients such as pH adjusters,emulsifiers or dispersing agents, preservatives, surfactants, gellingagents, or buffering and other stabilizing and solubilizing agents mayalso be present. Preferably, the nasal dosage form should be isotonicwith nasal secretions.

For administration by inhalation, the compounds described herein may bein a form as an aerosol, a mist or a powder. Pharmaceutical compositionsdescribed herein are conveniently delivered in the form of an aerosolspray presentation from pressurized packs or a nebuliser, with the useof a suitable propellant, e.g., dichlorodifluoromethane,trichlorofluoromethane, dichlorotetrafluoroethane, carbon dioxide orother suitable gas. In the case of a pressurized aerosol, the dosageunit may be determined by providing a valve to deliver a metered amount.Capsules and cartridges of, such as, by way of example only, gelatin foruse in an inhaler or insufflator may be formulated containing a powdermix of the compound described herein and a suitable powder base such aslactose or starch.

Buccal formulations that include compounds described herein may beadministered using a variety of formulations which include, but are notlimited to, U.S. Pat. Nos. 4,229,447, 4,596,795, 4,755,386, and5,739,136. In addition, the buccal dosage forms described herein canfurther include a bioerodible (hydrolysable) polymeric carrier that alsoserves to adhere the dosage form to the buccal mucosa. The buccal dosageform is fabricated so as to erode gradually over a predetermined timeperiod, wherein the delivery of the compound is provided essentiallythroughout. Buccal drug delivery avoids the disadvantages encounteredwith oral drug administration, e.g., slow absorption, degradation of theactive agent by fluids present in the gastrointestinal tract and/orfirst-pass inactivation in the liver. With regard to the bioerodible(hydrolysable) polymeric carrier, virtually any such carrier can beused, so long as the desired drug release profile is not compromised,and the carrier is compatible with the compounds described herein, andany other components that may be present in the buccal dosage unit.Generally, the polymeric carrier comprises hydrophilic (water-solubleand water-swellable) polymers that adhere to the wet surface of thebuccal mucosa. Examples of polymeric carriers useful herein includeacrylic acid polymers and co, e.g., those known as “carbomers”(Carbopol®, which may be obtained from B.F. Goodrich, is one suchpolymer). Other components may also be incorporated into the buccaldosage forms described herein include, but are not limited to,disintegrants, diluents, binders, lubricants, flavoring, colorants,preservatives, and the like. For buccal or sublingual administration,the compositions may take the form of tablets, lozenges, or gelsformulated in a conventional manner.

Transdermal formulations described herein may be administered using avariety of devices including but not limited to, U.S. Pat. Nos.3,598,122, 3,598,123, 3,710,795, 3,731,683, 3,742,951, 3,814,097,3,921,636, 3,972,995, 3,993,072, 3,993,073, 3,996,934, 4,031,894,4,060,084, 4,069,307, 4,077,407, 4,201,211, 4,230,105, 4,292,299,4,292,303, 5,336,168, 5,665,378, 5,837,280, 5,869,090, 6,923,983,6,929,801 and 6,946,144.

The transdermal dosage forms described herein may incorporate certainpharmaceutically acceptable excipients which are conventional in theart. In one embodiment, the transdermal formulations described hereininclude at least three components: (1) a formulation of a compound ofFormula (I), (IA), (II), (IIA), (III), (IIIA), (IV), (IVA), (V), (VA),(VI), (VIA), (VII), or (VIIA); (2) a penetration enhancer; and (3) anaqueous adjuvant. In addition, transdermal formulations can includeadditional components such as, but not limited to, gelling agents,creams and ointment bases, and the like. In some embodiments, thetransdermal formulation can further include a woven or non-woven backingmaterial to enhance absorption and prevent the removal of thetransdermal formulation from the skin. In other embodiments, thetransdermal formulations described herein can maintain a saturated orsupersaturated state to promote diffusion into the skin.

Formulations suitable for transdermal administration of compoundsdescribed herein may employ transdermal delivery devices and transdermaldelivery patches and can be lipophilic emulsions or buffered, aqueoussolutions, dissolved and/or dispersed in a polymer or an adhesive. Suchpatches may be constructed for continuous, pulsatile, or on demanddelivery of pharmaceutical agents. Still further, transdermal deliveryof the compounds described herein can be accomplished by means ofiontophoretic patches and the like. Additionally, transdermal patchescan provide controlled delivery of the compounds described herein. Therate of absorption can be slowed by using rate-controlling membranes orby trapping the compound within a polymer matrix or gel. Conversely,absorption enhancers can be used to increase absorption. An absorptionenhancer or carrier can include absorbable pharmaceutically acceptablesolvents to assist passage through the skin. For example, transdermaldevices are in the form of a bandage comprising a backing member, areservoir containing the compound optionally with carriers, optionally arate controlling barrier to deliver the compound to the skin of the hostat a controlled and predetermined rate over a prolonged period of time,and means to secure the device to the skin.

Formulations suitable for intramuscular, subcutaneous, or intravenousinjection may include physiologically acceptable sterile aqueous ornon-aqueous solutions, dispersions, suspensions or emulsions, andsterile powders for reconstitution into sterile injectable solutions ordispersions. Examples of suitable aqueous and non-aqueous carriers,diluents, solvents, or vehicles including water, ethanol, polyols(propyleneglycol, polyethylene-glycol, glycerol, cremophor and thelike), suitable mixtures thereof, vegetable oils (such as olive oil) andinjectable organic esters such as ethyl oleate. Proper fluidity can bemaintained, for example, by the use of a coating such as lecithin, bythe maintenance of the required particle size in the case ofdispersions, and by the use of surfactants. Formulations suitable forsubcutaneous injection may also contain additives such as preserving,wetting, emulsifying, and dispensing agents. Prevention of the growth ofmicroorganisms can be ensured by various antibacterial and antifungalagents, such as parabens, chlorobutanol, phenol, sorbic acid, and thelike. It may also be desirable to include isotonic agents, such assugars, sodium chloride, and the like. Prolonged absorption of theinjectable pharmaceutical form can be brought about by the use of agentsdelaying absorption, such as aluminum monostearate and gelatin.

For intravenous injections, compounds described herein may be formulatedin aqueous solutions, preferably in physiologically compatible bufferssuch as Hank's solution, Ringer's solution, or physiological salinebuffer. For transmucosal administration, penetrants appropriate to thebarrier to be permeated are used in the formulation. Such penetrants aregenerally recognized in the field. For other parenteral injections,appropriate formulations may include aqueous or nonaqueous solutions,preferably with physiologically compatible buffers or excipients. Suchexcipients are generally recognized in the field.

Parenteral injections may involve bolus injection or continuousinfusion. Formulations for injection may be presented in unit dosageform, e.g., in ampoules or in multi-dose containers, with an addedpreservative. The pharmaceutical composition described herein may be ina form suitable for parenteral injection as a sterile suspensions,solutions or emulsions in oily or aqueous vehicles, and may containformulatory agents such as suspending, stabilizing and/or dispersingagents. Pharmaceutical formulations for parenteral administrationinclude aqueous solutions of the active compounds in water-soluble form.Additionally, suspensions of the active compounds may be prepared asappropriate oily injection suspensions. Suitable lipophilic solvents orvehicles include fatty oils such as sesame oil, or synthetic fatty acidesters, such as ethyl oleate or triglycerides, or liposomes. Aqueousinjection suspensions may contain substances which increase theviscosity of the suspension, such as sodium carboxymethyl cellulose,sorbitol, or dextran. Optionally, the suspension may also containsuitable stabilizers or agents which increase the solubility of thecompounds to allow for the preparation of highly concentrated solutions.Alternatively, the active ingredient may be in powder form forconstitution with a suitable vehicle, e.g., sterile pyrogen-free water,before use.

In certain embodiments, delivery systems for pharmaceutical compoundsmay be employed, such as, for example, liposomes and emulsions. Incertain embodiments, compositions provided herein also include anmucoadhesive polymer, selected from among, for example,carboxymethylcellulose, carbomer (acrylic acid polymer),poly(methylmethacrylate), polyacrylamide, polycarbophil, acrylicacid/butyl acrylate copolymer, sodium alginate and dextran.

In some embodiments, the compounds described herein may be administeredtopically and are formulated into a variety of topically administrablecompositions, such as solutions, suspensions, lotions, gels, pastes,medicated sticks, balms, creams or ointments. Such pharmaceuticalcompounds can contain solubilizers, stabilizers, tonicity enhancingagents, buffers and preservatives.

The compounds described herein may also be formulated in rectalcompositions such as enemas, rectal gels, rectal foams, rectal aerosols,suppositories, jelly suppositories, or retention enemas, containingconventional suppository bases such as cocoa butter or other glycerides,as well as synthetic polymers such as polyvinylpyrrolidone, PEG, and thelike. In suppository forms of the compositions, a low-melting wax suchas, but not limited to, a mixture of fatty acid glycerides, optionallyin combination with cocoa butter is first melted.

Generally, an agent, such as a compound of Formula (I), (IA), (II),(IIA), (III), (IIIA), (IV), (IVA), (V), (VA), (VI), (VIA), (VII), or(VIIA) is administered in an amount effective for amelioration of, orprevention of the development of symptoms of, the disease or disorder(i.e., a therapeutically effective amount). Thus, a therapeuticallyeffective amount can be an amount that is capable of at least partiallypreventing or reversing a disease or disorder. The dose required toobtain an effective amount may vary depending on the agent, formulation,disease or disorder, and individual to whom the agent is administered.

Determination of effective amounts may also involve in vitro assays inwhich varying doses of agent are administered to cells in culture andthe concentration of agent effective for ameliorating some or allsymptoms is determined in order to calculate the concentration requiredin vivo. Effective amounts may also be based in in vivo animal studies.

An agent can be administered prior to, concurrently with and subsequentto the appearance of symptoms of a disease or disorder. In someembodiments, an agent is administered to a subject with a family historyof the disease or disorder, or who has a phenotype that may indicate apredisposition to a disease or disorder, or who has a genotype whichpredisposes the subject to the disease or disorder.

The particular delivery system used can depend on a number of factors,including, for example, the intended target and the route ofadministration, e.g., local or systemic. Targets for delivery can bespecific cells which are causing or contributing to a disease ordisorder, including, for example, cells that have altered intracellularcalcium or calcium dysregulation or dyshomeostasis, and cells that donot have altered intracellular calcium but that may have somealteration, defect or deficiency that can be, at least in part,compensated, counteracted, reversed or alleviated or eliminated byaltering intracellular calcium of the cell. Particular cells include,for example, immune cells (e.g., lymphocytes, T cells, B cells, whiteblood cells), fibroblasts (or cells derived from a fibroblast),epidermal, dermal or skin cells (e.g., a keratinocytes), blood cells,kidney or renal cells (e.g., mesangial cells), muscle cells (e.g., asmooth muscle cell such as an airway (tracheal or bronchial) smoothmuscle cell) and exocrine or secretory (e.g., salivary, includingparotid acinar and submandibular gland) cells. For example, a targetcell can be resident or infiltrating cells in the lungs or airways thatcontribute to an asthmatic illness or disease, resident or infiltratingcells in the nervous system contributing to a neurological,neurodegenerative or demyelinating disease or disorder, resident orinfiltrating cells involved in rejection of a kidney graft, graftedcells that when activated lead to graft-versus-host disease, resident orinfiltrating cells involved in rejection of a kidney graft, resident orinfiltrating cells, activation of which contributes to inflammation,e.g., in arthritis, resident or infiltrating cells in the kidney orrenal system (e.g., mesangial cells) involved in neuropathy andglomerulonephritis and resident or infiltrating cells in exocrine glands(e.g., salivary and lacrimal glands) involved in autoimmune disorders(e.g., Sjogren's disease). Administration of an agent can be directed toone or more cell types or subsets of a cell type by methods recognizedin the field. For example, an agent can be coupled to an antibody,ligand to a cell surface receptor or a toxin, or can be contained in aparticle that is selectively internalized into cells, e.g., liposomes ora virus in which the viral receptor binds specifically to a certain celltype, or a viral particle lacking the viral nucleic acid, or can beadministered locally.

Examples of Methods of Dosing and Treatment Regimens

The compounds described herein can be used in the preparation ofmedicaments for the modulation of intracellular calcium, or for thetreatment of diseases or conditions that would benefit, at least inpart, from modulation of intracellular calcium. In addition, a methodfor treating any of the diseases or conditions described herein in asubject in need of such treatment, involves administration ofpharmaceutical compositions containing at least one compound describedherein, or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, pharmaceuticallyacceptable prodrug, or pharmaceutically acceptable solvate thereof, intherapeutically effective amounts to said subject.

The compositions containing the compound(s) described herein can beadministered for prophylactic and/or therapeutic treatments. Intherapeutic applications, the compositions are administered to a patientalready suffering from a disease or condition, in an amount sufficientto cure or at least partially arrest the symptoms of the disease orcondition. Amounts effective for this use will depend on the severityand course of the disease or condition, previous therapy, the patient'shealth status, weight, and response to the drugs, and the judgment ofthe treating physician.

In prophylactic applications, compositions containing the compoundsdescribed herein are administered to a patient susceptible to orotherwise at risk of a particular disease, disorder or condition. Suchan amount is defined to be a “prophylactically effective amount ordose.” In this use, the precise amounts also depend on the patient'sstate of health, weight, and the like. When used in a patient, effectiveamounts for this use will depend on the severity and course of thedisease, disorder or condition, previous therapy, the patient's healthstatus and response to the drugs, and the judgment of the treatingphysician.

In the case wherein the patient's condition does not improve, upon thedoctor's discretion the administration of the compounds may beadministered chronically, that is, for an extended period of time,including throughout the duration of the patient's life in order toameliorate or otherwise control or limit the symptoms of the patient'sdisease or condition.

In the case wherein the patient's status does improve, upon the doctor'sdiscretion the administration of the compounds may be givencontinuously; alternatively, the dose of drug being administered may betemporarily reduced or temporarily suspended for a certain length oftime (i.e., a “drug holiday”). The length of the drug holiday can varybetween 2 days and 1 year, including by way of example only, 2 days, 3days, 4 days, 5 days, 6 days, 7 days, 10 days, 12 days, 15 days, 20days, 28 days, 35 days, 50 days, 70 days, 100 days, 120 days, 150 days,180 days, 200 days, 250 days, 280 days, 300 days, 320 days, 350 days, or365 days. The dose reduction during a drug holiday may be from about 10%to about 100%, including, by way of example only, about 10%, about 15%,about 20%, about 25%, about 30%, about 35%, about 40%, about 45%, about50%, about 55%, about 60%, about 65%, about 70%, about 75%, about 80%,about 85%, about 90%, about 95%, or about 100%.

Once improvement of the patient's conditions has occurred, a maintenancedose is administered if necessary. Subsequently, the dosage or thefrequency of administration, or both, can be reduced, as a function ofthe symptoms, to a level at which the improved disease, disorder orcondition is retained. Patients can, however, require intermittenttreatment on a long-term basis upon any recurrence of symptoms.

The amount of a given agent that will correspond to such an amount willvary depending upon factors such as the particular compound, disease orcondition and its severity, the identity (e.g., weight) of the subjector host in need of treatment, but can nevertheless be determined in amanner recognized in the field according to the particular circumstancessurrounding the case, including, e.g., the specific agent beingadministered, the route of administration, the condition being treated,and the subject or host being treated. In general, however, dosesemployed for adult human treatment will typically be in the range ofabout 0.02-about 5000 mg per day, in some embodiments, about 1-about1500 mg per day. The desired dose may conveniently be presented in asingle dose or as divided doses administered simultaneously (or over ashort period of time) or at appropriate intervals, for example as two,three, four or more sub-doses per day.

The pharmaceutical composition described herein may be in unit dosageforms suitable for single administration of precise dosages. In unitdosage form, the formulation is divided into unit doses containingappropriate quantities of one or more compound. The unit dosage may bein the form of a package containing discrete quantities of theformulation. Non-limiting examples are packaged tablets or capsules, andpowders in vials or ampoules. Aqueous suspension compositions can bepackaged in single-dose non-reclosable containers. Alternatively,multiple-dose reclosable containers can be used, in which case it istypical to include a preservative in the composition. By way of exampleonly, formulations for parenteral injection may be presented in unitdosage form, which include, but are not limited to ampoules, or inmulti-dose containers, with an added preservative.

The daily dosages appropriate for the compounds described hereindescribed herein are from about 0.01 mg/kg to about 20 mg/kg. In oneembodiment, the daily dosages are from about 0.1 mg/kg to about 10mg/kg. An indicated daily dosage in the larger mammal, including, butnot limited to, humans, is in the range from about 0.5 mg to about 1000mg, conveniently administered in a single dose or in divided doses,including, but not limited to, up to four times a day or in extendedrelease form. Suitable unit dosage forms for oral administration includefrom about 1 to about 500 mg active ingredient. In one embodiment, theunit dosage is about 1 mg, about 5 mg, about, 10 mg, about 20 mg, about50 mg, about 100 mg, about 200 mg, about 250 mg, about 400 mg, or about500 mg. The foregoing ranges are merely suggestive, as the number ofvariables in regard to an individual treatment regime is large, andconsiderable excursions from these recommended values are not uncommonSuch dosages may be altered depending on a number of variables, notlimited to the activity of the compound used, the disease or conditionto be treated, the mode of administration, the requirements of theindividual subject, the severity of the disease or condition beingtreated, and the judgment of the practitioner.

Toxicity and therapeutic efficacy of such therapeutic regimens can bedetermined by standard pharmaceutical procedures in cell cultures orexperimental animals, including, but not limited to, the determinationof the LD₅₀ (the dose lethal to 50% of the population) and the ED₅₀ (thedose therapeutically effective in 50% of the population). The dose ratiobetween the toxic and therapeutic effects is the therapeutic index andit can be expressed as the ratio between LD₅₀ and ED₅₀. Compoundsexhibiting high therapeutic indices are preferred. The data obtainedfrom cell culture assays and animal studies can be used in formulating arange of dosage for use in human. The dosage of such compounds liespreferably within a range of circulating concentrations that include theED₅₀ with minimal toxicity. The dosage may vary within this rangedepending upon the dosage form employed and the route of administrationutilized.

Combination Treatments

The compounds of Formula (I), (IA), (II), (IIA), (III), (IIIA), (IV),(IVA), (V), (VA), (VI), (VIA), (VII), or (VIIA), and compositionsthereof, may also be used in combination with other therapeutic agentsthat are selected for their therapeutic value for the condition to betreated. In general, the compositions described herein and, inembodiments where combinational therapy is employed, other agents do nothave to be administered in the same pharmaceutical composition, and may,because of different physical and chemical characteristics, have to beadministered by different routes. The determination of the mode ofadministration and the advisability of administration, where possible,in the same pharmaceutical composition, is well within the knowledge ofthe clinician. The initial administration can be made according toestablished protocols recognized in the field, and then, based upon theobserved effects, the dosage, modes of administration and times ofadministration can be modified by the clinician.

In certain instances, it may be appropriate to administer at least onecompound described herein in combination with another therapeutic agent.By way of example only, if one of the side effects experienced by apatient upon receiving one of the compounds herein, such as a compoundof Formula (I), (IA), (II), (IIA), (III), (IIIA), (IV), (IVA), (V),(VA), (VI), (VIA), (VII), or (VIIA), is nausea, then it may beappropriate to administer an anti-nausea agent in combination with theinitial therapeutic agent. Or, by way of example only, the therapeuticeffectiveness of one of the compounds described herein may be enhancedby administration of an adjuvant (i.e., by itself the adjuvant may haveminimal therapeutic benefit, but in combination with another therapeuticagent, the overall therapeutic benefit to the patient is enhanced). Or,by way of example only, the benefit experienced by a patient may beincreased by administering one of the compounds described herein withanother therapeutic agent (which also includes a therapeutic regimen)that also has therapeutic benefit. In any case, regardless of thedisease, disorder or condition being treated, the overall benefitexperienced by the patient may simply be additive of the two therapeuticagents or the patient may experience a synergistic benefit.

The particular choice of compounds used will depend upon the diagnosisof the attending physicians and their judgment of the condition of thepatient and the appropriate treatment protocol. The compounds may beadministered concurrently (e.g., simultaneously, essentiallysimultaneously or within the same treatment protocol) or sequentially,depending upon the nature of the disease, disorder, or condition, thecondition of the patient, and the actual choice of compounds used. Thedetermination of the order of administration, and the number ofrepetitions of administration of each therapeutic agent during atreatment protocol, is well within the knowledge of the physician afterevaluation of the disease being treated and the condition of thepatient.

Therapeutically-effective dosages can vary when the drugs are used intreatment combinations. Methods for experimentally determiningtherapeutically-effective dosages of drugs and other agents for use incombination treatment regimens are described in the literature. Forexample, the use of metronomic dosing, i.e., providing more frequent,lower doses in order to minimize toxic side effects, has been describedextensively in the literature Combination treatment further includesperiodic treatments that start and stop at various times to assist withthe clinical management of the patient.

For combination therapies described herein, dosages of theco-administered compounds will of course vary depending on the type ofco-drug employed, on the specific drug employed, on the disease orcondition being treated and so forth. In addition, when co-administeredwith one or more biologically active agents, the compound providedherein may be administered either simultaneously with the biologicallyactive agent(s), or sequentially. If administered sequentially, theattending physician will decide on the appropriate sequence ofadministering protein in combination with the biologically activeagent(s).

In any case, the multiple therapeutic agents (one of which is a compoundof Formula (I), (IA), (II), (IIA), (III), (IIIA), (IV), (IVA), (V),(VA), (VI), (VIA), (VII), or (VIIA) described herein) may beadministered in any order or even simultaneously. If simultaneously, themultiple therapeutic agents may be provided in a single, unified form,or in multiple forms (by way of example only, either as a single pill oras two separate pills). One of the therapeutic agents may be given inmultiple doses, or both may be given as multiple doses. If notsimultaneous, the timing between the multiple doses may vary from morethan zero weeks to less than four weeks. In addition, the combinationmethods, compositions and formulations are not to be limited to the useof only two agents; the use of multiple therapeutic combinations arealso envisioned.

It is understood that the dosage regimen to treat, prevent, orameliorate the condition(s) for which relief is sought, can be modifiedin accordance with a variety of factors. These factors include thedisorder or condition from which the subject suffers, as well as theage, weight, sex, diet, and medical condition of the subject. Thus, thedosage regimen actually employed can vary widely and therefore candeviate from the dosage regimens set forth herein.

The pharmaceutical agents which make up the combination therapydisclosed herein may be a combined dosage form or in separate dosageforms intended for substantially simultaneous administration. Thepharmaceutical agents that make up the combination therapy may also beadministered sequentially, with either therapeutic compound beingadministered by a regimen calling for two-step administration. Thetwo-step administration regimen may call for sequential administrationof the active agents or spaced-apart administration of the separateactive agents. The time period between the multiple administration stepsmay range from, a few minutes to several hours, depending upon theproperties of each pharmaceutical agent, such as potency, solubility,bioavailability, plasma half-life and kinetic profile of thepharmaceutical agent. Circadian variation of the target moleculeconcentration may also determine the optimal dose interval.

In addition, the compounds described herein also may be used incombination with procedures that may provide additional or synergisticbenefit to the patient. By way of example only, patients are expected tofind therapeutic and/or prophylactic benefit in the methods describedherein, wherein pharmaceutical composition of a compound disclosedherein and/or combinations with other therapeutics are combined withgenetic testing to determine whether that individual is a carrier of amutant gene that is known to be correlated with certain diseases orconditions.

The compounds described herein and combination therapies can beadministered before, during or after the occurrence of a disease orcondition, and the timing of administering the composition containing acompound can vary. Thus, for example, the compounds can be used as aprophylactic and can be administered continuously to subjects with apropensity to develop conditions or diseases in order to prevent theoccurrence of the disease or condition. The compounds and compositionscan be administered to a subject during or as soon as possible after theonset of the symptoms. The administration of the compounds can beinitiated within the first 48 hours of the onset of the symptoms,preferably within the first 48 hours of the onset of the symptoms, morepreferably within the first 6 hours of the onset of the symptoms, andmost preferably within 3 hours of the onset of the symptoms. The initialadministration can be via any route practical, such as, for example, anintravenous injection, a bolus injection, infusion over about 5 minutesto about 5 hours, a pill, a capsule, transdermal patch, buccal delivery,and the like, or combination thereof. A compound is preferablyadministered as soon as is practicable after the onset of a disease orcondition is detected or suspected, and for a length of time necessaryfor the treatment of the disease, such as, for example, from 1 day toabout 3 months. The length of treatment can vary for each subject, andthe length can be determined using the known criteria. For example, thecompound or a formulation containing the compound can be administeredfor at least 2 weeks, preferably about 1 month to about 5 years.

Inhibitors of SOCE

In one aspect, compounds of Formula (I), (IA), (II), (IIA), (III),(IIIA), (IV), (IVA), (V), (VA), (VI), (VIA), (VII), or (VIIA) areadministered or used in conjunction with other inhibitors of SOCE. Inone aspect, the inhibitors of SOCE are non-selective inhibitors.

A variety of inhibitors of SOCE have been described. Inhibitors of SOCEinclude:

a) Cations, which include lanthanide cations, such as for example, Gd³⁺,La³⁺;

b) P-450 inhibitors, which include econazole, miconazole, clotrimazole,ketoconazole;

c) Cyclooxygenase inhibitors, which include niflumic acid, flufenamicacid, tenidap;

d) Lipoxygenase inhibitors, which include nordihydroguaiaretic acid,eicosatetraynoic acid;

e) Compounds that are channel blockers, which include SK&F 96365,SC38249, LU52396, L-651,582, tetrandrine, 2-APB;

f) Compounds that inhibit SOCE not by an action on the SOC channelsthemselves, which include U73122 (phospholipase C inhibitor), wortmannin(phosphatidylinositol kinase inhibitor).

Some of these inhibitors of SOCE have non-specific actions and/ormultiple modes of action that contribute to the inhibition of SOCE,which include blocking the pore of the SOC channel (Channel blockers),inhibition of mitochondrial ATP synthesis that appears to support SOCE(Gamberucci et al., J Biol. Chem., 269, 23597-23602, 1994; Marriott etal., Am. J. Physiol., 269, C766-C774, 1995), disturbances of cytoplasmicpH (Muallem et al., Am. J. Physiol., 257, G917-G924, 1989), as well asinhibiting the activation of SOC channels.

Immunosuppresants

In one embodiment, compounds described herein are administered as singleagents in immunosuppressive therapy to reduce, inhibit, or preventactivity of the immune system. Immunosuppressive therapy is clinicallyused to: prevent the rejection of transplanted organs and tissues (e.g.bone marrow, heart, kidney, liver); treatment of autoimmune diseases ordiseases that are most likely of autoimmune origin (e.g. rheumatoidarthritis, myasthenia gravis, systemic lupus erythematosus, Crohn'sdisease, and ulcerative colitis); and treatment of some othernon-autoimmune inflammatory diseases (e.g. long term allergic asthmacontrol).

In some embodiments, the compounds described herein are administeredwith other immunosuppresants selected from among: Calcineurin inhibitors(such as, but not limited to, cyclosporin, tacrolimus); mTOR inhibitors(such as, but not limited to, sirolimus, everolimus);anti-proliferatives (such as, but not limited to, azathioprine,mycophenolic acid); corticosteroids (such as, but not limited to,prednisone, cortisone acetate, prednisolone, methylprednisolone,dexamethasone, betamethasone, triamcinolone, beclometasone,fludrocortisone acetate, deoxycorticosterone acetate, aldosterone,hydrocortisone); antibodies (such as, but not limited to, monoclonalanti-IL-2Rα receptor antibodies (basiliximab, daclizumab), polyclonalanti-T-cell antibodies (anti-thymocyte globulin (ATG), anti-lymphocyteglobulin (ALG))).

Other immunosuppresants include, but are not limited to: glucocorticoids(alclometasone, aldosterone, amcinonide, beclometasone, betamethasone,budesonide, ciclesonide, clobetasol, clobetasone, clocortolone,cloprednol, cortisone, cortivazol, deflazacort, deoxycorticosterone,desonide, desoximetasone, desoxycortone, dexamethasone, diflorasone,diflucortolone, difluprednate, fluclorolone, Fludrocortisone,fludroxycortide, flumetasone, flunisolide, fluocinolone acetonide,fluocinonide, fluocortin, fluocortolone, fluorometholone, fluperolone,fluprednidene, fluticasone, formocortal, halcinonide, halometasone,hydrocortisone/cortisol, hydrocortisone aceponate, hydrocortisonebuteprate, hydrocortisone butyrate, loteprednol, medrysone,meprednisone, methylprednisolone, methylprednisolone aceponate,mometasone furoate, paramethasone, prednicarbate, prednisone,prednisolone, prednylidene, rimexolone, tixocortol, triamcinolone,ulobetasol), cyclophosphamide, nitrosoureas, cisplatin, carboplatin,oxaliplatin, methotrexate, azathioprine, mercaptopurine, pyrimidineanalogues, protein synthesis inhibitors, methotrexate, azathioprine,mercaptopurine, dactinomycin, anthracyclines, mitomycin C, bleomycin,mithramycin, Atgam®, Thymoglobuline®, OKT3®, basiliximab, daclizumab,cyclosporin, tacrolimus, sirolimus, Interferons (IFN-β, IFN-γ), opioids,TNF binding proteins (infliximab, etanercept, adalimumab, golimumab),mycophenolic acid, mycophenolate mofetil, FTY720, as well as thoselisted in U.S. Pat. No. 7,060,697.

Agents for Treating Autoimmune Diseases, Inflammatory Diseases

Where the subject is suffering from or at risk of suffering from anautoimmune disease, disorder or condition, or an inflammatory disease,disorder or condition, a compound described herein is administered inany combination with one or more of the following therapeutic agents:immunosuppressants (e.g., tacrolimus, cyclosporin, rapamicin,methotrexate, cyclophosphamide, azathioprine, mercaptopurine,mycophenolate, or FTY720), glucocorticoids (e.g., prednisone, cortisoneacetate, prednisolone, methylprednisolone, dexamethasone, betamethasone,triamcinolone, beclometasone, fludrocortisone acetate,deoxycorticosterone acetate, aldosterone), non-steroidalanti-inflammatory drugs (e.g., salicylates, arylalkanoic acids,2-arylpropionic acids, N-arylanthranilic acids, oxicams, coxibs, orsulphonanilides), Cox-2-specific inhibitors (e.g., valdecoxib,etoricoxib, lumiracoxib, celecoxib, or rofecoxib), leflunomide, goldthioglucose, gold thiomalate, aurofin, sulfasalazine,hydroxychloroquinine, minocycline, TNF-α binding proteins (e.g.,infliximab, etanercept, or adalimumab), abatacept, anakinra,interferon-β, interferon-γ, interleukin-2, antileukotrienes,theophylline, or anticholinergics.

In one embodiment, compounds described herein, are administered incombination with inhibitors of NFAT-calcineurin pathway. In oneembodiment, the inhibitors of NFAT-calcineurin pathway include, but arenot limited to, Cyclosporin A (CsA) and tacrolimus (FK506).

In one embodiment, a compound described herein, or compositions andmedicaments that include a compound of Formula (I), (IA), (II), (IIA),(III), (IIIA), (IV), (IVA), (V), (VA), (VI), (VIA), (VII), or (VIIA),are administered to a patient in combination with an anti-inflammatoryagent including, but not limited to, non-steroidal anti-inflammatorydrugs (NSAIDs) and corticosteroids (glucocorticoids).

NSAIDs include, but are not limited to: aspirin, salicylic acid,gentisic acid, choline magnesium salicylate, choline salicylate, cholinemagnesium salicylate, choline salicylate, magnesium salicylate, sodiumsalicylate, diflunisal, carprofen, fenoprofen, fenoprofen calcium,fluorobiprofen, ibuprofen, ketoprofen, nabutone, ketolorac, ketorolactromethamine, naproxen, oxaprozin, diclofenac, etodolac, indomethacin,sulindac, tolmetin, meclofenamate, meclofenamate sodium, mefenamic acid,piroxicam, meloxicam, COX-2 specific inhibitors (such as, but notlimited to, celecoxib, rofecoxib, valdecoxib, parecoxib, etoricoxib,lumiracoxib, CS-502, JTE-522, L-745,337 and NS398).

Combinations with NSAIDs, which are selective COX-2 inhibitors, arecontemplated herein. Such compounds include, but are not limited tothose disclosed in U.S. Pat. No. 5,474,995; U.S. Pat. No. 5,861,419;U.S. Pat. No. 6,001,843; U.S. Pat. No. 6,020,343, U.S. Pat. No.5,409,944; U.S. Pat. No. 5,436,265; U.S. Pat. No. 5,536,752; U.S. Pat.No. 5,550,142; U.S. Pat. No. 5,604,260; U.S. Pat. No. 5,698,584; U.S.Pat. No. 5,710,140; WO 94/15932; U.S. Pat. No. 5,344,991; U.S. Pat. No.5,134,142; U.S. Pat. No. 5,380,738; U.S. Pat. No. 5,393,790; U.S. Pat.No. 5,466,823; U.S. Pat. No. 5,633,272; U.S. Pat. Nos. 5,932,598 and6,313,138; all of which are hereby incorporated by reference.

Compounds that have been described as selective COX-2 inhibitors and aretherefore useful in the methods or pharmaceutical compositions describedherein include, but are not limited to, celecoxib, rofecoxib,lumiracoxib, etoricoxib, valdecoxib, and parecoxib, or apharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof.

Corticosteroids, include, but are not limited to: betamethasone,prednisone, alclometasone, aldosterone, amcinonide, beclometasone,betamethasone, budesonide, ciclesonide, clobetasol, clobetasone,clocortolone, cloprednol, cortisone, cortivazol, deflazacort,deoxycorticosterone, desonide, desoximetasone, desoxycortone,dexamethasone, diflorasone, diflucortolone, difluprednate, fluclorolone,fludrocortisone, fludroxycortide, flumetasone, flunisolide, fluocinoloneacetonide, fluocinonide, fluocortin, fluocortolone, fluorometholone,fluperolone, fluprednidene, fluticasone, formocortal, halcinonide,halometasone, hydrocortisone/cortisol, hydrocortisone aceponate,hydrocortisone buteprate, hydrocortisone butyrate, loteprednol,medrysone, meprednisone, methylprednisolone, methylprednisoloneaceponate, mometasone furoate, paramethasone, prednicarbate,prednisone/prednisolone, rimexolone, tixocortol, triamcinolone, andulobetasol.

Other agents used as anti-inflammatories include those disclosed in U.S.patent publication 2005/0227929, herein incorporated by reference.

Some commercially available anti-inflammatories include, but are notlimited to: Arthrotec® (diclofenac and misoprostol), Asacol®(5-aminosalicyclic acid), Salofalk® (5-aminosalicyclic acid), Auralgan®(antipyrine and benzocaine), Azulfidine® (sulfasalazine), Daypro®(oxaprozin), Lodine® (etodolac), Ponstan® (mefenamic acid), Solumedrol®(methylprednisolone), Bayer® (aspirin), Bufferin® (aspirin), Indocin®(indomethacin), Vioxx® (rofecoxib), Celebrex® (celecoxib), Bextra®(valdecoxib), Arcoxia® (etoricoxib), Prexige® (lumiracoxib), Advil®,Motrin® (ibuprofen), Voltaren® (diclofenac), Orudis® (ketoprofen),Mobic® (meloxicam), Relafen® (nabumetone), Aleve®, Naprosyn® (naproxen),Feldene® (piroxicam).

In one embodiment, compounds described herein are administered incombination with leukotriene receptor antagonists including, but are notlimited to, BAY u9773 (see EP 00791576; published 27 Aug. 1997), DUO-LT(Tsuji et al, Org. Biomol. Chem., 1, 3139-3141, 2003), zafirlukast(Accolate®), montelukast (Singulair®), prankulast (Onon®), andderivatives or analogs thereof.

Kits/Articles of Manufacture

For use in the therapeutic applications described herein, kits andarticles of manufacture are also described herein. Such kits can includea carrier, package, or container that is compartmentalized to receiveone or more containers such as vials, tubes, and the like, each of thecontainer(s) including one of the separate elements to be used in amethod described herein. Suitable containers include, for example,bottles, vials, syringes, and test tubes. The containers can be formedfrom a variety of materials such as glass or plastic.

The articles of manufacture provided herein contain packaging materials.Packaging materials for use in packaging pharmaceutical productsinclude, e.g., U.S. Pat. Nos. 5,323,907, 5,052,558 and 5,033,252.Examples of pharmaceutical packaging materials include, but are notlimited to, blister packs, bottles, tubes, inhalers, pumps, bags, vials,containers, syringes, bottles, and any packaging material suitable for aselected formulation and intended mode of administration and treatment.A wide array of formulations of the compounds and compositions providedherein are contemplated as are a variety of treatments for any disease,disorder, or condition that would benefit by inhibition of CRAC channelactivity.

For example, the container(s) can include one or more compoundsdescribed herein, optionally in a composition or in combination withanother agent as disclosed herein. The container(s) optionally have asterile access port (for example the container can be an intravenoussolution bag or a vial having a stopper pierceable by a hypodermicinjection needle). Such kits optionally comprising a compound with anidentifying description or label or instructions relating to its use inthe methods described herein.

A kit will typically may include one or more additional containers, eachwith one or more of various materials (such as reagents, optionally inconcentrated form, and/or devices) desirable from a commercial and userstandpoint for use of a compound described herein. Non-limiting examplesof such materials include, but not limited to, buffers, diluents,filters, needles, syringes; carrier, package, container, vial and/ortube labels listing contents and/or instructions for use, and packageinserts with instructions for use. A set of instructions will alsotypically be included.

A label can be on or associated with the container. A label can be on acontainer when letters, numbers or other characters forming the labelare attached, molded or etched into the container itself; a label can beassociated with a container when it is present within a receptacle orcarrier that also holds the container, e.g., as a package insert. Alabel can be used to indicate that the contents are to be used for aspecific therapeutic application. The label can also indicate directionsfor use of the contents, such as in the methods described herein.

In certain embodiments, the pharmaceutical compositions can be presentedin a pack or dispenser device which can contain one or more unit dosageforms containing a compound provided herein. The pack can for examplecontain metal or plastic foil, such as a blister pack. The pack ordispenser device can be accompanied by instructions for administration.The pack or dispenser can also be accompanied with a notice associatedwith the container in form prescribed by a governmental agencyregulating the manufacture, use, or sale of pharmaceuticals, whichnotice is reflective of approval by the agency of the form of the drugfor human or veterinary administration. Such notice, for example, can bethe labeling approved by the U.S. Food and Drug Administration forprescription drugs, or the approved product insert. Compositionscontaining a compound provided herein formulated in a compatiblepharmaceutical carrier can also be prepared, placed in an appropriatecontainer, and labeled for treatment of an indicated condition.

Assays

Several techniques may be used to evaluate store operated calcium entryand calcium signaling in cells. Such techniques include, but are notlimited to, patch clamp electrophysiology (measurement of calcium ionsor other ions across cell membranes, such as plasma membranes),capacitance measurements (allows exocytosis to be followed at the levelof single cells), calcium imaging using fluorescent dyes allows patternsof calcium movement within the cytoplasm to be tracked, fluorescenceresonance energy transfer (FRET) enables protein-protein interactions tobe evaluated, and molecular biology methods allow for the manipulationof the levels of expression of proteins of interest.

A wide variety of assay methods may be used to examine the modulation ofintracellular calcium by compounds of Formula (I), (IA), (II), (IIA),(III), (IIIA), (IV), (IVA), (V), (VA), (VI), (VIA), (VII), or (VIIA).Such assays include in vitro cell based assays as well as in vivo animalmodels. Any assays that detect, monitor or measure an effect onintracellular calcium, including calcium entry-mediated events can beused. Such assays include, but are not limited to, assays monitoring,measuring and/or detecting intracellular calcium levels, modulation ofcalcium levels, and movement of calcium into, out of or within cells andintracellular organelles. Assays can also include monitoring, measuringand/or detecting calcium entry-mediated events and molecules involved incalcium entry-mediated events such as, but not limited to, signaltransduction molecules, transcription factors, secreted molecules andother molecules that are affected by changes in calcium homeostasis.Assays include, but are not limited to, those described herein and thosedescribed in US patent publication no. 2007/0031814 and WO 07/081804,herein incorporated by reference.

Cells and Cell Models

For in vitro testing of the modulation of intracellular calcium bycompounds of Formula (I), (IA), (II), (IIA), (III), (IIIA), (IV), (IVA),(V), (VA), (VI), (VIA), (VII), or (VIIA), a wide variety of cell typesfor such assays are available. In a particular embodiment, the cell isone in which store-operated calcium entry occurs or that can bemanipulated such that store-operated calcium entry occurs in the cell.In particular embodiments, the cell contains one or more proteinsinvolved in modulating intracellular calcium (and, in particular, isinvolved in, participates in and/or provides for store-operated calciumentry, movement of calcium into, out of or within an intracellularorganelle or calcium store, modulation of calcium levels in anintracellular organelle or calcium store (e.g., endoplasmic reticulum)and/or calcium buffering), such as those provided herein. In particularembodiments, the protein(s) include STIM proteins (including STIM1,STIM2, DSTIM and CSTIM protein) and/or Orai proteins (Orai1, Orai2,Orai3). The cell may endogenously express the protein(s) orrecombinantly express the protein(s).

Cells for use in the methods may be of any species. In one embodiment,the cells can be eukaryotic cells. In one embodiment, the cells can beyeast, insect (e.g., Drosophila or Anopheles), or mammalian cells.Mammalian cells include, but are not limited to, rodent (e.g., mouse,rat and hamster), primate, monkey, dog, bovine, rabbit and human cells.A variety of cell types can be used in the methods, including, forexample, neuronal, nervous system, brain, immune system cells, e.g., Tlymphocytes and B cells, primary cells, blood and hematopoietic cells,stromal cells, myeloid cells, lymphoid cells, and a variety of tumor andcancer cells. Particular cells include Drosophila Schneider 2 or S2cells, human embryonic kidney (HEK293) cells, rat basophilic leukemia(RBL-2H3) cells, Jurkat cells, epithelial cells, rhabdomyosarcoma cells,rhabdoid cells, retinoblastoma cells, neuroepithelioma cells,neuroblastoma cells, osteosarcoma cells, fibroblasts, bone marrow stromacells, erythroleukemia cells and lymphoblast cells. Other cell linesinclude HEK 293 and 293T, CHO (including CHO-K1), LTK-, N2A, H6, andHGB. Many such cells and cell lines are available through celldepositories such as, for example, the American Type Culture Collection(ATCC, Manassas, Va.). Primary cells can be obtained by isolation fromtissue sources.

Cells from a known cell line can be used, such as neuroblastoma SH-SY5Ycells, pheochromocytoma PC12 cells, neuroblastoma SK-N-BE(2)C or SK-N-SHcells, human SK-N-MC neuroepithelioma cells, SMS-KCNR cells, human LAN-5neuroblastoma cells, human GI-CA-N neuroblastoma cells, human GOTOneuroblastoma cells, mouse Neuro 2a (N2A) neuroblastoma cells and/orhuman IMR 32 neuroblastoma cells, chronic myeloid leukemia cells (e.g.,human K562 cells), promyelocytic leukemia cells (e.g., HL60 cells) andhistiocytic lymphoma cells (e.g., U937 cells), Burkitt's lymphoma cells(e.g., CA46 cells), B-cells (e.g., NALM6), acute lymphoblastic leukemiacells (e.g., MOLT4 cells), T cells (e.g. Jurkat cells) and early T-ALL(e.g., DU528) cells.

In one embodiment, the choice of a cell for use in an in vitro assay totest the modulation of intracellular calcium by compounds describedherein involves several considerations, including, for example, aparticular protein that is being used in the method and a particularaspect or activity of intracellular calcium modulation that is beingmonitored or assessed in the method.

In one embodiment, the modulation of intracellular calcium by a compounddescribed herein, or (XIIIA) is examined by monitoring or assessing theeffect on store-operated calcium entry. Cells typically used in suchmethods exhibit store-operated calcium entry either naturally or throughmanipulation of the cells. Cells that endogenously exhibitstore-operated calcium entry include some excitable cells and mostnon-excitable cells and can be identified using methods described hereinand/or recognized in the field.

In one embodiment, it may be desirable to utilize a cell that containscomponents of signaling and messenger systems that can effect release ofcalcium from intracellular stores. For example, cells containingcomponents of receptor-mediated phospholipase C (PLC) activation systemscan be used for physiological activation (via generation of IP₃) ofstore depletion to facilitate monitoring of store-operated calciumentry. Receptor-mediated PLC activation occurs through distinct couplingmechanisms: PLC-β activation by G protein-coupled receptors (GPCRs) andPLC-γ activation by tyrosine kinase receptors and nonreceptor tyrosinekinases. Thus, cells containing a receptor-mediated PLC-activationsystem can be monitored or assessed for store-operated calcium entryupon agonist activation of one or more receptors known to participate inthe system. (see e.g. Bouron (2000) FEBS Lett 470:269-272; Millar et al.(1995) J. Exp. Biol. 198:1843-1850; Yagodin et al. (1998) Cell Calcium23:219-228; Yagodin et al. (1999) Cell Calcium 25:429-438; and Pattersonet al. (2002) Cell 111:1-20).

An assessment of intracellular calcium after treatment with a compounddescribed herein can be made under a variety of conditions. Conditionscan be selected to evaluate the effect of test agent on a specificaspect of intracellular calcium. For example, reagents and conditionsare used, for specifically evaluating store-operated calcium entry,resting cytosolic calcium levels, calcium buffering, and calcium levelsof and calcium uptake by or release from intracellular organelles.Resting cytosolic calcium levels, intracellular organelle calcium levelsand cation movement may be assessed using any of the methods describedherein or recognized in the field. Such methods of assessing modulationin intracellular calcium include, but are not limited to,calcium-sensitive indicator-based measurements, such as fluo-3, mag-fura2 and ER-targeted aequorin, labeled calcium (such as ⁴⁵Ca²⁺)-basedmeasurements, and electrophysiological measurements. Particular aspectsof ion flux that may be assessed include, but are not limited to, areduction (including elimination) in the amount of ion flux, alteredbiophysical properties of the ion current, and altered sensitivities ofthe flux to activators or inhibitors of calcium flux processes, such as,for example, store-operated calcium entry. Reagents and conditions foruse in specifically evaluating receptor-mediated calcium movement andsecond messenger-operated calcium movement are also available.

Evaluation of Store-Operated Calcium Entry

In one aspect, compounds described herein are added to cells underconditions that permit store-operated calcium entry to occur in order toassess the effects of Formulas (I)-(VIIA) on store-operated calciumentry. Such conditions are described herein and are recognized in thefield.

For example, in one method cells may be treated to reduce the calciumlevels of intracellular calcium stores and then analyzed for evidence ofion (e.g., calcium) influx in response thereto in the presence of acompound described herein. Techniques for reducing calcium levels ofintracellular stores and for analyzing cells for evidence of ion (e.g.,calcium) influx are recognized in the field and described herein.

In other methods, electrophysiological analysis of currents across acell-detached plasma membrane patch or an outside-out membrane vesiclemay be used to detect or monitor store-operated channel currents (e.g.,I_(SOC), I_(CRAC)) in the presence of a compound described herein.

Evaluation of Calcium Entry-Mediated Events

A number of molecules involved in calcium-regulated pathways are known.Evaluation of molecules involved in calcium-entry mediated events can beused to monitor intracellular calcium, and can be used, for example inscreening assays described herein to monitor the effects of thecompounds presented herein. Examples of assays include but are notlimited to assays which detect, or determine the presence, levels,alteration of levels, production, modification (such as phosphorylationand dephosphorylation), translocation, degradation and activity ofmolecules involved in calcium-entry mediated events (see for example,Trevillyan et al. (2001) J. Biol. Chem. 276:48118-26). The assaysdescribed herein can be used with cells that have been treated with orcontacted with a compound presented herein, or that express an alteredamount of a test molecule (such as a protein involved in calciumregulation, including a STIM protein, Orai protein), or with controlcells. The assays can also be conducted in cells that have beenstimulated with a physiological or non-physiological activator, or inunstimulated cells. The following are representative assays formolecules involved in calcium-entry mediated events and are meant to beexemplary only. Other assays for these molecules and assays for othermolecules involved in calcium-entry mediated events can also be employedin any of the screening and/or modulation methods described herein.

β-Hexosaminidase Release

In mast cells, Ca²⁺ influx results in degranulation and release ofinflammatory mediators such as heparin, histamine and enzymes such asβ-hexosaminidase. Detecting and/or measuring release of such moleculescan thus be used to monitor intracellular calcium. For example, mediafrom mast cells can be collected. A suitable substrate forβ-hexosaminidase (e.g. p-nitrophenyl-acetyl-glucosamide) can then beadded and the absorbance of the resulting mixture assessed to measurethe relative amount of β-hexosaminidase activity in the samples (Funabaet al. (2003) Cell Biol. International 27:879-85).

Calcium/Calmodulin-Dependent CaN Phosphatase Activity

The phosphatase calcineurin (CaN) dephosphorylates various proteins,affecting their activity and localization. CaN activity can be assessedby incubating purified CaN and a CaN substrate, for example aradiolabeled peptide corresponding to a sequence in the RII subunit ofcAMP-dependent kinase, either with or without a compound of Formula (I),(IA), (II), (IIA), (III), (IIIA), (IV), (IVA), (V), (VA), (VI), (VIA),(VII), or (VIIA) (see, Trevillyan et al. (2001) J. Biol. Chem276:48118-26). The level of radiolabeled peptide and/or the amount offree inorganic phosphate released can be measured to assess CaNdephosphorylation activity.

NFAT Transcriptional Activity

The NFAT (nuclear factor of activated T cells) transcription factorregulates a number of genes in response to intracellular calcium levels.For example, NFAT proteins regulate the transcription of cytokine genesinvolved in the immune response. Promoters from NFAT-regulated genes,and/or regulatory regions and elements from these genes, can be used tomonitor NFAT regulated expression and thereby monitor intracellularcalcium. Reporter gene fusions can be constructed with NFAT regulatedpromoters or NFAT-regulated elements operably linked to a reporter genesuch as luciferase, β-galactosidase, green fluorescent protein (GFP) orany other known reporter in the art (see for example, Published U.S.Application no. 2002-0034728). The amount of reporter protein oractivity is a measure of NFAT activity.

NFAT Phosphorylation

NFAT activation is regulated primarily through its phosphorylation,which in turn regulates its subcellular localization. In unstimulatedcells, NFAT is a hyperphosphorylated cytosolic protein. An elevation inintracellular Ca²⁺, induced by a variety of mechanisms, increases theactivity of the Ca²⁺-calmodulin-dependent phosphatase, calcineurin.Activated calcineurin dephosphorylates multiple serine residues withinthe regulatory region of the NFAT molecule. NFAT is rephosphorylated inresponse to decreases in Ca²⁺ levels or CaN inhibition.

The phosphorylation state of NFAT can be monitored for example, byexpressing a detectably tagged NFAT protein in cells, such as a His6tagged-NFAT. Tagged NFAT can be purified from cells using Ni²⁺chromatography and subjected to gel electrophoresis and staining orwestern blotting. More highly phosphorylated forms of NFAT can bedistinguished by their slower migration. The state of phosphorylatedNFAT can be used as a measure of NFAT activation (see, Trevillyan et al.(2001) J. Biol. Chem 276:48118-26).

NFAT Nuclear Localization

NFAT localization between the cytoplasm and nucleus is regulated by thephosphorylation state of NFAT. Phosphorylation of NFAT prevents nuclearlocalization by masking the nuclear localization sequence. NFAT nuclearlocalization can be monitored, for example, by expressing fluorescentlytagged NFAT, for example, GFP-NFAT, in cells. Confocal microscopy can beused to monitor nuclear localization of the tagged NFAT (see, Trevillyanet al. (2001) J. Biol. Chem 276:48118-26).

Cytokine Secretion

Cytokine secretion, such as IL-2 secretion, can be monitored usingprotein detection assays. For example, supernatant can be collected fromimmune cells. An ELISA assay or other suitable format with IL-2antibodies can be used to detect and/or measure the amount of IL-2secreted as compared to control cells. Secretion of other cytokines, forexample, TNF-α, can also be detected in similar assays.

Cytokine Expression

Expression of cytokines, such as, but not limited to IL-2, can beassessed either directly or indirectly in cells. For example, inindirect methods, an IL-2 promoter can be operably linked to a reportergene such as luciferase or β-galactosidase, and the reporter constructintroduced into cells. Reporter gene expression can be monitored andcompared to gene expression in control cells (see, Trevillyan et al.(2001) J. Biol. Chem 276:48118-26). Alternatively, expression ofendogenous or recombinant IL-2 mRNA or protein can be assessed.

T Cell Proliferation

Cytokines such as IL-2 are necessary for T-cell proliferation inresponse to mitogen or alloantigen stimulation, and thus T-cellproliferation is altered by changes in cytokine expression or secretion.T cells can be induced, such as with concanavalin A or alloreactivelymphocytes and T cell proliferation measured, for example, bysubjecting cells to a pulse of ³H-thymidine and measuring ³H-thymidineincorporation (see, Trevillyan et al. (2001) J. Biol. Chem276:48118-26).

In some embodiments, the modulation (e g inhibition or reduction) ofSOCE by compounds presented herein are determined by evaluation of anyof the following criteria:

a. there is direct inhibition of increased [Ca²⁺ ]i as measured by acalcium indicator;

b. there is a direct inhibition of I_(SOC) or I_(CRAC) as measured bypatch clamp;

c. there is inhibition of downstream signaling functions such ascalcineurin activity, NFAT subcellular localization, NFATphosphorylation, and/or cytokine, e.g., IL-2, production; or

d. there are modifications in activation-induced cell proliferation,differentiation and/or apoptotic signaling pathways.

Animal Models

Animal models that can be used in embodiments of the methods furtherinclude animals, such as, but not limited to non-human animals, whichhave, in at least some of their cells, an alteration or defect in, oraberrant functioning of, a cellular process which relies on or isregulated by intracellular calcium. Cellular processes that rely on orare regulated by intracellular calcium include, for example, cellularactivation, gene expression, cellular trafficking, and apoptosis.Diseases/disorders that involve defects that may be at least partiallycompensated for by modulation of intracellular calcium include, but arenot limited to: autoimmune disorders, including rheumatoid arthritis,inflammatory bowel disease, Sjogren's syndrome (cytokines associatedwith lymphocyte invasion of salivary epithelial cells can reduce calciummobilization in parotid cells; also, T-cell activation, includingactivation of transcription factors, cytokine gene expression and cellproliferation, depends on sustained elevation of intracellular calciumlevel provided by store-operated calcium influx), asthma (store-operatedcalcium entry may play an important role in mediating bronchialchonstriction and bronchial smooth muscle cell proliferation),glomerulonephritis and glomerular inflammation (changes in intracellularcalcium, such as by store-operated calcium entry, signal monocyteadhesion in a co-culture model of glomerular inflammation).

Types of animal models include, but are not limited to, non-humananimals, such as non-human invertebrates and vertebrates and non-humanmammals, rodents (e.g., mice, rat and hamster), cows, chickens, pigs,goats, dogs, sheep, insects, Drosophila, nematodes, worms, C. elegans,monkeys, gorillas, and other primates.

Animal models include transgenic and non-transgenic animals. One exampleof such an animal model that can be used in particular embodiments ofthe methods is a rodent model of airway hyperresponsiveness (AHR), acharacteristic of asthma. This model can be generated, for example, bysensitization through immunization with ovalbumin followed by exposureto aerosolized ovalbumin and challenge by cholinergic stimulation (e.g.,via administration of methacholine or acetylcholine) (see, e.g., Xu etal. (2002) J. Appl. Physiol. 93:1833-1840; Humbles et al (2002) Proc.Natl. Acad. Sci. 99:1479-1484). Airway hyperresponsiveness (which can beevaluated using methods, such as for e.g., using barometricplethysmography to record respiratory pressure curves and throughmeasurement of pulmonary parameters such as pulmonary conductance andpulmonary compliance) can be assessed and compared in animals treatedand not treated with a compound presented herein. A further example ofan animal model that can be used in particular embodiments of themethods is a rodent model of mesangial proliferative glomerulonephritis,which can be generated, for example, by administration of anti-Thy1.1antibody (see, e.g., Jefferson and Johnson (1999) J. Nephrol.12:297-307). Any number of parameters indicative of glomerulonephritisor renal dysfunction (e.g., mesangial cell proliferation, bloodpressure, urinary protein excretion, creatinine clearance,glomerulosclerosis index and other parameters) can be evaluated andcompared in animals treated with and not treated with test agent. Thenon-obese diabetic (NOD) mouse, an inbred mouse strain thatspontaneously develops autoimmune diabetes that shares manyimmunogenetic features with Type 1 diabetes mellitus, is another exampleof an animal model that can be used in a particular embodiment of themethods. These mice also manifest many characteristics of autoimmuneexocrinopathy (such as Sjorgen's syndrome) including declining exocrinetissue secretory function (see, e.g., Humphreys-Beher and Peck (1999)Arch. Oral Biol. 44 Suppl 1:S21-25 and Brayer et al. (2000) J Rheumatol.27:1896-1904). Characteristics relevant to Sjorgen's syndrome (e.g.,lymphocytic infiltrates in exocrine glands (e.g., salivary and lacrimalglands), presence of dendritic cells and macrophages in submandibularglands, integrity of the lacrimal gland by measurement of basal andstimulated tear secretion, saliva flow rates and amylase activity) canbe evaluated and compared in animals treated with and not treated with acompound described herein. An animal (e.g., rodent) model of autoimmunedisease can also be used in particular embodiments of the methods. Suchanimals include rat models available through the National Institutes ofHealth (NIH) Autoimmune Rat Model Repository and Development Center(Bethesda, Md.; accessible at www.ors.od.nih.gov/dirs/vrp/ratcenter).One rat model of rheumatoid arthritis (RA) and relatedchronic/inflammatory autoimmune diseases is the collagen-inducedarthritis (CIA) model (see, e.g., Griffiths and Remmers (2001) Immunol.Rev. 184:172-183). Characteristic phenotypes of autoimmune disease (e.g.altered levels of immune reactivity to self-antigens, chronicinflammation of autoantigen-expressing target organs, and activation andparticipation of invading mononuclear cells and tissue fibroblasts inorgan damage) can be evaluated and compared in animals treated with andnot treated with a compound presented herein. An animal (e.g., rodent)model of neuropathic or inflammatory pain can also be used in aparticular embodiment of the methods. For example, one rat model ofneuropathic pain involves development of tactile allodynia (exaggeratedresponse to otherwise innocuous stimuli) after ligation of lumbar spinalnerves (see, e.g., Chaplan et al. (1994) J. Neurosci. Methods 53:55-63and Luo et al. (2001) J. Neurosci. 21:1868-1875). Tactile allodynia, onecharacteristic feature of neuropathic pain, can be evaluated (e.g., byevaluating paw withdrawal threshold in response to application ofpressure) and compared in animals treated and not treated with acompound described herein.

EXAMPLES

These examples are provided for illustrative purposes only and not tolimit the scope of the claims provided herein. The starting materialsand reagents used for the synthesis of the compounds described hereinmay be synthesized or can be obtained from commercial sources, such as,but not limited to, Sigma-Aldrich, Acros Organics, Fluka, and FischerScientific.

Synthetic Examples Example 1 Preparation of4′-chloro-2-fluoro-N-(o-tolyl)-[1,1′-biphenyl]-4-carboxamide (3)

A stirred mixture of 1 (2 g, 9.13 mmol), 2 (1.71 g, 10.96 mmol), sodiumcarbonate (2.9 g, 27.2 mmol), palladium acetate (0.2 g) in water (50 ml)was sparged with nitrogen for 10 minutes. The reaction mixture washeated at 85° C. for 12 hrs, filtered, the filtrate was acidified topH=3 with HCl (2M), the precipitate was filtered and washed with water,dried and concentrated to afford 0.6 g of 2 as an white solid withoutfurther purification.

A solution of 60 mg of 2, 3 eq Et3N, 1 eq of 2-methylaniline and 1.5 eqof BopCl in 3 mL of acetonitrile was stirred at 80° C. for 15 hours. Thereaction mixture was concentrated and the residue was purified bypreparative HPLC to afford target compound 3.

Example 2 Preparation of4′-chloro-N-(2,6-difluorophenyl)-2-fluoro-[1,1′-biphenyl]-4-carboxamide(4)

To a room temperature solution of 2 (0.8 g, 3.2 mmol) in dichloromethane(10 mL) was added DMF (26 μL) followed by oxalyl chloride (0.813 g, 6.4mmol). Once the effervescence had subsided, the yellow solution washeated to reflux for 1.5 h. After cooling, the solution was evaporatedin vacuo and the solid residue was azeotroped with DCM to give 0.8 gacid chloride as a white solid.

To a solution of 2,6-difluoroaniline (23 mg, 0.18 mmol) in 2 ml of THFwas added NaH (21.6 mg, 0.54 mmol). The mixture was stirred at r.t. for1 h. Then the above acid chloride (50 mg, 0.18 mmol) in 1 ml of THF wasadded. The mixture was stirred at r.t. for 12 h. 45% of desired productwas found and 12% of the starting material remained. The reactionmixture was quenched by water and the residue was purified bypreparative HPLC to afford target compound 4.

Example 3 Preparation of3-fluoro-4-(1-methyl-3-(trifluoromethyl)-1H-pyrazol-5-yl)benzoic acid(10)

Preparation of (1-ethyl-3-(trifluoromethyl)-1H-pyrazol-5-yl)boronic acid(7): To a mixture of compound 4 (100 g, 0.595 mol) and methanol (400 mL)was added ethyl hydrazine (113 g, 1.2 mol) at r.t. The mixture wasrefluxed for 4 h. The mixture was poured into water (1 L) and extractedwith DCM (600 mL). The organic layer was washed with water (3×400 mL),brine, dried over Na2SO4, concentrated. The residue was distillated togive compound 6 (35 g, 35.8%) as a light yellow liquid.

To a solution of compound 6 (35 g, 0.21 mol) in dry THF (400 mL) wasadded n-BuLi (256 mL, 0.64 mol, 2.5 M) at −78° C. triisopropyl borate(79 g, 0.42 mol) was added after the mixture was stirred at −78° C. for20 min. The mixture was stirred at r.t. overnight. The mixture wasadjusted pH to 5 with 1M HCl. The mixture was separated with EtOAc (500mL) and water (500 mL). The aqueous layer was extracted with EtOAc(3×500 mL). The organic layers were combined and washed with brine andconcentrated to 7 (25 g, 57%) as a yellow oil.

To a solution of 8 (1.5 g, 7.69 mmol) in 1,4-dioxane was added 2eq.1-methyl-3-trifluoromethylpyrazole-5-boronic acid, Pd(dppf)2C12 (0.5g) and 3 eq. K3PO4. 3H2O. The reaction mixture was sparged with nitrogenfor 10 minutes. And the resulting mixture was stirred at 85° C. for 15hours under the N2. EA/brine work and followed by prep HPLC purificationto give 1.3 g compound 9. 1.1 g of 10 was obtained after hydrolysis withaq. LiOH.

Example 4 Preparation of 4′-chloro-2-nitro-[1,1′-biphenyl]-4-carboxylicacid (13)

To a solution of 11 (2 g, 7.69 mmol) in 1,4-dioxane (100 mL)/water (20mL) was added 4-chlorophenyl boronic acid (1.44 g, 9.23 mmol),Pd(dppf)2C12 (0.2 g) and K2CO3 (3.19 g, 23 mmol). The reaction mixturewas sparged with nitrogen for 10 minutes. And the resulting mixture wasstirred at 80° C. for 15 hours under the N2. EA/brine work and followedby prep HPLC purification to furnish 2.1 g compound 12 which was thenhydrolyzed with aq. LiOH to give 1.7 g of 13.

Example 5 Preparation ofN-(3-acetamido-4-(1-methyl-3-(trifluoromethyl)-1H-pyrazol-5-yl)phenyl)-4-chlorobenzamide(18)

Preparation of4-chloro-N-(4-(1-methyl-3-(trifluoromethyl)-1H-pyrazol-5-yl)-3-nitrophenyl)benzamide(16)

To a solution of 4-bromo-3-nitroaniline (14, 668 mg, 3 mmol) in 10 mlDCM was added 2 mg DMAP and 3 eq. DIEA followed by addition of 1.2 eq4-chlorobezoyl chloride. After stirred at r.t. for overnight, thereaction mixture was worked up with DCM/NaHCO₃. Org. phase was driedover Na₂SO₄ and concentrated to dryness. The solid residue wasre-crystallized from ethyl acetate/hexane to give crude 15, which wasdirectly used for next step reaction without further purification.

A reaction mixture of 1-methyl-3-trifluoromethylpyrazole-5-boronic acid(58.2 mg, 0.3 mmol), intermediate 15 (107 mg, 0.3 mmol), Pd(PPh₃)₄ (17mg) and sodium carbonate (127 mg, 1.2 mmol) in 1 ml DME, 1 ml EtOH and0.5 ml H₂O was sparged with Ar and then heated at 80° C. for 3 h.EA/brine work-up and following flash silica gel column purificationfurnished 58 mg of 16 as yellow solid.

Preparation ofN-(3-amino-4-(1-methyl-3-(trifluoromethyl)-1H-pyrazol-5-yl)phenyl)-4-chlorobenzamide(17)

Compound 16 (42 mg, 0.1 mmol) was dissolved in 10 ml MeOH.Tin(II)chloride dehydrate (223 mg, 1 mmol) was added and the reactionmixture was stirred at r.t. for overnight. The reaction mixture wasevaporated to dryness. The solid residue was dissolved in 6 N NaOH andextracted with DCM. The org. phase was washed with brine. Afterconcentrated to dryness, the solid residue was dissolved in DMF andpurified on prep HPLC to give compound 17.

Preparation ofN-(3-acetamido-4-(1-methyl-3-(trifluoromethyl)-1H-pyrazol-5-yl)phenyl)-4-chlorobenzamide(18)

To a solution of 17 (20 mg) in 2 ml DCM was added 3 eq DIEA and acetylchloride (20 μl). The reaction mixture was stirred at r.t. for 5 hbefore worked up with DCM/NaHCO₃, water. The org. phase was concentratedand subjected to prep HPLC purification to furnish compound 18.

Example 6 Preparation ofN-{3-amino-4-[5-methyl-3-(trifluoromethyl)pyrazolyl]phenyl}(4-chlorophenyl)carboxamide(24)

Preparation of (4-Chlorophenyl)-N-(4-fluoro-3-nitrophenyl)carboxamide(20)

To the solution of 4-chlorobenzoic acid (19) (9.36 g, 0.06 mmol) in DCM(150 mL) was added (COCl)₂ (17.4 mL, 0.3 mol) dropwise and cat. amountof DMF at 0° C. The mixture was stirred at room temperature for 2 h andevaporated. The residue was again dissolved in DCM (150 mL) and added toa mixture of 4-fluoro-3-nitroaniline (6.24 g, 0.04 mol) and DIEA (20.9mL, 0.12 mol) in CH₂Cl₂ (100 mL) at 0° C. The mixture was allowed tostir at room temperature overnight. The solvent was removed under vacuoand the residue was washed with sat. NaHCO3 aq. (50 mL) and brine (50mL). The organic layer was separated, dried and purified bycrystallization to give 20 (7 g, 60%).

Preparation of (4-Chlorophenyl)-N-(4-hydrazino-3-nitrophenyl)carboxamide(21)

Dissolving 20 (6.5 g, 22 mmol) in hot alcohol (150 mL) and adding slowlya mixture of 100% hydrazine hydrate (1.6 mL), concentrated aqueousammonia (1.7 mL) and alcohol (5 mL). The mixture was stirred at 75° C.for 2 h. The reaction mixture was filtered to give 21 (5.68 g, 84%yield).

Preparation of(4-Chlorophenyl)-N-{4-[5-methyl-3-(trifluoromethyl)pyrazolyl]-3-nitrophenyl}carboxamide(23)

22 (2.9 mL, 24.27 mmol) in ethanol (50 mL) was added to a hot solutionof 21 (4.96 g, 16.18 mmol) in ethanol (150 mL) and 98% sulphuric acid (8mL) and the mixture was refluxed for 30 min. The reaction mixtures wasneutralized with saturated NaHCO3, extracted with CH2Cl2, dried overNa2SO4, concentrated, purified by flash chromatography to get 23 (790mg, 11% yield).

Preparation ofN-{3-amino-4-[5-methyl-3-(trifluoromethyl)pyrazolyl]phenyl}(4-chlorophenyl)carboxamide(24)

The mixture of 23 (340 mg, 1.24 mmol), SnCl₂ 2H₂O (902 mg, 6.22 mmol),HCl (0.33 mL) in EtOH (50 mL) stirred at reflux under a N2 atmospherefor 1 h. The solvent was removed under vacuo, washed with NaOH to PH=14,extracted with CH2C12, dried over Na2SO4 and puried by purified bycolumn chromatography to give 24 (235 mg, 75% yield). 1H NMR (CDCl3, 300MHz): δ=2.37 (s, 3H), 3.89 (s, 2H), 6.59 (s, 1H), 6.76-6.79 (m, 1H),7.13 (d, 1H), 7.46-7.49 (m, 2H), 7.53 (d, 1H), 7.73 (s, 1H), 7.79-7.81(m, 2H). LC-MS: 394.9 (M+1)⁺.

Example 7 Preparation of2-chloro-N-(2-hydroxy-4-(1-methyl-3-(trifluoromethyl)-1H-pyrazol-5-yl)phenyl)benzamide(28)

Preparation of2-chloro-N-(2-methoxy-4-(1-methyl-3-(trifluoromethyl)-1H-pyrazol-5-yl)phenyl)benzamide(27)

Intermediate 26 was prepared in a similar way as intermediate 2 bycoupling 4-bromo-2-methoxybenzoic acid (25) and 2-chloroaniline Areaction mixture of 1-methyl-3-trifluoromethylpyrazole-5-boronic acid(100 mg, 0.5 mmol), intermediate 26 (170 mg, 0.5 mmol), Pd(PPh₃)₄ (60mg) and sodium carbonate (212 mg, 2 mmol) in 2 ml DME, 2 ml EtOH and 1ml H₂O was sparged with Ar and then heated at 80° C. for 3 h. EA/brinework-up and following flash silica gel column purification furnished 182mg of 27 as a white solid.

Preparation of2-chloro-N-(2-hydroxy-4-(1-methyl-3-(trifluoromethyl)-1H-pyrazol-5-yl)phenyl)benzamide(28)

To a solution of 27 (132 mg, 0.32 mmol) in 10 ml DCM was added asolution of BBr₃ (1M in DCM, 3 ml). After stirred at r.t. for 1.5 h, thereaction mixture was evaporated to dryness. The solid residue wasdissolved in EA, washed with aq. NaHCO₃, brine and water. Org. phase wasdried over sodium sulfate and evaporated to dryness to give 28 as ayellow solid.

Example 8 Preparation of2-chloro-N-(3-hydroxy-4-(1-methyl-3-(trifluoromethyl)-1H-pyrazol-5-yl)phenyl)benzamide(32) Preparation of2-chloro-N-(3-hydroxy-4-(1-methyl-3-(trifluoromethyl)-1H-pyrazol-5-yl)phenyl)benzamide(32)

In a similar procedure as described above compound 32 was preparedstarting from 4-bromo-3-methoxybenzic acid 29.

Example 9 Preparation ofN-(3-amino-4-(1-methyl-3-(trifluoromethyl)-1H-pyrazol-5-yl)phenyl)benzo[d]oxazole-2-carboxamide(35)

Preparation ofN-(4-(1-methyl-3-(trifluoromethyl)-1H-pyrazol-5-yl)-3-nitrophenyl)benzo[d]oxazole-2-carboxamide(34)

A reaction mixture of 1-methyl-3-trifluoromethylpyrazole-5-boronic acid(560 mg, 3 mmol), 4-bromo-3-nitroaniline (14) (720 mg, 3.3 mmol),Pd(PPh₃)₄ (173 mg) and sodium carbonate (1.37 g, 12 mmol) in 10 mltoluene, 10 ml EtOH and 5 ml H₂O was sparged with Ar and then heated at100° C. for 17 h. EA/brine work-up furnished crude 33 which was used fornext step reaction without further purification.

To a solution of 33 (38 mg, 0.13 mmol) in 5 ml DCM was added DIEA (100μl), DMAP (2 mg) and 2-benzoxazole acid chloride (47 mg, 0.26 mmol). Thereaction mixture was stirred at 50° C. for 17 h. After cooling down, thereaction was worked up with DCM/aq. NaHCO₃. Flash silica chromatographygave desired compound 34.

Preparation ofN-(3-amino-4-(1-methyl-3-(trifluoromethyl)-1H-pyrazol-5-yl)phenyl)benzo[d]oxazole-2-carboxamide(35)

To a solution of 34 (27 mg, 0.06 mmol) in 3 ml EtOH was added stannouschloride dihydrate (135 mg, 0.6 mmol) and aq. HCl (3 ml, 1N). Themixture was stirred at r.t. for 17 h. The solvents were evaporated andthe residue was dissolved in 4N NaOH and then extracted with diethylether. The org. phase was concentrated and subjected to prep HPLCpurification to give compound 35.

Example 10 Preparation of4-chloro-N-(2′-methyl-2-nitro-5′-(piperidin-1-ylsulfonyl)-[1,1′-biphenyl]-4-yl)benzamide(37)

A reaction mixture of 15 (71 mg, 0.2 mmol), intermediate 36 (57 mg, 0.2mmol), Pd(PPh₃)₄ (23 mg) and sodium carbonate (85 mg, 0.8 mmol) in 1 mlDME, 1 ml EtOH and 0.5 ml H₂O was sparged with Ar and then heated at 80°C. for 3 h. EA/brine work-up and following flash silica gel columnpurification furnished 37 as a tan solid.

Example 11 Preparation of4-chloro-N-(2′-methyl-5′-(morpholinosulfonyl)-2-nitro-[1,1′-biphenyl]-4-yl)benzamide(39)

In a similar procedure as described above, compound 39 was prepared byreacting 15 with 38.

Example 12 Preparation of4-chloro-N-(5′-(N,N-dimethylsulfamoyl)-2′-methyl-2-nitro-[1,1′-biphenyl]-4-yl)benzamide(41)

In a similar procedure as described above, compound 41 was prepared byreacting 15 with 40.

Example 13 Preparation ofN-(2-amino-2′-methyl-5′-(piperidin-1-ylsulfonyl)-[1,1′-biphenyl]-4-yl)-4-chlorobenzamide(42)

In a similar procedure of making compound 35, compound 42 was preparedby reduction of compound 37 with stannous chloride dihydrate.

Example 14 Preparation ofN-(2-amino-2′-methyl-5′-(morpholinosulfonyl)-[1,1′-biphenyl]-4-yl)-4-chlorobenzamide(43)

Similarly, compound 43 was prepared by reduction of compound 39 withstannous chloride dihydrate.

Example 15 Preparation ofN-(2-amino-5′-(N,N-dimethylsulfamoyl)-2′-methyl-[1,1′-biphenyl]-4-yl)-4-chlorobenzamide(44)

Similarly, compound 44 was prepared by reduction of compound 41 withstannous chloride dihydrate.

Example 16 Preparation of4-chloro-N-(3′-(5-methyl-1,3,4-oxadiazol-2-yl)-2-nitro-[1,1′-biphenyl]-4-yl)benzamide(46)

In a similar procedure of making compound 37, compound 46 was preparedfrom intermediate 15 by coupling with 45.

Example 17 Preparation of4-chloro-N-(4-(7-methylimidazo[1,2-a]pyridin-6-yl)-3-nitrophenyl)benzamide(48)

Similarly, compound 48 was prepared from intermediate 15 and reagent 47.

Example 18 Preparation of4-chloro-N-(4-(imidazo[1,2-a]pyridin-6-yl)-3-nitrophenyl)benzamide (50)

Similarly, compound 50 was prepared from intermediate 15 and reagent 49.

Example 19 Preparation ofN-(3-amino-4-(7-methylimidazo[1,2-a]pyridin-6-yl)phenyl)-4-chlorobenzamide(51)

In a similar procedure of making compound 35, compound 51 was preparedby reduction of compound 48 with stannous chloride dihydrate.

Example 20 Preparation ofN-[4-(5-chloro-2-methylbenzoxazol-6-yl)phenyl](2-fluorophenyl)carboxamide(57)

Preparation of 2-amino-5-bromo-4-chlorophenol (53)

To a suspension of 4-bromo-3-chloro-6-methoxyaniline (52) (5 g, 21.1mmol) in 50 ml DCM was added 1 M BBr₃ in DCM (43 ml, 43 mmol) at 0° C.The reaction mixture was stirred at r.t. for 3 h, which turned to alight brown solution and back to a light brown suspension. Afterquenched with aq. sodium bicarbonate solution, the mixture was extractedwith EA. The org. phase was washed with brine, dried over sodiumsulfate, concentrated to dryness to give 4.746 g 53 as light brownsolid. Yield: 100%, purity>95%.

Preparation of 6-bromo-5-chloro-2-methylbenzoxazole (54)

A mixture of 2-amino-5-bromo-4-chlorophenol (53) (4.746 g, 21.1 mmol),trifluoromethanesulfonic acid Ytterbium (III) salt (130 mg, 1% mol) andtrimethyl orthoformate (4.03 ml, 1.5 eq.) in 15 ml EtOH was heated at90° C. for 1 h. After cooling down to r.t. Crystalline formed wasfiltered, washed with MeOH, dried to give 4.694 g 54 as pale brown fineneedles (yield: 90.3%)

Preparation of 4-(5-chloro-2-methylbenzoxazol-6-yl)phenylamine (56)

A mixture of 6-bromo-5-chloro-2-methylbenzoxazole (54) (160 mg, 0.65mmol), anilin-5-boronic acid hydrochloride salt (55) (135 mg, 1.2 eq),Bis(di-tert-butyl(4-dimethylaminophenyl)phosphine)dichloropalladium (II)(A-Phos) (46 mg, 0.1 mmol) and K₃PO₄ (165 mg) in 2 ml ACN, 2 ml dioxaneand 0.5 ml H₂O was bubbled with argon before heated at 85° C. for 2 h.After cooling down to r.t., the reaction mixture was taken up in EA,washed with aq. NaHCO₃ and brine, dried over Na₂SO₄, concentrated todryness. The resulting red solid was dissolved in DCM and subjected tosilica gel column purification using 0-60% B (A: hexane; B: 50% EA inhexane) to furnish 70.6 mg 56 as yellow solid (yield: 42%)

Preparation ofN-[4-(5-chloro-2-methylbenzoxazol-6-yl)phenyl](2-fluorophenyl)carboxamide(57)

To a solution of 4-(5-chloro-2-methylbenzoxazol-6-yl)phenylamine (56)(23 mg, 0.089 mmol) and 2 mg DMAP in 2 ml DCM was added 2-fluorobenzoylchloride (214.0.18 mmol) followed by addition of DIEA (78 μl). Theresulting brown solution was stirred at r.t. for 3 h. The reactionmixture was worked up with aq. NaHCO₃/DCM. DCM phase was washed withbrine, concentrated to dryness. The residue was dissolved in 2 mlTHF/MeOH/H₂O (5:4:1) and stirred with 1N NaOH (200 μl) at r.t. for 2 hbefore worked up with EA/aq. NaHCO₃. Silica gel flash chromatographyfurnished 19.5 mg 57 as off-white solid. (yield: 57.5%).

Example 21 Preparation of(2,6-difluorophenyl)-N-[4-(5-chloro-2-methylbenzoxazol-6-yl)phenyl]carboxamide(58)

In a similar procedure as described above,(2,6-difluorophenyl)-N-[4-(5-chloro-2-methylbenzoxazol-6-yl)phenyl]carboxamide(58) (yield: 65.6%) as white solid was prepared from4-(5-chloro-2-methylbenzoxazol-6-yl)phenylamine (56) by reacting with2,6-difluorobenzoyl chloride.

Example 22 Preparation ofN-[4-(5-chloro-2-methylbenzoxazol-6-yl)phenyl](2-chlorophenyl)carboxamide(59)

In a similar procedure as described above,N-[4-(5-chloro2-methylbenzoxazol-6-yl)phenyl](2-chlorophenyl)carboxamide(59) (yield: 61.4%) was prepared from4-(5-chloro-2-methylbenzoxazol-6-yl)phenylamine (56) by reacting with2-chlorobenzoyl chloride as white solid.

Example 23 Preparation ofN-[5-(5-chloro-2-methylbenzoxazol-6-yl)phenyl](3-fluoro(4-pyridyl))carboxamide(60)

A suspension of 3-fluoroisonicotinic acid (20 mg, 0.14 mmol),2-chloro-4,6-dimethoxy-1,3,5-triazine (CDMT)(28 mg, 0.16 mmol) and 40 μlN-methyl morpholine in 1 ml DCM was stirred at r.t. for 1 h beforeaddition of 56 (20 mg, 0.078 mmol). The resulting reaction mixture wasstirred at r.t. for overnight. The reaction mixture was worked up withaq. NaHCO₃/EA. Org. phase was washed with brine, concentrated, subjectedto silica flash column chromatography to furnish 28.5 mg title compound60 as off-white solid. (Yield: 95.7%).

Example 24 Preparation of(3,5-difluoro(4-pyridyl))-N-[4-(5-chloro-2-methylbenzoxazol-6-yl)phenyl]carboxamide(61)

In a similar procedure as described above,(3,5-difluoro(4-pyridyl))-N-[4-(5-chloro2-methylbenzoxazol-6-yl)phenyl]carboxamide(61) was prepared from 4-(5-chloro-2-methylbenzoxazol-6-yl)phenylamine(56) by reacting with 3,5-difluoroisonicotinic acid.

Example 25 Preparation ofN-[4-(5-chloro-2-methylbenzoxazol-6-yl)phenyl](4-methyl(1,2,3-thiadiazol-5-yl))carboxamide(62)

In a similar procedure as described above,N-[4-(5-chloro-2-methylbenzoxazol-6-yl)phenyl](4-methyl(1,2,3-thiadiazol-5-yl))carboxamide(62) was prepared from 4-(5-chloro-2-methylbenzoxazol-6-yl)phenylamine(56) by reacting with 4-methyl-1,2,3-thiadiazole-5-carboxylic acid.

Example 26 Preparation of(2,6-difluorophenyl)-N-[4-(1-methyl-3-(2-thienyl)pyrazol-5-yl)phenyl]carboxamide(67) Preparation of 1-Methyl-3-thienylpyrazol-5-yl boronic acid (65)

To a solution of 63 (1.5 g, 10 mmol) in THF (50 mL) was added NaH (1.2g, 50 mmol). The mixture was stirred for 1 h and the MeI (2.8 g, 20mmol) was added in one potion. The reaction mixture was stirred for 18 hat room temperature. The reaction was quenched with MeOH and solvent wasremoved in vacuo. The residue was treated with water and EtOAc. Theorganic layer was separated and aqueous was extracted with EtOAc. Thecombined organic phase was dried over Na₂SO₄, filtered, concentrated togive crude product. The crude product was purified on ISCO columnsFractions containing pure product were combined and evaporated. Theyellow oil 64 (1.5 g, 91%) was obtained.

A solution of 64 (395 mg, 2.4 mmol) in THF (5 ml) was cooled at −78° C.followed by adding 2.5 M n-BuLi (1.4 mL, 3.6 mmol). The mixture wasstirred for 4 h at −78° C. and the trimethyl borate (0.4 mL, 3.6 mmol)was added. The reaction mixture was warmed up to room temperature andstirred overnight. The reaction was quenched with 1M HCl and stirred for0.5 h. The mixture was extracted with EtOAc (20 mL×2). The organic phasewas washed with 1M NaOH. The aqueous was acetfied with conc. HCl andextracted with EtOAc. The combined organic phase was dried over Na₂SO₄,filtered, concentrated to give boronic acid 65 (316.8 mg, 63%) as yellowsolid.

Preparation of 4-(1-methyl-3-(2-thienyl)pyrazol-5-yl)phenylamine (66)

The boronic acid 65 (168 mg, 0.8 mmol) and 4-bromoaniline (138 mg, 0.8mmol) was dissolved in 1 mL dimethoxyethane and 1 mL EtOH. The 3 ml of 1M Na₂CO₃ was added and the mixture was bubbled with Ar for 1 min beforeadd Pd(Ph₃P)₄ (100 mg, 0.08 mmol). The reaction was heated at 110° C.for 0.5 h under the microwave irradiation. The reaction mixture wasworked-up with EtOAc extraction and product was purified by flash columnand afforded 66 (42 mg, 21%) as yellow solid.

Preparation of(2,6-difluorophenyl)-N-[4-(1-methyl-3-(2-thienyl)pyrazol-5-yl)phenyl]carboxamide(67)

To a solution of 66 (20 mg, 0.08 mmol) in CH₂Cl₂ (10 ml) was addedN,N-diisopropylethylamine (DIEA, 26 mg, 36 μL, 0.2 mmol),4-dimethylaminopyridine (DMAP, 0.6 mg, 0.05 mmol). The2,6-difluorobenzoy chloride (15 mg, 0.08 mmol) was dropped into abovesolution. The mixture was stirred for 2 h at room temperature. Thereaction was quenched with saturated NaHCO₃ (20 ml) and extracted withEtOAc. The dicarboxamide was hydrolyzed with 1M NaOH in THF and MeOH(1:1). The product was purified by HPLC and afforded 67 (20.5 mg, 65%)as yellow solid. LC-MS: calcd. for C₂₁H₁₅F₂N₃OS: 396 (M+1). ¹H NMR(DMSO-d₆) δ 3.86 (s, 3H), 6.77 (s, 1H), 7.08-7.10 (m, 1H), 7.26-7.29 (m,2H), 7.42 (dd, 1H, J=0.88, 3.5), 7.42 (dd, 1H, J=0.88, 4.9), 7.59 (d,2H, J=8.6), 7.62-7.63 (m, 1H), 7.83 (d, 2H, J=8.6), 11.00 (s, 1H).

Example 27 Preparation of(2,6-difluorophenyl)-N-[4-(1-methyl-3-(2-furyl)pyrazol-5-yl)phenyl]carboxamide(72) Preparation of 1-Methyl-3-furylpyrazol-5-yl boronic acid (70)

To a solution of 68 (1.4 g, 10.4 mmol) in THF (50 mL) was added NaH (2.4g, 100 mmol). The mixture was stirred for 1 h and the Met (3 g, 21 mmol)was added in one potion. The reaction mixture was stirred for 18 h atroom temperature. The reaction was quenched with MeOH and solvent wasremoved in vacuo. The residue was treated with water and EtOAc. Theorganic layer was separated and aqueous was extracted with EtOAc. Thecombined organic phase was dried over Na₂SO₄, filtered, concentrated togive crude product. The crude product was purified on ISCO columnsFractions containing pure product were combined and evaporated. Theyellow oil 69 (1.45 g, 94%) was obtained.

A solution of 69 (670 mg, 4.5 mmol) in THF (20 ml) was cooled at −78° C.followed by adding 2.5 M n-BuLi (3.6 mL, 9 mmol). The mixture wasstirred for 4 h at −78° C. and the trimethyl borate (1 mL, 9 mmol) wasadded. The reaction mixture was warmed up to room temperature andstirred overnight. The reaction was quenched with 1M HCl and stirred for0.5 h. The mixture was extracted with EtOAc (20 mL×2). The organic phasewas washed with 1M NaOH. The aqueous was acetfied with con. HCl andextracted with EtOAc. The combined organic phase was dried over Na₂SO₄,filtered, concentrated to give boronic acid 70 (343 mg, 40%) as yellowsolid.

Preparation of 4-(1-methyl-3-(2-furyl)pyrazol-5-yl)phenylamine (71)

The boronic acid 70 (160 mg, 0.83 mmol) and 4-bromoaniline (143 mg, 0.83mmol) was dissolved in 1 mL dimethoxyethane and 1 mL EtOH. The 3 ml of 1M Na₂CO₃ was added and the mixture was bubbled with Ar for 1 min beforeadd Pd(Ph₃P)₄ (100 mg, 0.08 mmol). The reaction was heated at 110° C.for 0.5 h under the microwave irradiation. The reaction mixture wasworked-up with EtOAc extraction and product was purified by flash columnand afforded 71 (21 mg, 11%) as yellow solid.

Preparation of(2,6-difluorophenyl)-N-[4-(1-methyl-3-(2-furyl)pyrazol-5-yl)phenyl]carboxamide(72)

To a solution of 71 (11 mg, 0.05 mmol) in CH₂Cl₂ (10 ml) was addedN,N-diisopropylethylamine (DIEA, 26 mg, 36 μL, 0.2 mmol),4-dimethylaminopyridine (DMAP, 0.6 mg, 0.05 mmol). The2,6-difluorobenzoy chloride (15 mg, 0.08 mmol) was dropped into abovesolution. The mixture was stirred for 2 h at room temperature. Thereaction was quenched with saturated NaHCO₃ (20 ml) and extracted withEtOAc. The dicarboxamide was hydrolyzed with 1M NaOH in THF and MeOH(1:1). The product was purified by HPLC and afforded 72 (5 mg, 28%) asyellow solid. LC-MS: calcd. for C₂₁H₁₅F₂N₃O2: 380 (M+1).

Example 28 Preparation ofN-[3-amino-4-(1,3,5-trimethylpyrazol-4-yl)phenyl](4-chlorophenyl)carboxamide(77) Preparation of 4-(1,3,5-trimethylpyrazol-4-yl)benzene-1,3-diamine(76)

The boronic acid 73 (236 mg, 1 mmol) and 74 (296 mg, 1.2 mmol) wasdissolved in 5 mL dimethoxyethane and 5 mL EtOH. The 2 ml of 2 M Na₂CO₃was added and the mixture was bubbled with Ar for 1 min before addPd(Ph₃P)₄ (116 mg, 0.1 mmol). The reaction was heated at 110° C. for 0.5h under the microwave irradiation. The reaction mixture was worked-upwith EtOAc extraction and product was purified by flash column andafforded 75 as yellow solid. The compound 75 was transferred to 76 (119mg, 55%) using hydrogenation.

Preparation ofN-[3-amino-4-(1,3,5-trimethylpyrazol-4-yl)phenyl](4-chlorophenyl)carboxamide(77)

To a solution of 76 (119.4 mg, 0.55 mmol) in CH₂Cl₂ (20 ml) was addedN,N-diisopropylethylamine (DIEA, 258 mg, 348 μL, 2 mmol),4-dimethylaminopyridine (DMAP, 0.6 mg, 0.05 mmol). The 4-chlorobenzoychloride (96 mg, 0.55 mmol) was dropped into above solution. The mixturewas stirred for 2 h at room temperature. The reaction was quenched withsaturated NaHCO₃ (40 ml) and extracted with EtOAc. The dicarboxamide washydrolyzed with 1M NaOH in THF and MeOH (1:1). The product was purifiedby HPLC and afforded 77 (49 mg, 25%) as yellow solid. LC-MS: calcd. forC₁₉H₁₉ClN₄O: 355 (M+1).

Example 29 Preparation ofN-(4-(6-bromobenzo[d][1,3]dioxol-5-yl)phenyl)-2,6-difluorobenzamide (81)

Preparation of 4-(6-bromobenzo[d][1,3]dioxol-5-yl)aniline (80)

Palladium tetrakis-triphenylphosphine (67 mg, 58 μmol) was added to adegassed solution of bromide 78 (323 mg, 1.15 mmol) and boronic acid 79(200 mg, 1.15 mmol) in dioxane:acetonitrile:water (9:9:2, 7.6 mL) andpotassium carbonate (679 mg, 3.2 mmol). The resulting mixture was heatedunder argon at 90° C. with stirring for 1 h. The mixture was thencooled, diluted with dichloromethane (9 mL), dried with sodium sulfateand concentrated under reduced pressure. Flash chromatography (ISCOsystem, silica, 0-2.5% methanol in dichloromethane) provided 80 (150 mg,45%) as a solid: LRESIMS m/z 292.1 [M+H]⁺, calcd. for C₁₃H₁₁Br₁N₁O₂292.0.

Preparation ofN-(4-(6-bromobenzo[d][1,3]dioxol-5-yl)phenyl)-2,6-difluorobenzamide (81)

Under an atmosphere of argon, 2,6-difluorobenzoyl chloride (113 mg, 640μmol) was added to a stirred solution of 80 (125 mg, 430 μmol) andHünig's base (224 μL, 166 mg, 1.28 mmol) in dichloromethane (2.1 mL) atroom temperature. The reaction was stirred for 0.5 h. The solution wasdiluted with tetrahydrofuran (2 mL), methanol (2 mL) and 1.2 M lithiumhydroxide solution (1 mL). The mixture was stirred and heated to 60° C.for 5 min then cooled to room temperature, diluted with dichloromethaneand dried with sodium sulfate. The mixture was concentrated underreduced pressure. Flash chromatography (ISCO system, silica, 0-50% ethylacetate in hexane) provided 81 (99.2 mg, 54%) as a solid: LRESIMS m/z432.0 [M+H]⁺, calcd. for C₂₀H₁₃Br₁F₂N₁O₃ 432.0.

Example 30 Preparation ofN-(4-(6-bromobenzo[d][1,3]dioxol-5-yl)phenyl)-2-chlorobenzamide (82)

In a similar procedure to that described above,N-(4-(6-bromobenzo[d][1,3]dioxol-5-yl)phenyl)-2-chlorobenzamide (82) wasprepared from 4-(6-bromobenzo[d][1,3]dioxol-5-yl)aniline (80) byreacting with 2-chlorobenzoyl chloride.

Example 31 Preparation ofN-(4-(7-bromo-2,3-dihydrobenzo[b][1,4]dioxin-6-yl)phenyl)-2,6-difluorobenzamide(86)

Preparation of 4-(7-bromo-2,3-dihydrobenzo[b][1,4]dioxin-6-yl)aniline(85)

Palladium tetrakis-triphenylphosphine (20 mg, 17 μmol) was added to adegassed solution of bromide 83 (100 mg, 340 μmol) and boronate 84 (82mg, 374 μmol) in dioxane:acetonitrile:water (9:9:2, 1.7 mL) andpotassium carbonate (108 mg, 510 μmol). The resulting mixture was heatedunder argon at 80° C. with stirring for 2 h. The mixture was thencooled, diluted with dichloromethane (10 mL), dried with sodium sulfateand concentrated under reduced pressure. Flash chromatography (ISCOsystem, silica, 0-50% ethyl acetate in hexane) provided 85 (50 mg, 48%)as a solid: LRESIMS m/z 306.1 [M+H]⁺, calcd. for C₁₄H₁₃Br₁N₁O₂ 306.0.

Preparation ofN-(4-(7-bromo-2,3-dihydrobenzo[b][1,4]dioxin-6-yl)phenyl)-2,6-difluorobenzamide(86)

Under an atmosphere of argon, 2,6-difluorobenzoyl chloride (22 mg, 122μmol) was added to a stirred solution of 85 (25 mg, 82 μmol) and Hünig'sbase (43 μL, 32 mg, 245 μmol) in dichloromethane (0.4 mL) at roomtemperature. The reaction was stirred for 20 min. The solution wasdiluted with tetrahydrofuran (1 mL), methanol (1 mL) and 1.2 M lithiumhydroxide solution (0.5 mL). The mixture was stirred and heated to 60°C. for 10 min then cooled to room temperature, diluted withdichloromethane and dried with sodium sulfate. The mixture wasconcentrated under reduced pressure. Flash chromatography (ISCO system,silica, 0-20% ethyl acetate in hexane) then HPLC (C18, 30×250 mm column,40-100% acetonitrile in water: 0.035% CF₃COOH: 50 mL/min) provided 86(15.9 mg, 44%) as a solid: LRESIMS m/z 446.1 [M+H]⁺, calcd. forC₂₁H₁₅Br₁F₂N₁O₃ 446.0.

Example 32 Preparation ofN-(4-(7-bromo-2,3-dihydrobenzo[b][1,4]dioxin-6-yl)phenyl)-2-chlorobenzamide(87)

In a similar procedure to that described above,N-(4-(7-bromo-2,3-dihydrobenzo[b][1,4]dioxin-6-yl)phenyl)-2-chlorobenzamide(87) was prepared from4-(7-bromo-2,3-dihydrobenzo[b][1,4]dioxin-6-yl)aniline (85) by reactingwith 2-chlorobenzoyl chloride.

Example 33 Preparation ofN-(4-(6-chloro-2,2-difluorobenzo[d][1,3]dioxol-5-yl)phenyl)-2,6-difluorobenzamide(90)

Preparation of 4-(6-chloro-2,2-difluorobenzo[d][1,3]dioxol-5-yl)aniline(89)

Palladium tetrakis-triphenylphosphine (21 mg, 18 μmol) was added to adegassed solution of bromide 88 (100 mg, 1368 μmol) and boronate 84 (121mg, 553 μmol) in dioxane: acetonitrile: water (9:9:2, 1.8 mL) andpotassium carbonate (117 mg, 553 μmol). The resulting mixture was heatedunder argon at 80° C. with stirring for 2 h. The mixture was thencooled, diluted with dichloromethane (10 mL), dried with sodium sulfateand concentrated under reduced pressure. Flash chromatography (ISCOsystem, silica, 0-50% ethyl acetate in hexane) provided 89 (129 mg, 61%)as a solid: LRESIMS m/z 284.1 [M+H]⁺, calcd. for C₁₃H₉Cl₁F₂N₁O₂ 284.0.

Preparation ofN-(4-(6-chloro-2,2-difluorobenzo[d][1,3]dioxol-5-yl)phenyl)-2,6-difluorobenzamide(90)

Under an atmosphere of argon, 2,6-difluorobenzoyl chloride (23 mg, 132μmol) was added to a stirred solution of 89 (25 mg, 88 μmol) and Hünig'sbase (46 μL, 34 mg, 264 μmol) in dichloromethane (440 μL) at roomtemperature. The reaction was stirred for 0.5 h. The solution wasdiluted with tetrahydrofuran (1 mL), methanol (1 mL) and 1.2 M lithiumhydroxide solution (0.5 mL). The mixture was stirred and heated to 60°C. for 10 min then cooled to room temperature, diluted withdichloromethane and dried with sodium sulfate. The mixture wasconcentrated under reduced pressure. Flash chromatography (ISCO system,silica, 0-20% ethyl acetate in hexane) provided 90 (12.2 mg, 33%) as asolid: LRESIMS m/z 424.1 [M+H]⁺, calcd. for C₂₀H₁₁Cl₁F₄N₁O₃ 424.0.

Example 34 Preparation of2-chloro-N-(4-(6-chloro-2,2-difluorobenzo[d][1,3]dioxol-5-yl)phenyl)benzamide(91)

In a similar procedure to that described above,2-chloro-N-(4-(6-chloro-2,2-difluorobenzo[d][1,3]dioxol-5-yl)phenyl)benzamide(91) was prepared from4-(6-chloro-2,2-difluorobenzo[d][1,3]dioxol-5-yl)aniline (89) byreacting with 2-chlorobenzoyl chloride.

Example 35 Preparation ofN-(4-(6-chloro-2,2-difluorobenzo[d][1,3]dioxol-5-yl)phenyl)-2,6-difluorobenzamide(96)

Preparation of 6-bromo-5-chlorobenzo[e][1,2,5]oxadiazole 1-oxide (93)

Potassium hydroxide (670 mg, 12 mmol) was added to a solution of bromide92 (1.0 g, 4.0 mmol) in ethanol (20 mL). The resulting mixture washeated at 60° C. with stirring for 2 h. The mixture was then cooled inan ice bath and NaOCl (19 mL of a 10-15% sol, 1.2 g, 16 mmol) was added.The reaction was warmed to room temperature and stirred for 2 h. Thesolution was diluted with water (150 mL) and filtered to provided crude93 (904 mg) as an oil.

Preparation of 5-bromo-6-chlorobenzo[e][1,2,5]oxadiazole (94)

P(OEt)₃ (0.9 mL, 903 mg, 5.4 mmol) was added to a solution of bromide 93(904 mg, 3.6 mmol) in ethanol at 79° C. The resulting mixture wasstirred at 79° C. for 4 h. The mixture was then cooled in an ice bathand NaOCl (19 mL of a 10-15% sol, 1.2 g, 16 mmol) was added. Thesolution was cooled and concentrated under reduced pressure to providedcrude 94.

Preparation of 4-(6-chlorobenzo[e][1,2,5]oxadiazol-5-yl)aniline (95)

Palladium tetrakis-triphenylphosphine (37 mg, 32 μmol) was added to adegassed solution of bromide 94 (150 mg, 643 μmol) and boronate 84 (211mg, 964 μmol) in dioxane:acetonitrile:water (9:9:2, 3.2 mL) andpotassium carbonate (205 mg, 964 μmol). The resulting mixture was heatedunder argon at 95° C. with stirring for 1 h. The mixture was thencooled, diluted with dichloromethane (25 mL), dried with sodium sulfateand concentrated under reduced pressure. Flash chromatography (ISCOsystem, silica, 0-50% ethyl acetate in hexane) provided 95 (35 mg, 22%)as a solid: LRESIMS m/z 246.0 [M+H]⁺, calcd. for C₁₂H₉ClN₃O₁ 246.0.

Preparation ofN-(4-(6-chloro-2,2-difluorobenzo[d][1,3]dioxol-5-yl)phenyl)-2,6-difluorobenzamide(96)

Under an atmosphere of argon, 2,6-difluorobenzoyl chloride (12 mg, 67μmol) was added to a stirred solution of 95 (11 mg, 45 μmol) and Hünig'sbase (23 μL, 17 mg, 134 μmol) in dichloromethane (400 μL) at roomtemperature. The reaction was stirred for 15 min. The solution wasdiluted with tetrahydrofuran (1 mL), methanol (1 mL) and 1.2 M lithiumhydroxide solution (0.5 mL). The mixture was stirred and heated to 60°C. for 20 min then cooled to room temperature, diluted withdichloromethane and dried with sodium sulfate. The mixture wasconcentrated under reduced pressure. Flash chromatography (ISCO system,silica, 0-50% ethyl acetate in hexane) provided 96 (10.9 mg, 63%) as asolid: LRESIMS m/z 386.0 [M+H]⁺, calcd. for C₁₉H₁₁Cl₁F₂N₃O₂ 386.1.

Example 36 Preparation of2-chloro-N-(4-(6-chlorobenzo[e][1,2,5]oxadiazol-5-yl)phenyl)benzamide(97)

In a similar procedure to that described above,2-chloro-N-(4-(6-chlorobenzo[c][1,2,5]oxadiazol-5-yl)phenyl)benzamide(97) was prepared from 4-(6-chlorobenzo[c][1,2,5]oxadiazol-5-yl)aniline(95) by reacting with 2-chlorobenzoyl chloride.

Example 37 Preparation ofN-(4-(6-chlorobenzo[c][1,2,5]oxadiazol-5-yl)phenyl)-2-fluorobenzamide(98)

In a similar procedure to that described above,N-(4-(6-chlorobenzo[c][1,2,5]oxadiazol-5-yl)phenyl)-2-fluorobenzamide(98) was prepared from 4-(6-chlorobenzo[c][1,2,5]oxadiazol-5-yl)aniline(95) by reacting with 2-fluorobenzoyl chloride.

In Vitro Examples Example 38 In Vitro Screening for Agents that ModulateIntracellular Calcium Levels

Fluorescence-based assays are used for screening the compounds describedherein, such as compounds of Formula (I), (IA), (II), (IIA), (III),(IIIA), (IV), (IVA), (V), (VA), (VI), (VIA), (VII), or (VIIA) whichmodulate intracellular calcium.

A. Fluorescence-Based Assay of Store-Operated Calcium Entry inOrai1/STIM1 Stable Cells.

Cells:

Cells stably expressing recombinant human STIM1 and Orai1 are generatedby transfecting a human Orai1 expression plasmid (pcDNA3.1-Orai1-cmyc)into HEK-293 cells stably overexpressing human STIM1 (Roos et al. 2005JCB 169(3): 435-445). Colonies of cells stably expressing both STIM1 andOrai1 proteins are selected and then subcloned by limiting dilution.Cells were cultured at 37° C./6% CO₂ in complete medium with 10% FBS andappropriate selection markers.

Assay

The day prior to performing the assay Orai1/STIM1 stable cells areplated in 50 μL of complete medium at 90-95% confluence in a 384 wellplate. Cells are grown at 37° C./6% CO₂ overnight. On the day of theassay, 1.5 μM fluo-4-AM (Invitrogen) in complete medium is added to thecells, which are then incubated for 1 hour at RT. Cells are washed oncein Ca²⁺-free HBSS (Hank's buffered saline solution) and 35 μl ofCa²⁺-free HBSS is added to each well. Test compounds are added to wellsin a 10 μL Ca²⁺-free HBSS solution, prepared at 4.5× the desired finalconcentration, and incubated for 30 minutes at RT. The initial baselinefluorescence signal is then measured with a FLIPR³⁸⁴ (Molecular Devices)plate reader. Calcium entry is initiated by adding 5 μl of 10×CaCl₂ (10mM) in HBSS, and changes in cellular fluorescence are measured with theFLIPR³⁸⁴ plate reader. In each well, the magnitude of the fluorescencesignal as a result of calcium entry into the cell is determined bycalculating the difference between the peak fluorescence signal measuredafter calcium addition and the initial baseline fluorescence signal(designated Peak-Basal). IC₅₀ values are typically calculated as theconcentration that inhibited 50% of the Peak-Basal signal.

B. Fluorescence-Based Assay of Store-Operated Calcium Entry in RBL-2H3Cells.

Cells:

RBL-2H3 cells are obtained from ATCC and maintained in complete mediumwith 10% FBS at 37° C./6% CO₂.

Assay:

The day prior to performing the assay, RBL-2H3 cells are plated in 50 μLof complete medium in a 384 well plate. Cells are grown at 37° C./6% CO₂overnight and grow to 50-60% confluence by the next day. On the assayday, 1.5 μM Fluo-4-AM dye (Invitrogen) in complete medium is added andincubated for 1 hour at RT. Cells are washed twice in Ca²⁺-free HBSSbuffer and 35 μL Ca²⁺-free HBSS buffer is added to each well. 10 μL of atest compound prepared in a Ca²⁺-free HBSS solution at 4.5× of thedesired concentration is added to a well and incubated for 5 minutes atRT. 10 μL of thapsigargin prepared in a Ca²⁺-free HBSS solution at 5.5×of the desired concentration (5.5 uM) is added to each well andincubated for an additional 25 minutes. The initial baselinefluorescence signal is measured with a FLIPR³⁸⁴ (Molecular Devices)plate reader. 5 μL of 12× calcium in HBSS (12 mM) is added and changesin cellular fluorescence are measured with the FLIPR³⁸⁴ plate reader. Ineach well, the change in the fluorescent signal as a function of timedue to calcium entry into the cell is determined by calculating thedifference between the fluorescent signal measured 7 seconds aftercalcium addition and the initial baseline fluorescence signal at timezero (t=0). This parameter is designated Upslope. The IC₅₀ value iscalculated as the concentration at which 50% of the Upslope isinhibited.

C. Fluorescence-Based Assay of Store-Operated Calcium Entry in JurkatCells.

Cells:

Jurkat E6-1 cells are obtained from ATCC and maintained in completemedium with 10% FBS at 37° C./6% CO₂.

Assay:

The day prior to performing the assay, Jurkat E6-1 cells are seeded at adensity of 2 million cells/mL in complete medium in a T-175 flask. Cellsare grown at 37° C./6% CO₂ overnight. On the following day, 1.5 μMFluo-4-AM dye (Invitrogen) in complete medium is added and incubated for1 hour at RT. Cells are harvested, washed twice in Ca²⁺-free HBSS bufferand plated in 35 μL Ca²⁺-free HBSS buffer in a 384 well plate. 10 μL ofa test compound prepared in a Ca²⁺-free HBSS solution at 4.5× of thedesired concentration is added to a well and incubated for 5 minutes atRT. 10 μL of thapsigargin prepared in a Ca²⁺-free HBSS solution at 5.5×of the desired concentration (5.5 uM) is added to each well andincubated for an additional 25 minutes. The initial baselinefluorescence signal is measured with a FLIPR³⁸⁴ (Molecular Devices)plate reader. 5 μL of 12× calcium in HBSS (12 mM) is added and changesin cellular fluorescence are measured with the FLIPR³⁸⁴ plate reader. Ineach well, the change in the fluorescent signal as a function of timedue to calcium entry into the cell is determined by calculating thedifference between the fluorescent signal measured 7 seconds aftercalcium addition and the initial baseline fluorescence signal at timezero (t=0). This parameter is designated Upslope. The IC₅₀ value iscalculated as the concentration at which 50% of the Upslope isinhibited.

Example 39 In Vitro I_(CRAC) Patch Clamp Assay

Objective

The objective of this assay is to examine the in vitro effects ofcompounds having the structure of Formula (I), (IA), (II), (IIA), (III),(IIIA), (IV), (IVA), (V), (VA), (VI), (VIA), (VII), or (VIIA) on clonedCRAC channels (Orai1 and STIM1 genes stably expressed in HEK293 cells),responsible for I_(CRAC), the calcium release activated calcium channelcurrent.

Test and Control Articles

Formulation: Test article stock solutions are prepared in dimethylsulfoxide (DMSO) and stored frozen. Test article concentrations areprepared fresh daily by diluting stock solutions into an appropriateexternal recording buffer. If necessary, test article formulations aresonicated (Model 2510, Branson Ultrasonics, Danbury, Conn.), at ambientroom temperature to facilitate dissolution. In certain instances, thetest solutions contain up to 0.1% DMSO and the presence of 0.1% DMSOdoes not affect channel current.

Test Article Concentrations and Quantity

Typically, the effects of three (3) concentrations of each test articleare evaluated (0.1, 1, and 10 μM). Test articles are weighed andprepared as 30 mM or 10 mM stock solutions in DMSO. The DMSO stock isdiluted in external recording buffer to prepare a 10 μM test solution(final DMSO 0.03% or 0.1%). The 10 μM test solution is diluted inexternal recording buffer to prepare 1 μM and 0.1 μM test solutions.Test solutions contain up to 0.1% DMSO at the highest concentrationwhich are diluted in test solutions at lower concentrations.

Positive Control Article

Stock solutions of the positive control article are prepared in batches,aliquoted for individual use, stored frozen and used within six months.The positive control concentration is prepared fresh daily by dilutingstock solutions into external recording buffer. The final DMSOconcentration in the test positive control article is up to 0.1% of thesolution.

Negative Control Article

The negative control article is 0.1% DMSO in external recording buffer.

Cloned Ion Channel Test Systems

Cells are maintained in tissue culture incubators per CalciMedicastandard protocols. Stocks are maintained in cryogenic storage. Cellsused for electrophysiology are plated in plastic tissue culture dishes.

HEK293 Cells

HEK293 cells are stably transfected with the appropriate ion channelcDNAs (Orai1/STIM1). Cells are cultured in DMEM (Gibco 11960)supplemented with 10% fetal bovine serum (Gibco 10082), 100 U/mLpenicillin G sodium, 1 mM Na pyruvate (Gibco 11360), 100 μg/mLstreptomycin sulfate (Gibco 10378), 0.5 mg/ml geneticin (Gibco10131-035) and 50 μg/ml zeocin (Invitrogen 45-0430). Cells should bemaintained at ≦80% confluence. The day before testing, cells in culturedishes are washed once with calcium/magnesium-free D-PBS, treated withtrypsin/EDTA and re-suspended in the culture media and counted. Cellsare then diluted in culture medium with 1% fetal bovine serum and platedat low density (5-10K) onto poly-D-lysine coated glass coverslips in24-well tissue culture dishes and placed in a tissue culture incubatorset at 37° C. in a humidified 95% air, 6% CO₂ atmosphere.

Test Methods

Recording Chamber and Perfusion of Test Articles

Glass coverslips containing cells are transferred to a recording chamber(Warner Instruments) with continuous perfusion of external recordingbuffer. During recordings of I_(CRAC), all treatments are delivered bygravity-fed bath perfusion from disposable syringe reservoirs viadisposable polyethylene tubing feeding into a Teflon manifold. The flowrate is set between 1.2-1.5 ml/min assuring complete solution exchangein ˜1 min. All experiments are performed at ambient temperature.

Test Article Treatment Groups

For experiments where the test article is applied for 10 minutes thetreatment paradigm is summarized in Table 2. Control recording buffer isperfused for five (5) minutes while I_(CRAC) develops and a stablebaseline is established; each cell is used as its own control. Each testarticle is applied to naïve cells (n≧2, where n=the numbercells/concentration; at 1 concentration/cell) for a duration of ten (10)minutes (Table 2). The test article is washed off for ten (10) minutesto look for reversibility of the effect. External recording saline withno calcium is perfused for two (2) minutes to determine the backgroundcurrent in the absence of I_(CRAC). Control saline containing calcium isreapplied for three (3) minutes.

For experiments where the test article is applied for 30 minutes priorto recording of I_(CRAC), the treatment paradigm is summarized in Table3. Prior to the start of each experiment, cells are incubated withcompound for 30 minutes at room temperature, and compound remainspresent throughout I_(CRAC) recordings. Control cells are exposed tovehicle only. After break-in and establishment of the whole-cell patchclamp configuration, recording buffer±compound is perfused for ten (10)minutes. At the end of the 10 min period the amplitude of I_(CRAC) ismeasured. The effects of compounds are determined by comparing theI_(CRAC) signal in cells pretreated with compound to the signal in cellspretreated with vehicle.

TABLE 2 Test Article Schedule for 10-minute Application Studies EpochSolution Exposure time 1 Baseline control/ 5 minutes stabilization 2Test article 10 minutes  3 Wash 10 minutes  4 0 calcium 2 minutes 5control 3 minutes

TABLE 3 Test Article Schedule for 40-minute Application Studies EpochSolution Exposure time Test article 30 minutes 1 Test article 10 minutes2 Wash 10 minutes 3 0 calcium  2 minutes 4 control  3 minutesControl Treatment Groups

As a negative control, 0.1% DMSO is applied to naïve cells (n 2, wheren=the number cells. This is used to monitor the magnitude of rundown ofI_(CRAC). As a positive control, 1 μM of4-(4-bromophenyl)-2-(3-fluorobenzamido)thiophene-3-carboxylic acid isroutinely applied to naïve cells (n≧2, where n=the number cells).

Whole Cell Patch Clamp Procedures

Standard whole cell patch clamp procedures are used. The compositions ofthe extracellular and intracellular solutions are shown in Tables 4 and5. Cells are visualized on an inverted microscope (Olympus IX71) andvoltage clamped using a Multiclamp 700B amplifier and PClamp software(Axon Instruments). Briefly, borosilicate patch pipettes filled withintracellular solution (Appendix 1) are positioned onto the cellmembrane. Once a GΩ seal is formed, suction is applied until the patchruptures and the whole cell configuration is established. The quality ofthe configuration will be evaluated with the “membrane test” in Clampexto determine cell capacitance (Cm), input resistance (Rm), accessresistance (Ra), and holding current at −50 mV (Ih). Data are stored onthe CalciMedica computer network (and backed-up nightly) for off-lineanalysis.

TABLE 4 Extracellular Solution Composition (concentration in mM) NaCl120 TEA-Cl 10 HEPES 10 CaCl2 10 (and 0) MgCl2 2 (and 12) glucose 10

The pH is adjusted to 7.2 with NaOH and the final osmolarity is adjustedto 325 with sucrose. Solutions are prepared daily. Chemicals used insolution preparation are purchased from Sigma-Aldrich (St. Louis, Mo.),unless otherwise noted, and are of ACS reagent grade purity or higher.

TABLE 5 Intracellular Solution Composition (concentration in mM)Cs-glutamate 120 HEPES 10 BAPTA 20 MgCl2 3

The pH is adjusted to 7.2 with CsOH. Solutions are prepared in batches,aliquoted, and refrigerated until use. A fresh aliquot is used each dayand stored on ice throughout the day. Chemicals used in solutionpreparation are purchased from Sigma-Aldrich (St. Louis, Mo.), unlessotherwise noted, and are of ACS reagent grade.

I_(CRAC) Test Procedures

I_(CRAC) from the Orai1/STIM1 channel complex is activated by passivedepletion of intracellular calcium stores using 20 mM BAPTA in theintracellular solution. Voltage clamp data is acquired using Clampexsoftware to elicit a stimulus voltage protocol (shown in Table 6)applied every six (6) seconds. Currents are digitized at 10 kHz andfiltered at 2 kHz. Whole cell capacitive compensation is employed.Representative I_(CRAC) traces are shown in FIG. 2.

TABLE 6 Voltage Clamp Protocol Voltage Description Vh + 30 mV tominimize calcium entry in-between sweeps Vstep to 0 mV for 10 ms toevaluate “zero” current Vstep to −100 mV for 10 ms to measure I_(CRAC)at high driving force Vramp to +100 mV over 50 ms to monitor inwardlyrectifying profile of I_(CRAC) Vstep to +50 mV for 10 ms to estimateleak currentData Analysis

Data analysis is performed using Clampfit software. I_(CRAC) is measuredat −100 mV and the current measured after 5 min is used as the baselinecontrol. For 10-minute application studies, the current measured after10 min application of the test article is normalized to the baselinecurrent and expressed as % control. For 40-min application studies, thecurrent measured at the end of 10 minutes of I_(CRAC) recording time isused as the comparator. The current measured in “0 calcium” buffer isused to subtract background leak current. Data points for each testarticle concentration (n≧2) are fitted to a sigmoid function (SigmaPlot)to determine the IC₅₀ and Hill slope.

In Vivo Examples Example 40 In Vitro Assay of Mast Cell Degranulation

Cells:

RBL-2H3 cells are obtained from ATCC and maintained in complete mediumwith 10% FBS at 37° C./6% CO2.

Assay:

a) Stimulation with 1 μM Thapsigargin/20 nM TPA

The day prior to performing the assay, RBL-2H3 cells are plated in a 96well plate. Cells are grown at 37° C./6% CO2 overnight. On the followingday, cells are washed twice in HBSS Buffer with 1.8 mM CaCl2 and 1.75%fetal bovine serum (FBS). 70 μL of a test compound prepared in HBSSBuffer with 1.8 mM CaCl2+1.75% FBS is added and incubated for 10 minutesat 37° C./6% CO2. Cells are stimulated by the addition of 7 μL of 11×thapsigargin/TPA (11 μM thapsigargin/220 nM TPA) and incubated at 37°C./6% CO2 for 120 minutes. Media is collected and cell lysates areprepared by the addition of 70 μL of 0.05% Triton X-100 in HBSS with 1.8mM CaCl2. Levels of β-hexosaminidase are measured in both the media andthe cell lysates. The β-hexosaminidase assay is performed by adding 40μL of 1 mM p-nitrophenyl-acetyl-glucosamide substrate in 0.05M sodiumcitrate (pH 4.5) to 10 μL of sample (conditioned medium or cell lysate),incubating 60 minutes at 37° C., then adding 100 μL 0.05M sodiumcarbonate/0.05M sodium bicarbonate (pH 10.5), mixing thoroughly andreading the absorbance at 405 nm. The percentage of β-hexosaminidasereleased is calculated as follows: A405 (media)/[A405 (media)+A405(lysate)]. The IC₅₀ value is calculated as the concentration at which50% of the (3-hexosaminidase released in vehicle treated cells isinhibited.

b) Stimulation with IgE-DNP

The day prior to performing the assay, RBL-2H3 cells are plated in 200μL of complete medium in a 96 well plate for 1 hour. 20 μL of 11×DNP-IgEare added and cells are grown at 37° C./6% CO2 overnight. On thefollowing day, cells are washed twice in HBSS Buffer with 1.8 mM CaCl2and 1.75% fetal bovine serum (FBS). 70 μL of a test compound prepared inHBSS Buffer with 1.8 mM CaCl2 and 1.75% is added and incubated for 10minutes at 37° C./6% CO₂. Cells are stimulated by the addition of 7 μLof 11×DNP-BSA and incubated at 37° C./6% CO2 for 30 minutes. Media iscollected and cell lysates are prepared by the addition of 70 ul of0.05% Triton X-100 in HBSS with 1.8 mM CaCl₂. Levels of β-hexosaminidaseare measured in both the media and the cell lysates. Theβ-hexosaminidase assay is performed by adding 40 μL of 1 mMp-nitrophenyl-acetyl-glucosamide substrate in 0.05M sodium citrate (pH4.5) to 10 μL of sample (conditioned medium or cell lysate), incubating60 minutes at 37° C., then adding 100 μL 0.05M sodium carbonate/0.05Msodium bicarbonate (pH 10.5), mixing thoroughly and reading theabsorbance at 405 nm. The percentage of β-hexosaminidase released iscalculated as follows: A405 (media)/[A405 (media)+A405 (lysate)]. TheIC₅₀ value is calculated as the concentration at which 50% of theβ-hexosaminidase released in vehicle treated cells is inhibited.

Example 41 In Vitro Assay of Cytokine Release from T Cells

Cells:

Jurkat E6-1 cells are obtained from ATCC and maintained in completemedium with 10% FBS at 37° C./6% CO2.

Assay:

The day prior to performing the assay, Jurkat T cells are plated in 90μL of HBSS Buffer with 1.8 mM CaCl₂ and 1.75% fetal bovine serum (FBS)in a 96 well plate at a density of 1.5×105 cells/well for 3 hours. 10 μLof 10× test compound prepared in HBSS is added and incubated for 10minutes at 37° C./6% CO2. Cells are stimulated by the addition of 10 μLof 11× PHA/TPA (27.5 μg/mL PHA/880 nM TPA) and incubated at 37° C./6%CO₂ for 20 hours. On the following day, the supernatants are collectedand assayed for IL-2 levels by ELISA according to the manufacturer'sprotocols. The IC₅₀ value is calculated as the concentration at which50% of secreted IL-2 in vehicle treated cells is inhibited.

Example 42 Dose-Response Effects of a Compound of Formula (I), (IA),(II), (HA), (III), (IIIA), (IV), (IVA), (V), (VA), (VI), (VIA), (VII),or (VIIA), CSA or Rapamycin in Mouse Footpad DTH

Purpose: Determine dose-response effects of Test Compound on mBSAinduced DTH response in foot pads when dosing is done during thesensitization as well as induction phase.

Animals: Male Swiss Webster Mice approx. 20-25 grams at start of study.

Materials: Methylated BSA (Sigma) Freund's complete adjuvant (Difco)plus supplemental M. tuberculosis H37 RA (Difco).

General Study Design:

Mice are anesthetized with Isoflurane and given intradermal antigeninjections of 0.1 ml at the base of the tail (D0, D07). Antigen isprepared by making a 4 mg/ml solution in sterile water. Equal volumes ofantigen and Freund's complete adjuvant to which 4 mg/ml MTB are added(sonicate for 5 minutes after adding MTB to oil), are emulsified by handmixing until a bead of this material holds its form when placed inwater. Treatment with test compound is initiated on day 0, qd (24 hrintervals) and continued through day 10 when challenge is done.

On day 10 animals are injected into the right hind footpad with 20 μl of10 mg/ml mBSA. Five unsensitized males are injected with mBSA into thefootpad. Twenty-four hours later (day 11) the right and left hind pawsare transected at the medial and lateral malleolus and weighed and theweight difference induced by injection of antigen is determined.

Statistical Analysis. Paw weights (mean±SE) for each group are analyzedfor differences using a Student's t test or ANOVA with Dunnett's posttest. Statistical significance is set at p≦0.05.

TABLE 7 Treatment Groups Males Group N Treatment 10 ml/kg qd, po 1 5Normal controls (no sensitization) Inject mBSA into right only 2 8 DTH +Vehicle (70% PEG400/30% Water) 3 8 DTH + Test Compound (50 mg/kg, po,qd) 4 8 DTH + Test Compound (100 mg/kg, po, qd) 5 8 DTH + Test Compound(200 mg/kg, po, qd) 6 8 DTH + Test Compound (300 mg/kg, po, qd) 7 8DTH + CSA (100 mg/kg qd, ip) 8 8 DTH + Rapamycin (5 mg/kg qd, ip)

Compounds of Formula (I)-(VIIA) are expected to be effective in thismodel.

Example 43 Pharmacokinetic Data of a Compound of Formula (I), (IA),(II), (IIA), (III), (IIIA), (IV), (IVA), (V), (VA), (VI), (VIA), (VII),or (VIIA) in Rats

The bioavailability and plasma pharmacokinetic properties in rats ofCompound of Formula (I), (IA), (II), (IIA), (III), (IIIA), (IV), (IVA),(V), (VA), (VI), (VIA), (VII), or (VIIA) administered orally in 25%PEG400/20% ethanol/55% H₂O vehicle. Two treatment groups, 1) an i.v.dose group at 2 mg/kg; and 2) an oral dose group at 10 mg/kg areadministered to Male Sprague-Dawley rats (3 rats per group), weighingapproximately 250-300 gm. Up to 10 time points are collected for eachgroup. Typical time points are: predose, 15, 30 minutes, 1, 2, 4, 6, 8,12 and 24 hrs. Up to 300 μL of whole blood are collected via jugularvein cannula at each time point. Whole blood is collected intoanticoagulant containing microcentrifuge tubes and centrifuged at 5000rpm in a microcentrifuge for 5 minutes before plasma is transferred to aclean microcentrifuge tube. The plasma samples undergo bioanalyticalanalysis.

Example 44 Effect of Compound of Formula (I), (IA), (II), (IIA), (III),(IIIA), (IV), (IVA), (V), (VA), (VI), (VIA), (VII), or (VIIA) in RatCollagen Induced Arthritis (CIA) Model

Purpose: Determine efficacy of Test Compound administered by oral dosingqd, in inhibiting the inflammation, cartilage destruction and boneresorption of developing type II collagen arthritis in rats.

Animals: Female Lewis rats (Charles River#7246950), weighing 125-150 gat the start of the study. 40 rats are injected with collagen to getsolid responders on days 10 and 11. Four nonimmunized animals serve asnormal controls.

Materials: Test Compound, Type II collagen, Freund's incompleteadjuvant, acetic acid. Test Compound is prepared at a concentration of10 mg/ml in 50% PEG400/50% water. Collagen is prepared by making a 4mg/ml solution in 0.01N Acetic acid. Equal volumes of collagen andFreund's incomplete adjuvant, are emulsified by hand mixing until a beadof this material holds its form when placed in water.

General Study Design: Animals (10 rats/group for arthritis, 4 rats/groupfor normal control).

Animals in the arthritis groups are anesthetized with isoflurane andgiven collagen injections (D0); each animal gets 300 μl of the mixturespread over 3 subcutaneous sites on the back. On Day 6 (D6) the animalsare anesthetized again and given a second collagen injection, as before.

Oral dosing of a compound of Formula (I), (IA), (II), (IIA), (III),(IIIA), (IV), (IVA), (V), (VA), (VI), (VIA), (VII), or (VIIA) at 24 hourintervals (qd) is initiated on Day 0 using a dose volume of 5 ml/kg fororal solutions. Rats are weighed on Days 0, 3, 6, and 9-17 of arthritis,and caliper measurements of ankles taken every day beginning on Day 9.Final body weights are taken on Day 17 of arthritis. On Day 17, allanimals are anesthetized for terminal blood draw and then euthanized.Subsequently, hind paws and knees are removed, the hind paws are weighedand then (with knees) placed in formalin for processing for microscopy.Livers, spleen and thymus and kidneys are also removed, trimmed ofextraneous tissue and weighed. Kidneys are retained in formalin forhistopathology.

Sampling will occur over 1 day and involves groups 2-5 with samplesretained from all groups. This results in all animals being treatedsimilarly and is important for clinical parameters and final liverweights.

Example 45 Effect of Compounds of Formula (I), (IA), (II), (IIA), (III),(IIIA), (IV), (IVA), (V), (VA), (VI), (VIA), (VII), or (VIIA) onDNBS-Induced Colitis in Rats

Procedure: Male Wistar rats weighing 200±20 g are fasted for 24 hoursprior to use. Distal colitis is induced by intra-colonic instillation ofDNBS (2,4-dinotrobenzene sulfonic acid, 20 mg in 0.5 ml ethanol 30%)with a catheter of 12 cm in length, followed by gentle injection of air(2 ml) through the catheter to ensure that the solution remain in thecolon. The animals are divided into groups of 5 each. Test substance andvehicle are administered either daily or twice daily by appropriateroute of administration 24 hour and 1 hour before DNBS instillation andthen for 6 consecutive days thereafter. One normal control group istreated with 0.9% NaCl alone without DNBS challenge. The animals aresacrificed 12 hours after the final bid dose and 24 hours after thefinal daily dose and the colon is removed and weighed. During theexperiment, body weight, fecal occult blood and stool consistency aremonitored daily. Furthermore, when the abdominal cavity is opened beforeremoval of the colon, adhesions between the colon and other organs arenoted as is the presence of colonic ulceration after removal andweighing of each colon (a macroscopic damage score is recorded accordingto established score criteria). The colon-to-body weight ratio iscalculated according to the formula: Colon (g)/BW×100. The “Net”increase in ratio of Vehicle-control+DNBS group relative toVehicle-control group is used as a base for comparison with individualtreated groups and expressed as “Dec. (%)” (percent decrease). A 30% ormore (≧30%) reduction in colon-to-body weight ratio, relative to thevehicle treated control group, is considered significant.

Sulfasalazine is used as the standard test agent. (Hogaboam C M, et al.,An orally active non-selective endothelin receptor antagonist, bosentan,markedly reduces injury in a rat model of colitis. Eur J Pharmacol. 309:261-269, 1996; Yue G, et al., In some embodiments, the 21-aminosteroidtirilazid mesylate ameliorates inflammatory bowel disease in rats. JPharmacol Exp Ther. 276: 265-270, 1996.)

Compound of Formula (I)-(VIIA) are expected to reduce colitis in thismodel.

Example 46 Effect of Compounds of Formula (I), (IA), (II), (IIA), (III),(IIIA), (IV), (IVA), (V), (VA), (VI), (VIA), (VII), or (VIIA) onRejection of Skin Transplants in Rats

Procedure. Specific pathogen free Lewis and Brown Norway rats 10 weeksof age are purchased from Charles River and housed under cleanconventional conditions. The animals are handled and allowed toacclimatize for a period of two weeks. Skin donors: female Brown Norwayrats, 10 weeks of age. Skin recipients: female Lewis rats, 10 weeks ofage.

The donor Brown Norway rats are killed to serve as donors of 5 to 8 skintransplants. Directly after killing the Brown Norway rats, the abdominalskin of the rats is shaved and skin transplants of 20 mm in diameter insize are taken. After removal of connective tissue, these grafts aretransplanted onto Lewis rats. This is performed by shaving the upperdorsal skin of the Lewis rat under isoflurane anesthesia, removing apiece of skin of 15 mm in diameter by punching and replacement with askin transplant derived from the Brown Norway rat.

During the study each graft is fixated by 4-6 stitches using Safil 6/0violet (B Braun, Aesculap) and covered by Paraffin Gauze Dressing BP(3×3 cm, Smith & Nephew), a piece of gauze and surgical tape. Thisadaptation minimizes the chance of loosing a transplant for reasonsdifferent from rejection.

In all cases, transplants are protected with a bandage; these areremoved after six days to enable daily inspection of the transplant.

Rejection is monitored by evaluating first signs of inflammation(redness) and necrosis (hardening and blackening of the graft).

Example 47 Phase II Clinical Trial of the Safety and Efficacy ofCompounds of Formula (I), (IA), (II), (IIA), (III), (IIIA), (IV), (IVA),(V), (VA), (VI), (VIA), (VII), or (VIIA) in Patients with ActiveRheumatoid Arthritis

The purpose of this phase II trial is to investigate the safety,tolerability, PK, PD, and efficacy of single and repeat intravenousinfusions of a compound of Formula (I), (IA), (II), (IIA), (III),(IIIA), (IV), (IVA), (V), (VA), (VI), (VIA), (VII), or (VIIA) inpatients with active rheumatoid arthritis.

Patients:

Eligible subjects will be men and women between the ages of 18 and 75

Criteria:

Inclusion Criteria:

-   -   All subjects must use acceptable contraception to ensure that no        pregnancies occur during the course of the study and for at        least 12 weeks after dosing for males and for 32 weeks after        dosing for females;    -   Body mass index within the range 18.5-35 kg/m² inclusive, in        addition to a weight range of 55-95 kg;    -   The subject must be capable of giving informed consent and can        comply with the study requirements and timetable;    -   The subject must have a diagnosis of RA according to the revised        1987 criteria of the American College of Rheumatology (ACR);    -   The subject must have a DAS28 disease activity score of greater        than 4.2 at screening and pre-dose;    -   The subject must have a CRP serum level of >/0.5 mg/dl or an ESR        level 28 mm/hour at screening and pre-dose;    -   The subject has NOT received any biological therapy in the past,        including biologicals for the treatment of rheumatoid arthritis;    -   The subject must have liver function tests including alanine        transaminase (ALT) and aspartate transaminase (AST) within 1.5        times the upper limit of normal (ULN) and alkaline phosphatase        (ALP) within 3 times ULN at screening. The patient must also        have total bilirubin within the ULN at screening;    -   The subject must have received at least 3 months of methotrexate        and must be on a stable dose of methotrexate (up to 25 mg/week)        for at least 8 weeks prior to screening and be willing to remain        on this dose throughout the study;    -   If sulfasalazine is being taken in addition to methotrexate, the        subject must be on a stable dose for at least 4 weeks prior to        screening and be willing to remain on this dose throughout the        study;    -   If hydroxychloroquine or chloroquine is being taken in addition        to methotrexate, the subject must be on a stable dose for at        least 3 months prior to screening and be willing to remain on        this dose throughout the study;    -   Those subjects on other oral anti-rheumatic therapies, which may        include Non Steroidal Anti Inflammatory Drugs (NSAIDs), COX-2        inhibitors, oral glucocorticoids e.g. prednisolone (˜10 mg/day)        must be on stable dosing regimens for at least 4 weeks prior to        screening and be willing to remain on this regime throughout the        study. Subjects receiving intramuscular glucocorticoids e.g        methylprednisolone (˜120 mg/month) must be on a stable dosing        regimen for at least 3 months prior to screening and be willing        to remain on this regimen throughout the study;    -   The subject must be on a stable dose of folate supplements (5        mg/week) for at least 4 weeks prior.

Exclusion Criteria:

-   -   Any clinically relevant abnormality identified on the screening        medical assessment, laboratory examination (e.g. haematology        parameter outside the normal limits), or ECG (12 Lead or        Holter);    -   The subject has a positive Hepatitis B surface antigen or        Hepatitis C antibody result at screening;    -   The subject has a history of elevated liver function tests on        more than one occasion (ALT, AST and ALP>3×Upper Limit of Normal        (ULN); total bilirubin>1.5×ULN) in the past 6 months;    -   Previous exposure or past infection caused by Mycobacterium        tuberculosis;    -   The subject has an acute infection;    -   The subject has a history of repeated, chronic or opportunistic        infections that, in the opinion of the investigator and/or GSK        medical monitor, places the subject at an unacceptable risk as a        participant in this trial;    -   The subject has a history of malignancy, except for surgically        cured basal cell carcinoma or females with cured cervical        carcinoma (>2 yrs prior);    -   The subject has a history of human immunodeficiency virus (HIV)        or other immunodeficiency disease;    -   The subject whose calculated creatinine clearance is less than        50 ml/min;    -   The subject has significant cardiac, pulmonary, metabolic,        renal, hepatic or gastrointestinal conditions that, in the        opinion of the investigator and/or GSK medical monitor, places        the subject at an unacceptable risk as a participant in this        trial;    -   The subject has taken cyclosporine, leflonomide, cyclophophamide        or azathioprine within 1 month of screening. Subjects that have        taken cyclosporine, leflonomide, cyclophophamide or azathioprine        in the past must have recovered from all drug related adverse        events;    -   The subject has taken gold salts or d-penicillamine within 1        month prior to screening. Subjects that have taken gold salts or        d-penicillamine in the past must have recovered from all drug        related adverse events;    -   The subject has received intra-articular glucocorticoids within        1 month of screening;    -   Recent history of bleeding disorders, anaemia, peptic ulcer        disease, haematemesis or gastrointestinal bleeding;    -   Subjects with a history of haematological disease or acquired        platelet disorders, including drug-induced thrombocytopaenia,        acute idiopathic thrombocytopaenia or von Willebrand's disease;    -   Subjects with a known risk of intra-cranial haemorrhage        including Central Nervous System (CNS) surgery within the last        12 months, arterial vascular malformations, aneurysms,        significant closed head trauma within 6 months or any other        incident the investigator and/or medical monitor considers to be        relevant;    -   The subject has Hb<10 g/deciliter (dL) and platelet        count<150×109/Liter (L);    -   Donation of blood in excess of 500 ml within a 56 day period        prior to dosing;    -   An unwillingness of male subjects to abstain from sexual        intercourse with pregnant or lactating women; or an        unwillingness of the male subject to use a condom with        spermicide in addition to having their female partner use        another form of contraception such as an interuterine device        (IUD), diaphragm with spermicide, oral contraceptives,        injectable progesterone, subdermal implants of levonorgestrel or        a tubal ligation if the woman could become pregnant for at least        12 weeks after dosing;    -   An unwillingness of female subject of child bearing potential to        use adequate contraception, as defined in the study restriction        section. If necessary, women of non-child bearing potential        (i.e. post-menopausal or surgically sterile e.g. tubal ligation        or hysterectomy or bilateral oophorectomy) will be confirmed.        Postmenopausal status will be confirmed by serum follicle        stimulating hormone (FSH) and oestradiol concentrations at        screening. Surgical sterility will be defined as females who        have had a documented hysterectomy, tubal ligation or bilateral        oophorectomy;    -   The subject has a history of use of drugs of abuse within 12        months prior to screening;    -   History of regular alcohol consumption exceeding average weekly        intake of greater than 21 units or an average daily intake of        greater than 3 units (males) or an average weekly intake of        greater than 14 units or an average daily intake of greater than        2 units (females). Subjects who regularly consume more than 12        units of alcohol in a 24 h period will also be excluded. 1 unit        is equivalent to a half-pint (220 ml) of beer/lager or 1 (25 ml)        measure of spirits or 1 glass (125 ml) of wine;    -   Positive pregnancy test or lactating at screening;    -   Participation in a trial with any investigational drug within 3        months or 5 half-lives (whichever is longer) before.

Study Design:

This is a randomized, double-blinded, placebo-controlled adaptive, dosefinding study to investigate the safety, tolerability, PK, PD andefficacy of single and repeat intravenous infusions of a compound ofFormula (I), (IA), (II), (IIA), (III), (IIIA), (IV), (IVA), (V), (VA),(VI), (VIA), (VII), or (VIIA) in patients with active rheumatoidarthritis. The study is divided into 2 parts: Part A is an adaptive,dose finding phase which will provide safety, tolerability, PK and PD onsingle intravenous infusions. Part B is a repeat dose phase which willprovide safety, tolerability, PK, PD and efficacy following repeatintravenous infusions of a selected dose level.

Primary Outcome Measures:

-   -   Safety and Tolerability following single ascending doses of a        compound of Formula (I), (IA), (II), (IIA), (III), (IRA), (IV),        (IVA), (V), (VA), (VI), (VIA), (VII), or (VIIA) at 1 month and        following 3 repeat doses of a compound of Formula (I), (IA),        (II), (IIA), (III), (IIIA), (IV), (IVA), (V), (VA), (VI), (VIA),        (VII), or (VIIA) at 3 months. Clinical Efficacy (DAS28 score) of        a compound of Formula (I), (IA), (II), (IIA), (III), (IIIA),        (IV), (IVA), (V), (VA), (VI), (VIA), (VII), or (VIIA) at 1 month

Secondary Outcome Measures:

-   -   Weighted mean DA828 after single and repeat intravenous doses    -   Plasma PK parameters of a compound of Formula (I), (IA), (II),        (IIA), (III), (IIIA), (IV),

(IVA), (V), (VA), (VI), (VIA), (VII), or (VIIA) after single and repeatintravenous doses including free, and bound a compound of Formula (I),(IA), (II), (IIA), (III), (IIIA), (IV), (IVA), (V), (VA), (VI), (VIA),(VII), or (VIIA) (serum) concentrations, AUC_((0-∞)), C_(max),clearance, volume of distribution and accumulation ratio

-   -   DA828 and EULAR response criteria after single and repeat        intravenous doses    -   ACR20/ACR50/ACR70 response after single and repeat intravenous        doses    -   Number of swollen joints assessed using 28-joint counts    -   Number of tender/painful joints assessed using 28-joint counts    -   Subject's pain assessment    -   Physician's global assessment of arthritis condition    -   Patients' global assessment of arthritis condition    -   Functional disability index (Health Assessment Questionnaire)    -   C-reactive Protein (CRP)    -   ESR    -   Global Fatigue Index    -   HAQ disability index    -   Pharmacodynamic biomarkers after single and repeat intravenous        doses    -   Characteristic AUC₅₀ and EC₅₀ for clinical endpoint changes with        plasma exposure model, as assessed by sigmoid E_(max) and        indirect response PK/PD models.    -   Immunogenicity (Human anti-compound of Formula (I), (IA), (II),        (IIA), (III), (IIIA), (IV), (IVA), (V), (VA), (VI), (VIA),        (VII), or (VIIA) antibodies)

Example 48 Phase II Clinical Trial of the Safety and Efficacy ofCompounds of Formula (I), (IA), (II), (IIA), (III), (IIIA), (IV), (IVA),(V), (VA), (VI), (VIA), (VII), or (VIIA) in Patients with Severe,Recalcitrant, Plaque-Type Psoriasis

The purpose of this phase II trial is to investigate the safety,efficacy, and tolerability of a compound of Formula (I), (IA), (II),(IIA), (III), (IIIA), (IV), (IVA), (V), (VA), (VI), (VIA), (VII), or(VIIA) in patients with severe, recalcitrant, plaque-type psoriasis.

Patients:

Eligible subjects will be men and women between the ages of 18 and 75.

Criteria:

Inclusion Criteria:

-   -   The patient has severe, recalcitrant, plaque-type psoriasis and        has failed at least 1 systemic therapy (for the purposes of this        study psoralen with ultraviolet light A is considered to be a        systemic therapy);    -   The patient has psoriatic involvement of at least 10% of BSA;    -   The patient has a PSGA score of 4 or greater;    -   The patient, if a woman, is surgically sterile or 2 years        postmenopausal, or if of childbearing potential is currently        using a medically accepted method of contraception, and agrees        to continue use of this method for the duration of the study        (and for 30 days after participation in the study). Acceptable        methods of contraception include: abstinence, steroidal        contraceptive (oral, transdermal, implanted, or injected) in        conjunction with a barrier method, or intrauterine device (IUD);    -   The patient, if a main, is surgically sterile, or if capable of        producing offspring, is currently using an approved method of        birth control, and agrees to continued use of this method for        the duration of the study (and for 60 days after taking the last        dose of a compound of Formula (I), (IA), (II), (IIA), (III),        (IIIA), (IV), (IVA), (V), (VA), (VI), (VIA), (VII), or (VIIA)        because of the possible effects on spermatogenesis);    -   The patient must be willing and able to comply with study        procedures and restrictions and willing to return to the clinic        for the follow-up evaluation as specified in this protocol.

Exclusion Criteria:

-   -   The patient has received treatment with systemic psoriasis        treatments (specifically, retinoids, methotrexate, cyclosporine        A, etanercept, efalizumab, other biological agents or other        immunomodulators) within 4 weeks, or UV based therapy within 2        weeks, or alefacept within 6 weeks of the planned 1st day of        study treatment;    -   The patient has received treatment with potent CYP3A4 inhibitors        including cyclosporine, clotrimazole, fluconazole, itraconazole,        ketoconazole, voriconazole, erythromycin, clarithromycin, and        troleandomycin, human immunodeficiency virus (HIV) protease        inhibitors, or nefazodone within 1 week (7 days) of the planned        1st day of study treatment;    -   The patient is currently receiving warfarin;    -   The patient has hypersensitivity to a compound of Formula (I),        (IA), (II), (IIA), (III), (IIIA), (IV), (IVA), (V), (VA), (VI),        (VIA), (VII), or (VIIA) or any component of a compound of        Formula (I), (IA), (II), (IIA), (III), (IIIA), (IV), (IVA), (V),        (VA), (VI), (VIA), (VII), or (VIIA);    -   The patient has one or more of the following serum chemistry        values as determined at the screening visit (visit 1):    -   bilirubin levels greater than 2 times the upper limit of normal        (ULN);    -   ALT or AST levels greater than 2 times the ULN;    -   serum creatinine levels or more than 2 mg/dL;    -   The patient requires current treatment for HIV with protease        inhibitors;    -   The patient is taking medication for a clinical diagnosis of        gastrointestinal ulceration or has experienced melena or        hematoemesis in the previous 3 weeks;    -   The patient is a woman who is pregnant or lactating;    -   The patient has received treatment with an investigation drug        within 4 weeks of the planned 1st day of study treatment.

Study Design:

This is an exploratory, open-label, nonrandomized, dose-escalation studyof the efficacy, safety, and tolerability of a compound of Formula (I),(IA), (II), (IIA), (III), (IIIA), (IV), (IVA), (V), (VA), (VI), (VIA),(VII), or (VIIA) in patients with severe, recalcitrant, plaque-typepsoriasis.

Example 49 Phase II Clinical Trial of the Safety and Efficacy ofCompounds of Formula (I), (IA), (II), (IIA), (III), (IIIA), (IV), (IVA),(V), (VA), (VI), (VIA), (VII), or (VIIA) for Prophylaxis of AcuteRejection after Renal Transplantation

The standard immunosuppressive treatment after renal transplantation isa combination of tacrolimus, mycophenolate mofetil, and prednisolone.With this regimen the incidence of acute rejection within the first sixmonths after transplantation can drop to about 20%. The main challengeat present remains to improve long-term outcome by preventing chronicallograft nephropathy (CAN). Since acute rejection is a strong predictorof CAN, a further decrease in the incidence of acute rejection canimprove the long-term graft survival. The purpose of this phase IIclinical trial is to investigate the effectiveness and safety of acompound of Formula (I), (IA), (II), (IIA), (III), (IIIA), (IV), (IVA),(V), (VA), (VI), (VIA), (VII), or (VIIA) for prophylaxis of acuterejection after renal transplantation.

Patients:

Eligible subjects will be men and women ages 18 and older

Criteria:

Inclusion Criteria:

-   -   Renal transplant recipients;    -   Signed, dated, and witnessed IRB approved informed consent;

Exclusion Criteria:

-   -   Pregnancy;    -   Living donor, who is HLA identical;    -   Hemolytic uremic syndrome as original kidney disease;    -   Focal segmental glomerulosclerosis that had recurred in a        previous graft;    -   More than two previously failed grafts and/or PRA>85%;    -   Diabetes mellitus that is currently not treated with insulin;    -   Total white blood cell count<3,000/mm3 or platelet        count<75,000/mm3;    -   Active infection with hepatitis B, hepatitis C, or HIV;    -   History of tuberculosis.

Study Design:

This is a randomized, double blind, placebo controlled interventionstudy on the efficacy and safety of the prophylactic use of a compoundof Formula (I), (IA), (II), (IIA), (III), (IIIA), (IV), (IVA), (V),(VA), (VI), (VIA), (VII), or (VIIA). One group will receive a singledose of a compound of Formula (I), (IA), (II), (IIA), (III), (IIIA),(IV), (IVA), (V), (VA), (VI), (VIA), (VII), or (VIIA) intravenously atthe time of transplantation, and the other group receives a placeboinfusion.

Primary Outcome:

-   -   To determine the incidence and severity of biopsy-confirmed        acute rejection within the first six months after        transplantation

Secondary Outcomes:

-   -   Renal function as estimated by the endogenous creatinine        clearance at 6 months    -   Occurrence of chronic allograft nephropathy at 6 months    -   Cumulative incidence of infections and malignancies at 6 months    -   Medical costs during the first 6 months after transplantation    -   Patient and graft survival

Example 50 Phase II Clinical Trial of the Safety and Tolerability of aCompound of Formula (I), (IA), (II), (IIA), (III), (IIIA), (IV), (IVA),(V), (VA), (VI), (VIA), (VII), or (VIIA) in Patients with ActiveUlcerative Colitis (UC)

The purpose of this phase II trial is to investigate the safety,tolerability of a compound of Formula (I), (IA), (II), (IIA), (III),(IIIA), (IV), (IVA), (V), (VA), (VI), (VIA), (VII), or (VIIA) regimen inpatients with active ulcerative colitis.

Patients:

Eligible subjects will be men and women aged 18 and older

Criteria:

Inclusion Criteria:

-   -   Active UC on 5-ASA therapy and also treated with 6-MP and/or        corticosteroids or who have previously been treated with AZA,        6-MP or corticosteroids and could not tolerate them;    -   Mayo score of 6 to 10 points with moderate to severe disease on        endoscopy (Mayo score of at least 2) performed ≦14 days of study        drug administration;    -   Subjects on the following medications may be enrolled into the        study if the medications were according to the following        schedules prior to study drug administration and if no changes        are anticipated during the study;        -   prednisolone≦20 mg daily (or equivalent) (dose must be            stable for at least 2 weeks prior to study drug            administration);        -   5-ASA (dose must be stable for at least 4 weeks prior to            study drug administration);        -   AZA or 6-MP (dose must be stable for at least 3 months prior            to study drug administration);        -   Rectal steroids or 5-ASA (must have been stable for at least            4 weeks prior to study drug);    -   Subjects using rectal medications must have visible disease on        sigmoidoscopy at ≧20 cm;    -   Screening laboratory values must meet certain criteria:        -   Women must be postmenopausal (>12 months without menses) or            surgically sterile (e.g., by hysterectomy and/or bilateral            oophorectomy) or must be using effective contraception            (e.g., oral contraceptives, intrauterine device (IUD),            double barrier method of condom and spermicidal) for at            least 4 weeks prior to study drug administration and agree            to continue contraception for the duration of their            participation in the study; and        -   Sexually active male subjects must use a barrier method of            contraception during the duration of the study

Exclusion Criteria:

-   -   Anti-TNF therapy within 8 weeks before study drug        administration;    -   Any experimental therapy more therapy ≦4 weeks before study drug        administration;    -   Prior treatment with any monoclonal antibody or        immunoglobulin-based fusion proteins≦8 weeks prior to study        treatment;    -   Presence of Cushing's syndrome;    -   Toxic megacolon or fulminant disease likely to require        colectomy;    -   Contraindication to colonoscopy or sigmoidoscopy;    -   Primary or secondary immunodeficiency;    -   Autoimmune disease besides UC, with the exceptions of Sjogren's        syndrome or hypothyroidism;    -   History of malignancy, excluding adequately treated and cured        basal or squamous cell of the skin, or cervical carcinoma in        situ;    -   Major psychiatric disease (subjects with stable depression        receiving appropriate management will be permitted in the        study);    -   Evidence of acute or chronic infection as evidenced by:    -   stool culture positive for pathogens and/or Clostridium        difficile toxin;    -   findings on Screening chest radiography such as pulmonary        infiltrate(s) or adenopathy;    -   current treatment for tuberculosis infection, clinical or        radiological evidence of active TB, or for subjects in North        America, a positive PPD without prior prophylaxis;    -   Herpes zoster ≦3 months prior to study drug administration;    -   active infectious disease requiring i.v. antibiotics within 4        weeks prior to study treatment or oral antibiotics at the time        of enrollment;    -   HIV or AIDS;    -   positive tests for HBV, or HCV indicating active or chronic        infection;    -   Clinically significant cardiac disease requiring medication,        unstable angina, myocardial within 6 months, or congestive heart        failure;    -   Arrhythmia requiring active therapy, with the exception of        clinically insignificant or minor conduction abnormalities;    -   History of cerebrovascular disease requiring        medication/treatment;    -   Anticoagulation therapy or a known bleeding disorder;    -   Seizure disorder requiring active therapy;    -   Known drug or alcohol abuse;    -   Pregnant or nursing;    -   Any underlying medical condition that in the Principal        Investigator's opinion will make the study drug hazardous to the        subject or would obscure the interpretation of treatment        efficacy or safety; or    -   Inability or unwillingness to return for Follow-up visits and        comply with study protocol

Primary Outcome Measures:

-   -   Change in Mayo score at Day 57 compared with Screening

Secondary Outcome Measures:

-   -   Remission rate

Study Design:

This is a phase II, double-blind, placebo-controlled, randomized,multi-dose study of a compound of Formula (I), (IA), (II), (IIA), (III),(IIIA), (IV), (IVA), (V), (VA), (VI), (VIA), (VII), or (VIIA) insubjects with active UC experiencing flare. All subjects will haveactive disease while on a 5-ASA containing medication and are either onstable doses of corticosteroids and/or azathioprine or 6-mercaptopurine,or who have previously been on these medications but could not toleratethem. Flare is defined as a Mayo score of 6 to 10 with moderate tosevere disease activity on endoscopy (Mayo endoscopic subscore of atleast 2) within 2 weeks of receiving study drug administration. Doses ofpermitted concomitant medications (corticosteroids, azathioprine (AZA),6-mercaptopurine (6-MP), and 5-aminosalicylates (5-ASA) containingcompounds) should remain constant during the course of the study.Subjects will be randomized to receive placebo or a compound of Formula(I), (IA), (II), (IIA), (III), (IIIA), (IV), (IVA), (V), (VA), (VI),(VIA), (VII), or (VIIA) intravenously on Days 1, 15, 29, and 43. Allsubjects will be seen in the clinic at regular intervals up to Day 85for safety, efficacy, pharmacokinetic, and/or pharmacodynamicassessments. All subjects will be contacted 70 days after the last doseof study drug. Assessment of safety will be determined by vital signmeasurements, clinical laboratory tests, physical examinations,immunogenicity assessments, chest x-ray, electrocardiograms, and theincidence and severity of treatment emergent adverse events. The primaryclinical assessment of activity will be determined by the change in Mayoscore at Day 57 compared with Screening. Secondary endpoints includedetermination of remission rate by the mayo score at Day 57, evaluationof mucosal healing and change from baseline in the IBDQ score.

Example 51 Phase II Clinical Trial of the Safety and Efficacy ofCompounds of Formula (I), (IA), (II), (IIA), (III), (IIIA), (IV), (IVA),(V), (VA), (VI), (VIA), (VII), or (VIIA) in Patients with MultipleSclerosis

The purpose of this phase II trial is to investigate the safety,efficacy and tolerability of a compound of Formula (I), (IA), (II),(IIA), (III), (IIIA), (IV), (IVA), (V), (VA), (VI), (VIA), (VII), or(VIIA) in patients with Relapsing-Remitting Multiple Sclerosis.

Patients:

Eligible subjects will be men and women between the ages of 18 and 65.

Criteria:

Inclusion Criteria:

-   -   Have a definite diagnosis of Relapsing remitting Multiple        Sclerosis    -   Have a history of at least 1 of the following: a. A minimum of 2        relapses of MS within the previous 2 years but not within the        1-month period prior to screening. b. A relapse of MS within the        previous 6 months but not within the 1-month period prior to        screening

Exclusion Criteria:

-   -   Have a CNS disease (e.g., CNS lymphoma, systemic lupus        erythematous)    -   Have significant bulbar involvement of MS or other neurologic        deficits    -   Have a decubitus ulcer    -   Have received immunomodulatory therapies within 3 months of        screening

Primary Outcome Measures:

-   -   The cumulative number of newly Gd-enhancing T1-weighted lesions        on cranial MRIs through week 23

Secondary Outcome Measures:

-   -   The total number of relapses of MS through week 23; change from        baseline in Expanded Disability Status Scale (EDSS) score at        week 23

Study Design:

This is a phase II, double-blind, placebo-controlled, randomized,dose-ranging study of multiple subcutaneous injections of a compound ofFormula (I), (IA), (II), (IIA), (III), (IIIA), (IV), (IVA), (V), (VA),(VI), (VIA), (VII), or (VIIA) in patients with relapsing-remittingmultiple sclerosis. Patients will receive subcutaneous injections of acompound of Formula (I), (IA), (II), (IIA), (III), (IIIA), (IV), (IVA),(V), (VA), (VI), (VIA), (VII), or (VIIA) or placebo at weeks 0, 1, 2, 3,7, 11, 15, and 19 or 100.

Pharmaceutical Compositions

Parenteral Composition

To prepare a parenteral pharmaceutical composition suitable foradministration by injection, 100 mg of a compound of Formula (I), (IA),(II), (IIA), (III), (IIIA), (IV), (IVA), (V), (VA), (VI), (VIA), (VII),or (VIIA) is dissolved in DMSO and then mixed with 10 mL of 0.9% sterilesaline. The mixture is incorporated into a dosage unit form suitable foradministration by injection.

In another embodiment, the following ingredients are mixed to form aninjectable formulation:

Ingredient Amount Compound of Formula (I), (IA), (II), (IIA), (III),(IIIA), 1.2 g (IV), (IVA), (V), (VA), (VI), (VIA), (VII), or (VIIA)sodium acetate buffer solution (0.4M) 2.0 mL HCl (1N) or NaOH (1M) q.s.to suitable pH water (distilled, sterile) q.s. to 20 mL

All of the above ingredients, except water, are combined and stirred andif necessary, with slight heating if necessary. A sufficient quantity ofwater is then added.

Oral Composition

To prepare a pharmaceutical composition for oral delivery, 100 mg of acompound of Formula (I), (IA), (II), (IIA), (III), (IIIA), (IV), (IVA),(V), (VA), (VI), (VIA), (VII), or (VIIA) is mixed with 750 mg of starch.The mixture is incorporated into an oral dosage unit, such as a hardgelatin capsule, which is suitable for oral administration.

In another embodiment, the following ingredients are mixed intimatelyand pressed into single scored tablets.

Quantity per Ingredient tablet, mg compound of Formula (I), (IA), (II),(IIA), (III), (IIIA), 200 (IV), (IVA), (V), (VA), (VI), (VIA), (VII), or(VIIA) Cornstarch 50 croscarmellose sodium 25 Lactose 120 magnesiumstearate 5

In yet another embodiment, the following ingredients are mixedintimately and loaded into a hard-shell gelatin capsule.

Quantity per Ingredient tablet, mg compound of Formula (I), (IA), (II),(IIA), (III), (IIIA), 200 (IV), (IVA), (V), (VA), (VI), (VIA), (VII), or(VIIA) lactose, spray-dried 148 magnesium stearate 2

In yet another embodiment, the following ingredients are mixed to form asolution/suspension for oral administration:

Ingredient Amount Compound of Formula (I), (IA), (II), (IIA), (III),(IIIA), 1 g (IV), (IVA), (V), (VA), (VI), (VIA), (VII), or (VIIA)Anhydrous Sodium Carbonate 0.1 g Ethanol (200 proof), USP 10 mL PurifiedWater, USP 90 mL Aspartame 0.003 g

Sublingual (Hard Lozenge) Composition

To prepare a pharmaceutical composition for buccal delivery, such as ahard lozenge, mix 100 mg of a compound of Formula (I), (IA), (II),(IIA), (III), (IIIA), (IV), (IVA), (V), (VA), (VI), (VIA), (VII), or(VIIA) with 420 mg of powdered sugar mixed with 1.6 mL of light cornsyrup, 2.4 mL distilled water, and 0.42 mL mint extract. The mixture isgently blended and poured into a mold to form a lozenge suitable forbuccal administration.

Inhalation Composition

To prepare a pharmaceutical composition for inhalation delivery, 20 mgof a compound of Formula (I), (IA), (II), (IIA), (III), (IIIA), (IV),(IVA), (V), (VA), (VI), (VIA), (VII), or (VIIA) is mixed with 50 mg ofanhydrous citric acid and 100 mL of 0.9% sodium chloride solution. Themixture is incorporated into an inhalation delivery unit, such as anebulizer, which is suitable for inhalation administration.

Rectal Gel Composition

To prepare a pharmaceutical composition for rectal delivery, 100 mg of acompound of Formula (I), (IA), (II), (IIA), (III), (IIIA), (IV), (IVA),(V), (VA), (VI), (VIA), (VII), or (VIIA) is mixed with 2.5 g ofmethylcelluose (1500 mPa), 100 mg of methylparapen, 5 g of glycerin and100 mL of purified water. The resulting gel mixture is then incorporatedinto rectal delivery units, such as syringes, which are suitable forrectal administration.

Suppository Formulation

A suppository of total weight 2.5 g is prepared by mixing a compound ofFormula (I), (IA), (II), (IIA), (III), (IRA), (IV), (IVA), (V), (VA),(VI), (VIA), (VII), or (VIIA) with Witepsol™ H-15 (triglycerides ofsaturated vegetable fatty acid; Riches-Nelson, Inc., New York), and hasthe following composition:

Quantity per suppository, Ingredient mg Compound of Formula (I), (IA),(II), (IIA), (III), (IIIA), 500 (IV), (IVA), (V), (VA), (VI), (VIA),(VII), or (VIIA) Witepsol ® H-15 balance

Topical Gel Composition

To prepare a pharmaceutical topical gel composition, 100 mg of acompound of Formula (I), (IA), (II), (IIA), (III), (IIIA), (IV), (IVA),(V), (VA), (VI), (VIA), (VII), or (VIIA) is mixed with 1.75 g ofhydroxypropyl cellulose, 10 mL of propylene glycol, 10 mL of isopropylmyristate and 100 mL of purified alcohol USP. The resulting gel mixtureis then incorporated into containers, such as tubes, which are suitablefor topical administration.

Ophthalmic Solution Composition

To prepare a pharmaceutical opthalmic solution composition, 100 mg of acompound of Formula (I), (IA), (II), (IIA), (III), (IIIA), (IV), (IVA),(V), (VA), (VI), (VIA), (VII), or (VIIA) is mixed with 0.9 g of NaCl in100 mL of purified water and filtered using a 0.2 micron filter. Theresulting isotonic solution is then incorporated into ophthalmicdelivery units, such as eye drop containers, which are suitable forophthalmic administration.

The examples and embodiments described herein are for illustrativepurposes only and in some embodiments, various modifications or changesare to be included within the purview of disclosure and scope of theappended claims.

What is claimed is:
 1. A compound of Formula (VI) having the structure:

wherein: R′₁ is,

L₂ is —NH—C(═O)—, or —C(═O)NH—; Y is independently selected from CR₉ orN; R₂ is phenyl, pyridyl, benzoxazolyl, or thiadiazolyl; wherein phenyl,pyridyl, benzoxazolyl, or thiadiazolyl is optionally substituted with atleast one R₃; R₃ is independently selected from H, F, D, Cl, Br, I, —CN,—NO₂, —OH, —CF₃, —OCF₃, —OR₅, C₁-C₆alkyl, C₁-C₆heteroalkyl,C₁-C₆haloalkyl, n is an integer selected from 0-3; R₉ is independentlyselected from H, D, halogen, C₁-C₆alkyl, C₁-C₆haloalkyl, —OR₅, —OCF₃,C₁-C₆ carbonylalkyl, or —CF₃; R₁₀ is selected from halogen, C₁-C₆alkyl,C₁-C₆haloalkyl, —OR₅, —OCF₃, C₁-C₆ carbonylalkyl, or —CF₃; R₅ isindependently selected from H, C₁-C₆alkyl, and C₁-C₆haloalkyl; or apharmaceutically acceptable salt, or pharmaceutically acceptable solvatethereof.
 2. A compound selected from:

or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, or pharmaceutically acceptablesolvate thereof.
 3. A pharmaceutical composition comprising apharmaceutically acceptable diluent, excipient or binder, and a compoundof claim 1 or pharmaceutically acceptable salt, or pharmaceuticallyacceptable solvate thereof.
 4. The compound of claim 1 wherein R′1 is


5. The compound of claim 1 wherein R′₁ is


6. The compound of claim 1 wherein L₂ is —NH—C(═O)—.
 7. The compound ofclaim 1 wherein Y is CR₉.
 8. The compound of claim 7 wherein R₉ is H. 9.The compound of claim 1 wherein n is
 0. 10. The compound of claim 1wherein R₂ is phenyl optionally substituted with at least one R₃. 11.The compound of claim 1 wherein R₂ is benzoxaolyl optionally substitutedwith at least one R₃.
 12. The compound of claim 11 wherein heteroaryl ispyridine.
 13. The compound of claim 11 wherein heteroaryl isthiadiazole.
 14. The compound of claim 10 wherein R₃ is halogen.